supply & fixing high tensile wire mesh and ... -...
TRANSCRIPT
0
THE DEMOCRATIC SOCIALIST REPUBLIC OF
SRI LANKA
MINISTRY OF ROADS & HIGHWAYS
ROAD DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY
CLIMATE RESILIENCE IMPROVEMENT PROJECT
SUPPLY & FIXING HIGH TENSILE WIRE
MESH AND RELATED ACCESORIES IN THE
UNSTABLE SLOPE SEGMENTS BETWEEN
CULVERT NO 75/5 TO 76/4 ON PERADENIYA -
BADULLA - CHENKALADI ROAD (A005) ROAD
BIDDING DOCUMENT
CONTRACT NO: CRIP/WORKS/RDA/NCB/328
04th December 2019
1
Table of Contents
PART 1 – Bidding Procedures ........................................................................................02
Section I Instructions to Bidders ...............................................................................03
Section II Bid Data Sheets ..........................................................................................30
Section III Evaluation and Qualification Criteria ........................................................38
Section IV Bidding Forms ...........................................................................................51
Section V Bidder’s Qualifications ..............................................................................78
PART 2 – Employer’s Requirements .............................................................................96
Section VI Employer’s Requirements ..........................................................................97
PART 3 – Conditions of Contract and Contract Forms ............................................310
Section VII General Conditions of Contract ...............................................................311
Section VIII Particular Conditions of Contract ............................................................336
Section IX Contract Forms.........................................................................................346
2
PART 1 -BIDDING PROCEDURES
3
Section I - Instructions to Bidders
4
Section I - Instructions to Bidders
Table of Contents
Clause Page
A General ..........................................................................................................................07
1. Scope of Bid .......................................................................................................... 07
2. Source of Funds .................................................................................................... 07
3. Fraud and Corruption ............................................................................................ 07
4. Eligible Bidders .................................................................................................... 10
5. Eligible Materials, Equipment and Services ......................................................... 12
B Content of Bidding Document ....................................................................................12
6. Sections of Bidding Document ............................................................................. 12
7. Clarification of Bidding Document, Site Visit, Pre-Bid Meeting ......................... 13
8. Amendment of Bidding Document ....................................................................... 14
C Preparation of Bids ......................................................................................................14
9. Cost of Bidding ..................................................................................................... 14
10. Language of Bid .................................................................................................... 14
11. Documents Comprising the Bid ............................................................................ 15
12. Letter of Bid and Schedules .................................................................................. 15
13. Alternative Bid ...................................................................................................... 15
14. Bid Prices and Discounts ...................................................................................... 16
15. Currencies of Bid and Payment ............................................................................ 17
16. Documents Comprising the Technical Proposal ................................................... 17
17 Documents Establishing the Qualification of the Bidder ..................................... 17
18. Period of Validity of Bids ..................................................................................... 17
19. Bid Security .......................................................................................................... 18
20. Format and Signing of Bid .................................................................................... 20
D Submission and Opening of Bids ................................................................................20
21. Sealing and Marking of Bids ................................................................................ 20
22. Deadline for Submission of Bids .......................................................................... 21
23. Late Bids ............................................................................................................... 21
24. Withdrawal, Substitution and Modification of Bids ............................................. 21
25. Bid Opening .......................................................................................................... 22
5
E Evaluation and Comparison of Bids ..........................................................................22
26. Confidentiality ...................................................................................................... 23
27. Clarification of Bids .............................................................................................. 23
28. Deviations, Reservations and Omissions .............................................................. 24
29. Determination of Responsiveness ......................................................................... 24
30. Nonconformities, Errors and Omissions ............................................................... 25
31. Correction of Arithmetical Errors ......................................................................... 25
32. Conversion to Single Currency ............................................................................. 26
33. Margin of Preference ............................................................................................ 26
34. Evaluation of Bids................................................................................................. 26
35. Comparison of Bids .............................................................................................. 27
36. Qualification of the Bidder ................................................................................... 28
37. Employer’s Right to Accept Any Bid and to Reject Any or All Bids .................. 28
F Award of Contract .......................................................................................................28
38. Award Criteria ...................................................................................................... 28
39. Notification of Award ........................................................................................... 29
40. Signing of Contract ............................................................................................... 29
41. Performance Security ............................................................................................ 29
42. Adjudicator ........................................................................................................... 29
6
Section I - Instructions to Bidders
A. General
1. Scope of Bid 1.1 The Employer, as indicated in the Bid Data Sheets
(BDS), issues this Bidding Document for the
procurement of the Works as specified in Section VI
(Employer’s Requirements). The name, identification,
and number of contracts for this bid are provided in the
BDS.
1.2 Throughout this Bidding Document:
(a) the term “in writing” means communicated in
written form and delivered against receipt;
(b) except where the context requires otherwise, words
indicating the singular also include the plural and
words indicating the plural also include the singular;
and
(c) “day” means calendar day.
2. Source of Funds 2.1 The Borrower or Recipient (hereinafter called
“Borrower”) indicated in the BDS has applied for or
received financing (hereinafter called “funds”) from the
World Bank (hereinafter called “the Bank”) toward the
cost of the project named in the BDS. The Borrower
intends to apply a portion of the funds to eligible
payments under the contract(s) for which this Bidding
Document is issued.
2.2 Payments by the Bank will be made only at the request
of the Borrower and upon approval by the Bank in
accordance with the terms and conditions of the
financing agreement between the Borrower and the
Bank (hereinafter called the Loan Agreement), and will
be subject in all respects to the terms and conditions of
that Loan Agreement. No party other than the Borrower
shall derive any rights from the Loan Agreement or have
any claim to the funds.
3. Fraud and
Corruption
3.1 It is the Bank’s policy to require that Borrowers
(including beneficiaries of Bank loans), as well as
bidders, suppliers, and contractors and their
subcontractors under Bank-financed contracts, observe
the highest standard of ethics during the procurement
7
and execution of such contracts.1 In pursuance of this
policy, the Bank:
(a) defines, for the purposes of this provision, the
terms set forth below as follows:
(i) “corrupt practice”2 is the offering, giving,
receiving or soliciting, directly or
indirectly, of anything of value to influence
improperly the actions of another party;
(ii) “fraudulent practice”3 is any act or
omission, including a misrepresentation,
that knowingly or recklessly misleads, or
attempts to mislead, a party to obtain a
financial or other benefit or to avoid an
obligation;
(iii) “collusive practice”4 is an arrangement
between two or more parties designed to
achieve an improper purpose, including to
influence improperly the actions of another
party;
(iv) “coercive practice”5 is impairing or
harming, or threatening to impair or harm,
directly or indirectly, any party or the
property of the party to influence
improperly the actions of a party;
(v) "obstructive practice" is
(aa) deliberately destroying, falsifying,
altering or concealing of evidence
material to the investigation or
making false statements to
investigators in order to materially
impede a Bank investigation into
allegations of a corrupt, fraudulent,
coercive or collusive practice; and/or
threatening, harassing or intimidating
any party to prevent it from disclosing
1 In this context, any action taken by a bidder, supplier, contractor, or a sub-contractor to influence the
procurement process or contract execution for undue advantage is improper. 2 “another party” refers to a public official acting in relation to the procurement process or contract
execution]. In this context, “public official” includes World Bank staff and employees of other
organizations taking or reviewing procurement decisions. 3 a “party” refers to a public official; the terms “benefit” and “obligation” relate to the procurement
process or contract execution; and the “act or omission” is intended to influence the procurement process
or contract execution. 4 “parties” refers to participants in the procurement process (including public officials) attempting to
establish bid prices at artificial, non-competitive levels. 5 a “party” refers to a participant in the procurement process or contract execution.
8
its knowledge of matters relevant to
the investigation or from pursuing the
investigation; or
(bb) acts intended to materially impede the
exercise of the Bank’s inspection and
audit rights provided for under sub-
clause 3.1 (e) below.
(b) will reject a proposal for award if it determines
that the bidder recommended for award has,
directly or through an agent, engaged in corrupt,
fraudulent, collusive, coercive or obstructive
practices in competing for the contract in
question;
(c) will cancel the portion of the loan allocated to a
contract if it determines at any time that
representatives of the Borrower or of a
beneficiary of the loan engaged in corrupt,
fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices during
the procurement or the execution of that contract,
without the Borrower having taken timely and
appropriate action satisfactory to the Bank to
address such practices when they occur;
(d) will sanction a firm or individual, including
declaring ineligible, either indefinitely or for a
stated period of time, to be awarded a Bank-
financed contract if it at any time determines that
the firm has, directly or through an agent,
engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive,
coercive or obstructive practices in competing
for, or in executing, a Bank-financed contract;
and
(e) will have the right to require that a provision be
included in bidding documents and in contracts
financed by a Bank loan, requiring bidders,
suppliers, and contractors and their sub-
contractors to permit the Bank to inspect their
accounts and records and other documents
relating to the bid submission and contract
performance and to have them audited by
auditors appointed by the Bank.
3.2 Furthermore, bidders shall be aware of the provision
stated in the General Conditions of Contract (GCC)
Sub-Clauses 22.2 and 56.2 (h).
9
4. Eligible Bidders
4.1 A Bidder may be a natural person, private entity, or
government-owned entity—subject to Instructions to
Bidders (ITB) 4.6—or any combination of them in the
form of a joint venture, under an existing agreement, or
with the intent to constitute a legally-enforceable joint
venture. Unless otherwise stated in the BDS, all
partners shall be jointly and severally liable for the
execution of the Contract in accordance with the
Contract terms.
4.2 A Bidder, and all parties constituting the Bidder, shall
have the nationality of an eligible country, in accordance
with Section 5 (Eligible Countries). A Bidder shall be
deemed to have the nationality of a country if the Bidder
is a citizen or is constituted, or incorporated, and
operates in conformity with the provisions of the laws of
that country. This criterion shall also apply to the
determination of the nationality of proposed
subcontractors or suppliers for any part of the Contract
including related services.
4.3 A Bidder shall not have a conflict of interest. All
Bidders found to have a conflict of interest shall be
disqualified. A Bidder may be considered to have a
conflict of interest with one or more parties in this
bidding process, if:
(a) they have a controlling partner in common; or
(b) they receive or have received any direct or indirect
subsidy from any of them; or
(c) they have the same legal representative for purposes
of this bid; or
(d) they have a relationship with each other, directly or
through common third parties, that puts them in a
position to have access to information about or
influence on the Bid of another Bidder, or influence
the decisions of the Employer regarding this bidding
process; or
(e) a Bidder participates in more than one bid in this
bidding process. Participation by a Bidder in more
than one Bid will result in the disqualification of all
Bids in which the party is involved. However, this
does not limit the inclusion of the same
subcontractor in more than one bid; or
(f) a Bidder or any of its affiliates participated as a
consultant in the preparation of the design or
technical specifications of the contract that is the
10
subject of the Bid; or
(g) a Bidder, or any of its affiliates has been hired (or is
proposed to be hired) by the Employer or Borrower
as Engineer for the contract.
4.4 A firm that is under a declaration of ineligibility by the
Bank in accordance with ITB 3 or by the Employer in
accordance with ITB 19.8, at the date of the deadline for
bid submission or thereafter, shall be disqualified.
4.5 A firm that has been determined to be ineligible by the
Bank in relation to the Bank Guidelines on Preventing
and Combating Fraud and Corruption in Projects
Financed by IBRD Loans and IDA Credits and Grants
shall be not be eligible to be awarded a contract.
4.6 Government-owned enterprises in the Employer’s
country shall be eligible only if they can establish that
they are legally and financially autonomous and operate
under commercial law, and that they are not a dependent
agency of the Employer.
4.7 Bidders shall provide such evidence of their continued
eligibility satisfactory to the Employer, as the Employer
shall reasonably request.
4.8 In case a prequalification process has been conducted
prior to the bidding process, this bidding is open only to
prequalified Bidders.
4.9 Firms shall be excluded if:
(a) as a matter of law or official regulation, the
Borrower’s country prohibits commercial
relations with that country, provided that the
Bank is satisfied that such exclusion does not
preclude effective competition for the supply of
goods or related services required; or
(b) by an act of compliance with a decision of the
United Nations Security Council taken under
Chapter VII of the Charter of the United Nations,
the Borrower’s country prohibits any import of
goods or contracting of works or services from
that country or any payments to persons or
entities in that country.
11
5. Eligible
Materials,
Equipment and
Services
5.1 The materials, equipment and services to be supplied
under the Contract shall have their origin in eligible
source countries as defined in ITB 4.2 above and all
expenditures under the Contract will be limited to such
materials, equipment and services. At the Employer’s
request, Bidders may be required to provide evidence of
the origin of materials, equipment and services.
5.2 For purposes of ITB 5.1 above, “origin” means the place
where the materials and equipment are mined, grown,
produced or manufactured, and from which the services
are provided. Materials and equipment are produced
when, through manufacturing, processing, or substantial
or major assembling of components, a commercially
recognized product results that differs substantially in its
basic characteristics or in purpose or utility from its
components.
B. Contents of Bidding Document
6. Sections of
Bidding
Document
6.1 The Bidding Document consist of Parts 1, 2and3, which
include all the Sections indicated below, and should be
read in conjunction with any Addenda issued in
accordance with ITB 8.
PART 1 Bidding Procedures
Section I Instructions to Bidders (ITB)
Section II Bid Data Sheet (BDS)
Section III Evaluation and Qualification Criteria
Section IV Bidding Forms
Section V Bidder’s Qualification
PART 2 Requirements
Section VI Employer’s Requirements
PART 3 Conditions of Contract and Contract Forms
Section VII General Conditions of Contract
(GCC)
Section VIII Particular Conditions of Contract
(PCC)
Section IX Contract Forms
6.2 The Invitation for Bids issued by the Employer is not
part of the Bidding Document.
6.3 The Employer is not responsible for the completeness of
the Bidding Document and their Addenda, if they were
not obtained directly from the source stated by the
12
Employer in the Invitation for Bids.
6.4 The Bidder is expected to examine all instructions,
forms, terms and specifications in the Bidding
Document. Failure to furnish all information or
documentation required by the Bidding Document may
result in the rejection of the bid.
7. Clarification of
Bidding
Document, Site
Visit, Pre-Bid
Meeting
7.1 A prospective Bidder requiring any clarification of the
Bidding Document shall contact the Employer in writing
at the Employer’s address indicated in the BDS or raise
his inquiries during the pre-bid meeting if provided for
in accordance with ITB 7.4. The Employer will respond
in writing to any request for clarification, provided that
such request is received prior to the deadline for
submission of bids, within a period given in the BDS.
The Employer shall forward copies of its response to all
Bidders who have acquired the Bidding Document in
accordance with ITB 6.3, including a description of the
inquiry but without identifying its source. Should the
Employer deem it necessary to amend the Bidding
Document as a result of a request for clarification, it
shall do so following the procedure under ITB 8 and
ITB 22.2.
7.2 The Bidder is encouraged to visit and examine the Site
of Works and its surroundings and obtain for itself, on
its own risk and responsibility, all information that may
be necessary for preparing the bid and entering into a
contract for construction of the Works. The costs of
visiting the Site shall be at the Bidder’s own expense.
7.3 The Bidder and any of its personnel or agents will be
granted permission by the Employer to enter upon its
premises and lands for the purpose of such visit, but
only upon the express condition that the Bidder, its
personnel, and agents will release and indemnify the
Employer and its personnel and agents from and against
all liability in respect thereof, and will be responsible for
death or personal injury, loss of or damage to property,
and any other loss, damage, costs, and expenses incurred
as a result of the inspection.
7.4 The Bidder’s designated representative is invited to
attend a pre-bid meeting, if provided for in the BDS.
The purpose of the meeting will be to clarify issues and
to answer questions on any matter that may be raised at
that stage.
13
7.5 The Bidder is requested, as far as possible, to submit any
questions in writing, to reach the Employer not later
than one week before the meeting.
7.6 Minutes of the pre-bid meeting, including the text of the
questions raised, without identifying the source, and the
responses given, together with any responses prepared
after the meeting, will be transmitted promptly to all
Bidders who have acquired the Bidding Document in
accordance with ITB 6.3. Any modification to the
Bidding Document that may become necessary as a
result of the pre-bid meeting shall be made by the
Employer exclusively through the issue of an addendum
pursuant to ITB 8 and not through the minutes of the
pre-bid meeting.
7.7 Nonattendance at the pre-bid meeting will not be a cause
for disqualification of a Bidder.
8. Amendment of
Bidding
Document
8.1 At any time prior to the deadline for submission of bids,
the Employer may amend the Bidding Document by
issuing addenda.
8.2 Any addendum issued shall be part of the Bidding
Document and shall be communicated in writing to all
who have obtained the Bidding Document from the
Employer in accordance with ITB 6.3.
8.3 To give prospective Bidders reasonable time in which to
take an addendum into account in preparing their bids,
the Employer may, at its discretion, extend the deadline
for the submission of bids, pursuant to ITB 22.2.
C. Preparation of Bids
9. Cost of Bidding 9.1 The Bidder shall bear all costs associated with the
preparation and submission of its Bid, and the Employer
shall in no case be responsible or liable for those costs,
regardless of the conduct or outcome of the bidding
process.
10. Language of Bid 10.1 The Bid, as well as all correspondence and documents
relating to the bid exchanged by the Bidder and the
Employer, shall be written in the language specified in
the BDS. Supporting documents and printed literature
that are part of the Bid may be in another language
provided they are accompanied by an accurate
translation of the relevant passages in the language
14
specified in the BDS, in which case, for purposes of
interpretation of the Bid, such translation shall govern.
11. Documents
Comprising the
Bid
11.1 The Bid shall comprise the following:
(a) Letter of Bid;
(b) completed Schedules, in accordance with ITB 12
and 14, or as stipulated in the BDS;
(c) Bid Security or Bid Securing Declaration, in
accordance with ITB 19;
(d) alternative bids, at Bidder’s option and if
permissible, in accordance with ITB 13;
(e) written confirmation authorizing the signatory of
the Bid to commit the Bidder, in accordance with
ITB 20.2;
(f) documentary evidence in accordance with ITB
17 establishing the Bidder’s qualifications to
perform the contract;
(g) Technical Proposal in accordance with ITB 16;
(h) in the case of a bid submitted by a joint venture
(JV), the JV agreement, or letter of intent to enter
into a JV including a draft agreement, indicating at
least the parts of the Works to be executed by the
respective partners; and
(i) any other document required in the BDS.
12. Letter of Bid and
Schedules
12.1 The Letter of Bid, Schedules, and all documents listed
under Clause 11, shall be prepared using the relevant
forms in Section IV (Bidding Forms), if so provided.
The forms must be completed without any alterations to
the text, and no substitutes shall be accepted. All blank
spaces shall be filled in with the information requested.
13. Alternative Bids 13.1 Unless otherwise indicated in the BDS, alternative bids
shall not be considered.
13.2 When alternative times for completion are explicitly
invited, a statement to that effect will be included in the
BDS, as will the method of evaluating different times
for completion.
13.3 When specified in the BDS pursuant to ITB 13.1, and
subject to ITB 13.4 below, Bidders wishing to offer
technical alternatives to the requirements of the Bidding
Document must first price the Employer’s design as
15
described in the Bidding Document and shall further
provide all information necessary for a complete
evaluation of the alternative by the Employer, including
drawings, design calculations, technical specifications,
breakdown of prices, and proposed construction
methodology and other relevant details. Only the
technical alternatives, if any, of the lowest evaluated
Bidder conforming to the basic technical requirements
shall be considered by the Employer.
13.4 When specified in the BDS, Bidders are permitted to
submit alternative technical solutions for specified parts
of the Works. Such parts will be identified in the BDS
and described in Section VI (Employer’s Requirements).
The method for their evaluation will be stipulated in
Section III (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria).
14. Bid Prices and
Discounts
14.1 The prices and discounts quoted by the Bidder in the
Letter of Bid and in the Schedules, shall conform to the
requirements specified below.
14.2 The Bidder shall submit a bid for the whole of the works
described in ITB 1.1 by filling in prices for all items of
the Works, as identified in Section IV (Bidding Forms).
In case of admeasurements contracts, the Bidder shall
fill in rates and prices for all items of the Works
described in the Bill of Quantities. Items against which
no rate or price is entered by the Bidder will not be paid
for by the Employer when executed and shall be deemed
covered by the rates for other items and prices in the Bill
of Quantities.
14.3 The price to be quoted in the Letter of Bid shall be the
total price of the Bid, excluding any discounts offered.
14.4 Unconditional discounts, if any, and the methodology
for their application shall be quoted in the Letter of Bid,
in accordance with ITB 12.1.
14.5 If so indicated in ITB 1.1, bids are invited for individual
contracts or for any combination of contracts
(packages). Bidders wishing to offer any price reduction
for the award of more than one Contract shall specify in
their bid the price reductions applicable to each package,
or alternatively, to individual Contracts within the
package. Price reductions or discounts shall be
submitted in accordance with ITB 14.3, provided the
bids for all contracts are submitted and opened at the
same time.
16
14.6 Unless otherwise provided in the BDS and the
Conditions of Contract, the prices quoted by the Bidder
shall be fixed. If the prices quoted by the Bidder are
subject to adjustment during the performance of the
Contract in accordance with the provisions of the
Conditions of Contract, the Bidder shall furnish the
indices and weightings for the price adjustment formulae
in the Schedule of Adjustment Data in Section IV
(Bidding Forms) and the Employer may require the
Bidder to justify its proposed indices and weightings.
14.7 All duties, taxes, and other levies payable by the
Contractor under the Contract, or for any other cause, as
of the date 28 days prior to the deadline for submission
of bids, shall be included in the rates and prices and the
total bid price submitted by the Bidder.
15. Currencies of
Bid and Payment
15.1 The currency(ies) of the bid shall be as specified in the
BDS.
15.2 Bidders may be required by the Employer to justify, to
the Employer’s satisfaction, their local and foreign
currency requirements, and to substantiate that the
amounts included in the prices shown in the appropriate
form(s) of Section IV, in which case a detailed
breakdown of the foreign currency requirements shall be
provided by Bidders.
16. Documents
Comprising the
Technical
Proposal
16.1 The Bidder shall furnish a Technical Proposal including
a statement of work methods, equipment, personnel,
schedule and any other information as stipulated in
Section IV (Bidding Forms), in sufficient detail to
demonstrate the adequacy of the Bidders’ proposal to
meet the work requirements and the completion time.
17. Documents
Establishing the
Qualifications of
the Bidder
17.1 To establish its qualifications to perform the Contract in
accordance with Section III (Evaluation and
Qualification Criteria) the Bidder shall provide the
information requested in the corresponding information
sheets included in Section IV (Bidding Forms).
17.2 Domestic Bidders, individually or in joint ventures,
applying for eligibility for a 7½-percent margin of
domestic preference shall supply all information
required to satisfy the criteria for eligibility as described
in ITB 33.
17
18. Period of
Validity of Bids
18.1 Bids shall remain valid for the period specified in the
BDS after the bid submission deadline date prescribed
by the Employer. A bid valid for a shorter period shall
be rejected by the Employer as nonresponsive.
18.2 In exceptional circumstances, prior to the expiration of
the bid validity period, the Employer may request
Bidders to extend the period of validity of their bids.
The request and the responses shall be made in writing.
If a bid security is requested in accordance with ITB 19,
it shall also be extended for a corresponding period. A
Bidder may refuse the request without forfeiting its bid
security. A Bidder granting the request shall not be
required or permitted to modify its bid.
18.3 In the case of fixed price contracts, if the award is
delayed by a period exceeding fifty-six (56) days
beyond the expiry of the initial bid validity, the Contract
price shall be adjusted by a factor specified in the
request for extension. Bid evaluation shall be based on
the Bid Price without taking into consideration the
above correction.
19. Bid Security 19.1 Unless otherwise specified in the BDS, the Bidder shall
furnish as part of its bid, in original form, either a Bid
Securing Declaration or a bid security as specified in
the BDS. In the case of a bid security, the amount shall
be as specified in the BDS.
19.2 A Bid Securing Declaration shall use the form included
in Section IV (Bidding Forms).
19.3 If a Bid Security is specified pursuant to ITB 19.1, the
bid security shall be, at the Bidder’s option, in any of the
following forms:
(a) An unconditional guarantee, issued by a bank or
surety;
(b) an irrevocable letter of credit;
(c) a cashier’s or certified cheque; or
(d) another security indicated in the BDS.
from a reputable source from an eligible country. If the
unconditional guarantee is issued by an insurance
company or bonding company located outside the
Employer’s Country, it shall have a correspondent
financial institution located in the Employer’s Country.
In the case of a bank guarantee, the bid security shall be
submitted either using the Bid Security Form included in
Section IV (Bidding Forms) or in another substantially
18
similar format approved by the Employer prior to bid
submission. In either case, the form must include the
complete name of the Bidder. The bid security shall be
valid for twenty-eight days (28) beyond the original
validity period of the bid, or beyond any period of
extension if requested under ITB 18.2.
19.4 Any bid not accompanied by an enforceable and
substantially compliant bid security or Bid Securing
Declaration, if required in accordance with ITB 19.1,
shall be rejected by the Employer as nonresponsive.
19.5 If a Bid Security is specified pursuant to ITB 19.1, the
bid security of unsuccessful Bidders shall be returned as
promptly as possible upon the successful Bidder’s
furnishing of the performance security pursuant to ITB
41.
19.6 If a Bid Security is specified pursuant to ITB 19.1, the
bid security of the successful Bidder shall be returned as
promptly as possible once the successful Bidder has
signed the Contract and furnished the required
performance security.
19.7 The Bid Security may be forfeited or the Bid Securing
Declaration executed:
(a) if a Bidder withdraws its bid during the period of
bid validity specified by the Bidder on the Letter
of Bid, except as provided in ITB 18.2 or
(b) if the successful Bidder fails to:
(i) sign the Contract in accordance with
ITB 40; or
(ii) furnish a performance security in
accordance with ITB 41.
19.8 The Bid Security or the Bid Securing Declaration of a
JV shall be in the name of the JV that submits the bid. If
the JV has not been constituted into a legally-
enforceable JV, at the time of bidding, the Bid Security
or the Bid Securing Declaration shall be in the names of
all future partners as named in the letter of intent
mentioned in ITB 4.1.
19.9 If a Bid Security is not required in the BDS, and
(a) if a Bidder withdraws its bid during the period of
bid validity specified by the Bidder on the Letter
of Bid Form, except as provided in ITB 18.2, or
(b) if the successful Bidder fails to: sign the Contract
in accordance with ITB 40; or furnish a
19
performance security in accordance with ITB 41;
the Borrower may, if provided for in the BDS, declare
the Bidder disqualified to be awarded a contract by the
Employer for a period of time as stated in the BDS.
20. Format and
Signing of Bid
20.1 The Bidder shall prepare one original of the documents
comprising the bid as described in ITB 11 and clearly
mark it “ORIGINAL”. Alternative bids, if permitted in
accordance with ITB 13, shall be clearly marked
“ALTERNATIVE”. In addition, the Bidder shall submit
copies of the bid in the number specified in the BDS,
and clearly mark each of them “COPY.” In the event of
any discrepancy between the original and the copies, the
original shall prevail.
20.2 The original and all copies of the bid shall be typed or
written in indelible ink and shall be signed by a person
duly authorized to sign on behalf of the Bidder. This
authorization shall consist of a written confirmation as
specified in the BDS and shall be attached to the bid.
The name and position held by each person signing the
authorization must be typed or printed below the
signature.
20.3 Any amendments such as interlineations, erasures, or
overwriting shall be valid only if they are signed or
initialed by the person signing the bid.
D. Submission and Opening of Bids
21. Sealing and
Marking of Bids
21.1 Bidders may always submit their bids by mail or by
hand. When so specified in the BDS, bidders shall have
the option of submitting their bids electronically.
Procedures for submission, sealing and marking are as
follows:
(a) Bidders submitting bids by mail or by hand shall
enclose the original and each copy of the Bid,
including alternative bids, if permitted in
accordance with ITB 13, in separate sealed
envelopes, duly marking the envelopes as
“ORIGINAL”, “ALTERNATIVE” and “COPY.” These
envelopes containing the original and the copies
shall then be enclosed in one single envelope. The
rest of the procedure shall be in accordance with
20
ITB sub-Clauses 22.2 and 22.3.
(b) Bidders submitting bids electronically shall follow
the electronic bid submission procedures specified
in the BDS.
21.2 The inner and outer envelopes shall:
(a) Bear the name and address of the Bidder;
(b) be addressed to the Employer as provided in the
BDS pursuant to ITB 22.1;
(c) bear the specific identification of this bidding
process indicated in accordance with ITB 1.1; and
(d) bear a warning not to open before the time and date
for bid opening.
21.3 If all envelopes are not sealed and marked as required,
the Employer will assume no responsibility for the
misplacement or premature opening of the bid.
22. Deadline for
Submission of
Bids
22.1 Bids must be received by the Employer at the address
and no later than the date and time indicated in the
BDS.
22.2 The Employer may, at its discretion, extend the deadline
for the submission of bids by amending the Bidding
Document in accordance with ITB 8, in which case all
rights and obligations of the Employer and Bidders
previously subject to the deadline shall thereafter be
subject to the deadline as extended.
23. Late Bids 23.1 The Employer shall not consider any bid that arrives
after the deadline for submission of bids, in accordance
with ITB 22. Any bid received by the Employer after the
deadline for submission of bids shall be declared late,
rejected, and returned unopened to the Bidder.
24. Withdrawal,
Substitution, and
Modification of
Bids
24.1 A Bidder may withdraw, substitute, or modify its bid
after it has been submitted by sending a written notice,
duly signed by an authorized representative, and shall
include a copy of the authorization in accordance with
ITB 20.2, (except that withdrawal notices do not require
copies). The corresponding substitution or modification
of the bid must accompany the respective written notice.
All notices must be:
(a) prepared and submitted in accordance with ITB 20
and ITB 21 (except that withdrawal notices do not
require copies), and in addition, the respective
envelopes shall be clearly marked “WITHDRAWAL,”
21
“SUBSTITUTION,” “MODIFICATION;” and
(b) received by the Employer prior to the deadline
prescribed for submission of bids, in accordance
with ITB 22.
24.2 Bids requested to be withdrawn in accordance with ITB
24.1 shall be returned unopened to the Bidders.
24.3 No bid may be withdrawn, substituted, or modified in
the interval between the deadline for submission of bids
and the expiration of the period of bid validity specified
by the Bidder on the Letter of Bid or any extension
thereof.
25. Bid Opening 25.1 The Employer shall open the bids in public at the
address, date and time specified in the BDS in the
presence of Bidders` designated representatives and
anyone who choose to attend. Any specific electronic
bid opening procedures required if electronic bidding is
permitted in accordance with ITB 21.1, shall be as
specified in the BDS.
25.2 First, envelopes marked “WITHDRAWAL” shall be
opened and read out and the envelope with the
corresponding bid shall not be opened, but returned to
the Bidder. No bid withdrawal shall be permitted unless
the corresponding withdrawal notice contains a valid
authorization to request the withdrawal and is read out at
bid opening. Next, envelopes marked “SUBSTITUTION”
shall be opened and read out and exchanged with the
corresponding bid being substituted, and the substituted
bid shall not be opened, but returned to the Bidder. No
bid substitution shall be permitted unless the
corresponding substitution notice contains a valid
authorization to request the substitution and is read out
at bid opening. Envelopes marked “MODIFICATION”
shall be opened and read out with the corresponding bid.
No bid modification shall be permitted unless the
corresponding modification notice contains a valid
authorization to request the modification and is read out
at bid opening. Only envelopes that are opened and read
out at bid opening shall be considered further.
25.3 All other envelopes shall be opened one at a time,
reading out: the name of the Bidder and the Bid Price(s),
including any discounts and alternative bids and
indicating whether there is a modification; the presence
of a Bid Security or Bid Securing Declaration, if
required; and any other details as the Employer may
22
consider appropriate. Only discounts and alternative
offers read out at bid opening shall be considered for
evaluation. No bid shall be rejected at bid opening
except for late bids, in accordance with ITB 23.1.
25.4 The Employer shall prepare a record of the bid opening
that shall include, as a minimum: the name of the Bidder
and whether there is a withdrawal, substitution, or
modification; the Bid Price, per contract if applicable,
including any discounts and alternative offers; and the
presence or absence of a Bid Security, if one was
required. The Bidders’ representatives who are present
shall be requested to sign the record. The omission of a
Bidder’s signature on the record shall not invalidate the
contents and effect of the record. A copy of the record
shall be distributed to all Bidders.
E. Evaluation and Comparison of Bids
26. Confidentiality 26.1 Information relating to the examination, evaluation,
comparison, and post qualification of bids and
recommendation of contract award, shall not be
disclosed to Bidders or any other persons not officially
concerned with such process until information on
Contract award is communicated to all Bidders.
26.2 Any attempt by a Bidder to influence the Employer in
the evaluation of the bids or Contract award decisions
may result in the rejection of its bid.
26.3 Notwithstanding ITB 25.2, from the time of bid opening
to the time of Contract award, if any Bidder wishes to
contact the Employer on any matter related to the
bidding process, it may do so in writing.
27. Clarification of
Bids
27.1 To assist in the examination, evaluation, and comparison
of the bids, and qualification of the Bidders, the
Employer may, at its discretion, ask any Bidder for a
clarification of its bid. Any clarification submitted by a
Bidder that is not in response to a request by the
Employer shall not be considered. The Employer’s
request for clarification and the response shall be in
writing. No change in the prices or substance of the bid
shall be sought, offered, or permitted, except to confirm
the correction of arithmetic errors discovered by the
Employer in the evaluation of the bids, in accordance
with ITB 31.
23
27.2 If a Bidder does not provide clarifications of its bid by
the date and time set in the Employer’s request for
clarification, its bid may be rejected.
28. Deviations,
Reservations,
and Omissions
28.1 During the evaluation of bids, the following definitions
apply:
(a) “Deviation” is a departure from the requirements
specified in the Bidding Document;
(b) “Reservation” is the setting of limiting conditions or
withholding from complete acceptance of the
requirements specified in the Bidding Document;
and
(c) “Omission” is the failure to submit part or all of the
information or documentation required in the
Bidding Document.
29. Determination of
Responsiveness
29.1 The Employer’s determination of a bid’s responsiveness
is to be based on the contents of the bid itself, as defined
in ITB11.
29.2 A substantially responsive bid is one that meets the
requirements of the Bidding Document without material
deviation, reservation, or omission. A material
deviation, reservation, or omission is one that,
(a) if accepted, would:
(i) affect in any substantial way the scope,
quality, or performance of the Works specified
in the Contract; or
(ii) limit in any substantial way, inconsistent with
the Bidding Document, the Employer’s rights
or the Bidder’s obligations under the proposed
Contract; or
(b) if rectified, would unfairly affect the competitive
position of other Bidders presenting substantially
responsive bids.
29.3 The Employer shall examine the technical aspects of the
bid submitted in accordance with ITB 16, Technical
Proposal, in particular, to confirm that all requirements
of Section 6 (Employer’s Requirements) have been met
without any material deviation, reservation or omission.
29.4 If a bid is not substantially responsive to the
requirements of the Bidding Document, it shall be
rejected by the Employer and may not subsequently be
24
made responsive by correction of the material deviation,
reservation, or omission.
30. Nonconformities,
Errors, and
Omissions
30.1 Provided that a bid is substantially responsive, the
Employer may waive any nonconformities in the bid.
30.2 Provided that a bid is substantially responsive, the
Employer may request that the Bidder submit the
necessary information or documentation, within a
reasonable period of time, to rectify nonmaterial
nonconformities in the bid related to documentation
requirements. Requesting information or documentation
on such nonconformities shall not be related to any
aspect of the price of the bid. Failure of the Bidder to
comply with the request may result in the rejection of its
bid.
30.3 Provided that a bid is substantially responsive, the
Employer shall rectify quantifiable nonmaterial
nonconformities related to the Bid Price. To this effect,
the Bid Price may be adjusted, for comparison purposes
only, to reflect the price of a missing or non-conforming
item or component. The adjustment shall be made using
the methods indicated in Section III (Evaluation and
Qualification Criteria).
31. Correction of
Arithmetical
Errors
31.1 Provided that the bid is substantially responsive, the
Employer shall correct arithmetical errors on the
following basis:
(a) only for unit price contracts, if there is a
discrepancy between the unit price and the total
price that is obtained by multiplying the unit price
and quantity, the unit price shall prevail and the
total price shall be corrected, unless in the opinion
of the Employer there is an obvious misplacement
of the decimal point in the unit price, in which case
the total price as quoted shall govern and the unit
price shall be corrected;
(b) if there is an error in a total corresponding to the
addition or subtraction of subtotals, the subtotals
shall prevail and the total shall be corrected; and
(c) if there is a discrepancy between words and figures,
the amount in words shall prevail, unless the
amount expressed in words is related to an
arithmetic error, in which case the amount in figures
shall prevail subject to (a) and (b) above.
25
31.2 If the Bidder that submitted the lowest evaluated bid
does not accept the correction of errors, its bid shall be
declared non-responsive.
32. Conversion to
Single Currency
32.1 For evaluation and comparison purposes, the
currency(ies) of the bid shall be converted into a single
currency as specified in the BDS.
33. Margin of
Preference
33.1 A margin of preference shall not apply, unless
otherwise specified in the BDS.
33.2 Domestic bidders shall provide all evidence necessary to
prove that they meet the following criteria to be eligible
for a 7½ percent margin of preference in the comparison
of their bids with those of bidders who do not qualify for
the preference. They should:
(a) be registered within the country of the Employer’s
country;
(b) have majority ownership by nationals of the
country of the Employer’s country;
(c) not subcontract more than 10 percent of the
Contract Price, excluding provisional sums, to
foreign contractors.
33.3 The following procedure shall be used to apply the
margin of preference:
(a) Responsive bids shall be classified into the
following groups:
(i) Group A: bids offered by domestic bidders
and joint ventures meeting the criteria of ITB
Sub-Clause 33.2; and
(ii) Group B: all other bids.
(b) For the purpose of further evaluation and
comparison of bids only, an amount equal to 7½
percent of the evaluated Bid prices determined in
accordance with ITB Sub-Clause 33.2 shall be
added to all bids classified in Group B.
34. Evaluation of
Bids
34.1 The Employer shall use the criteria and methodologies
listed in this Clause. No other evaluation criteria or
methodologies shall be permitted.
34.2 To evaluate a bid, the Employer shall consider the
following:
(a) the bid price, excluding Provisional Sums and the
26
provision, if any, for contingencies in the Summary
Bill of Quantities for contracts or Schedule of Prices
for lump sum contracts, but including Day work
items, where priced competitively;
(b) price adjustment for correction of arithmetic errors
in accordance with ITB 31.1;
(c) price adjustment due to discounts offered in
accordance with ITB 14.3;
(d) converting the amount resulting from applying (a) to
(c) above, if relevant, to a single currency in
accordance with ITB 32;
(e) adjustment for nonconformities in accordance with
ITB 30.3;
(f) application of all the evaluation factors indicated in
Section III (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria).
34.3 The estimated effect of the price adjustment provisions
of the Conditions of Contract, applied over the period of
execution of the Contract, shall not be taken into
account in bid evaluation.
34.4 If this Bidding Document allows Bidders to quote
separate prices for different contracts, and to award
multiple contracts to a single Bidder, the methodology to
determine the lowest evaluated price of the contract
combinations, including any discounts offered in the
Letter of Bid, is specified in Section III (Evaluation and
Qualification Criteria).
34.5 If the bid, which results in the lowest Evaluated Bid
Price, is seriously unbalanced, front loaded or
substantially below updated estimates in the opinion of
the Employer, the Employer may require the Bidder to
produce detailed price analyses for any or all items of
the Bill of Quantities, to demonstrate the internal
consistency of those prices with the construction
methods and schedule proposed. After evaluation of the
price analyses, taking into consideration the schedule of
estimated Contract payments, the Employer may require
that the amount of the performance security be increased
at the expense of the Bidder to a level sufficient to
protect the Employer against financial loss in the event
of default of the successful Bidder under the Contract.
27
35. Comparison of
Bids
35.1 The Employer shall compare all substantially responsive
bids in accordance with ITB 34.2 to determine the
lowest evaluated bid.
36. Qualification of
the Bidder
36.1 The Employer shall determine to its satisfaction whether
the Bidder that is selected as having submitted the
lowest evaluated and substantially responsive bid meets
the qualifying criteria specified in Section III
(Evaluation and Qualification Criteria).
36.2 The determination shall be based upon an examination
of the documentary evidence of the Bidder’s
qualifications submitted by the Bidder, pursuant to ITB
17.1.
36.3 An affirmative determination of qualification shall be a
prerequisite for award of the Contract to the Bidder. A
negative determination shall result in disqualification of
the bid, in which event the Employer shall proceed to
the next lowest evaluated bid to make a similar
determination of that Bidder’s qualifications to perform
satisfactorily.
37. Employer’s
Right to Accept
Any Bid, and to
Reject Any or All
Bids
37.1 The Employer reserves the right to accept or reject any
bid, and to annul the bidding process and reject all bids
at any time prior to contract award, without thereby
incurring any liability to Bidders. In case of annulment,
all bids submitted and specifically, bid securities, shall
be promptly returned to the Bidders.
F. Award of Contract
38. Award Criteria 38.1 Subject to ITB 37.1, the Employer shall award the
Contract to the Bidder whose offer has been determined
to be the lowest evaluated bid and is substantially
responsive to the Bidding Document, provided further
that the Bidder is determined to be qualified to perform
the Contract satisfactorily.
39. Notification of
Award
39.1 Prior to the expiration of the period of bid validity, the
Employer shall notify the successful Bidder, in writing,
via the Letter of Acceptance included in the Contract
Forms, that its bid has been accepted. At the same time,
the Employer shall also notify all other Bidders of the
results of the bidding, and shall publish in UNDB online
(United Nations Development Business online) and in the
dgMarket the results identifying the bid and lot numbers
and the following information: (i) name of each Bidder
who submitted a Bid; (ii) bid prices as read out at Bid
Opening; (iii) name and evaluated prices of each Bid that
was evaluated; (iv) name of bidders whose bids were
28
rejected and the reasons for their rejection; and (v) name of
the winning Bidder, and the Price it offered, as well as the
duration and summary scope of the contract awarded.
39.2 Until a formal contract is prepared and executed, the
notification of award shall constitute a binding Contract.
39.3 The Employer shall promptly respond in writing to any
unsuccessful Bidder who, after notification of award in
accordance with ITB 39.1, requests in writing the
grounds on which its bid was not selected.
40. Signing of
Contract
40.1 Promptly upon notification, the Employer shall send the
successful Bidder the Contract Agreement.
40.2 Within twenty-eight (28) days of receipt of the Contract
Agreement, the successful Bidder shall sign, date, and
return it to the Employer.
41. Performance
Security
41.1 Within twenty-eight (28) days of the receipt of
notification of award from the Employer, the successful
Bidder shall furnish the performance security in
accordance with the conditions of contract, subject to
ITB 34.5, using for that purpose the Performance
Security Form included in Section IX (Contract Forms),
or another form acceptable to the Employer. If the
performance security furnished by the successful Bidder
is in the form of a bond, it shall be issued by a bonding
or insurance company that has been determined by the
successful Bidder to be acceptable to the Employer. A
foreign institution providing a bond shall have a
correspondent financial institution located in the
Employer’s Country.
41.2 Failure of the successful Bidder to submit the above-
mentioned Performance Security or to sign the Contract
Agreement shall constitute sufficient grounds for the
annulment of the award and forfeiture of the Bid
Security. In that event the Employer may award the
Contract to the next lowest evaluated Bidder whose
offer is substantially responsive and is determined by the
Employer to be qualified to perform the Contract
satisfactorily.
41.3 The above provision shall also apply to the furnishing of
a domestic preference security if so required.
29
42. Adjudicator 42.1 The Employer proposes the person named in the BDS
to be appointed as Adjudicator under the Contract, at the
hourly fee specified in the BDS, plus reimbursable
expenses. If the Bidder disagrees with this proposal, the
Bidder should so state in his Bid. If, in the Letter of
Acceptance, the Employer does not agree on the
appointment of the Adjudicator, the Employer will
request the Appointing Authority designated in the
Particular Conditions of Contract (PCC) pursuant to
Clause 23.1 of the General Conditions of Contract
(GCC), to appoint the Adjudicator.
30
Section II – Bid Data Sheets
31
Section II - Bid Data Sheets
Table of Contents
Clause Page
A Introduction ..................................................................................................................32
B Bidding Document .......................................................................................................33
C Preparation of Bids ......................................................................................................34
D Submission and Opening of Bids ................................................................................36
E Evaluation and Comparison of Bids ..........................................................................37
32
Section II - Bid Data Sheets
A. Introduction
ITB 1.1 The Employer is: Chairman, Road Development Authority,
Sri Lanka.
ITB 1.1 The name of the bidding process is:
Supply and fixing of High Tensile Wire Mesh and Accessories in
unstable slope segments between Culvert Nos. 75/5 & 76/4 on
Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi Road (A005)”
The identification number of the bidding process is:
CRIP/WORKS/RDA/NCB/328
Add following sub Clauses after ITB 1.3 (c)
ITB 1.4 Bidding procedure is: National competitive Bidding (NCB)
ITB 1.5 Standard Bidding Document used: World Bank Standard Bidding
Documents for Procurement of Small Works, published in April 2008
and revised on November 2010.
The Standard Bidding Document comprises of Bidding Procedures,
Employer’s Requirements, Conditions of Contract and Contract Forms
ITB 2.1 The Borrower is: Democratic Socialist Republic of Sri Lanka.
The name of the Project is: Climate Resilience Improvement Project.
ITB 4.8 Bidders are not prequalified. Post-qualification would be carried out in
accordance with the Section III (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria)
of the Bidding Document.
ITB 4.5 The list of firms debarred from participating in World Bank projects is
available at:http://www.worldbank.org/debarr/.
33
B. Bidding Documents
ITB 7.1
For clarification purposes, only, the Employer’s address is:
Attention: Head of Project Implementation Unit-
Climate Resilience Improvement Project (CRIP)
Floor/Room number: No.122, Main Street,
City: Battaramulla
Postal Code: 10120
Country: Sri Lanka
Telephone: +94112884594, +94112884595
Facsimile number: +94112884610
Electronic mail address: [email protected]
Requests for clarifications should be received in writing by the Employer
seven (7) days prior to the deadline for submission of bids.
ITB 7.4 A Pre-Bid meeting will take place at the following date, time and
place:
Date: 16/12/ 2019
Time: 10.00 a.m.
Place: Project Implementation Unit,
No. 122, Main Street,
Battaramulla
A site visit will be conducted by the Employer before the Pre-Bid
meeting.
Date: 13/12/ 2019
Time: 10.00 a.m.
Place: at Culvert No. 76/5 on Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi
Road (A 005)
34
C. Preparation of Bids
ITB 10.1 The language of the bid is: English
Translation language if supporting documents and printed literature are
in another language: English
ITB 11.1 (b) The following schedules shall be submitted with the bid:
(i) Priced bill of quantities
(ii) Day works schedule
(iii) Mobilization and Construction Schedule (indicating the
sequence of all main operations and identifying critical
activities)
(iv) Rate analysis for Unit Rates & Lump Sum Items
ITB 11.1 (i) The following additional documents shall be submitted with the bid:
(i) VAT registration number along with documentary
evidence or a letter to that effect from the Inland Revenue
Department
(ii) A duly notarized affidavit certifying the accuracy of the
information on current contract commitments given in
form Fin CCC (Page No. 84 )
ITB 13.1 Alternative bids shall not be permitted.
ITB 13.2 Alternative times for completion shall not be permitted.
ITB 13.4 Alternative technical solutions shall be permitted for the following
parts of the Works: None
ITB 14.6 The Contract is not subject to price adjustment, in accordance with
GCC Clause 44.1 and 44.2 of Particular Conditions of Contract.
ITB 14.7 Value Added Tax (VAT) shall not be included in the rates, prices and
the total bid price, but shall be quoted separately.
ITB 15.1
The prices shall be quoted by the bidder in: Sri Lankan Rupees (LKR)
ITB 18.1 The bid validity period shall be: 119 days from the bid submission
deadline date up to 24/04/ 2020).
35
ITB 19.1
The Bidder shall furnish a Bid Security in the amount of One Million
Sri Lankan Rupees (LKR 1,000,000.00).
ITB 19.2 Bid Securing Declaration shall not be accepted.
ITB 19.3 The Bid Security shall be valid up to 22/05/ 2020
(147 Days from the bid submission deadline)
Bid security shall only be an unconditional on demand guarantee
issued by a bank recognized by the Central Bank of Sri Lanka accepted
by the Employer in accordance with the format given in Section IV –
Bidding Forms.
Insurance Guarantee is not accepted.
ITB 19.3
(d)
None
ITB 20.1 In addition to the original of the bid, the number of copies is: 01
ITB 20.2 The written confirmation of authorization to sign on behalf of the
Bidder shall indicate:
(a) The name and description of the documentation required to
demonstrate the authority of the signatory to sign the Bid such as a
Power of Attorney.
(b) in the case of Bids submitted by an existing or intended JV an
undertaking signed by all parties (i) stating that all parties shall be
jointly and severally liable, if so required in accordance with ITB 4.1
(a), and (ii) nominating a representative who shall have the authority to
conduct all business for and on behalf of any and all the parties of the
JV during the bidding process and, in the event the JV is awarded the
Contract, during contract execution.”
36
D. Submission and Opening of Bids
ITB 21.1 Bidders shall not have the option of submitting their bids
electronically.
ITB 21.1
(b)
Not applicable
ITB 22.1 For bid submission purposes only, the Employer’s address is:
Attention: Head of Project Implementation Unit-
Climate Resilience Improvement Project (CRIP)
Address: Head of Project Implementation Unit-
Climate Resilience Improvement Project (CRIP)
No.122, Main Street, Battaramulla
Postal Code: 10120
Country: Sri Lanka.
The deadline for bid submission is:
Date: 27/12/ 2019
Time: 2.00 p.m. (Sri Lanka Standard Time)
ITB 25.1 The bid opening shall take place at:
Head of Project Implementation Unit-
Climate Resilience Improvement Project (CRIP)
No.122, Main Street,
Battaramulla
Date: 27/12/ 2019
Time: immediately after Bid closing
37
E. Evaluation and Comparison of Bids
ITB 32.1 Not applicable.
ITB 33.1 A margin of domestic preference shall not apply.
ITB 41.1 Performance security shall be an unconditional on demand guarantee
issued by a bank recognized by the Central Bank of Sri Lanka accepted
by the Employer in accordance with the format given in Section IX
(Contract Forms).
Insurance Guarantee not accepted.
ITB 42.1 The Adjudicator shall be appointed by the Institution of Engineers of
Sri Lanka (IESL) at the request of either the Employer or the
Contractor.
The hourly fee together with reimbursable expenses for the proposed
Adjudicator shall be discussed and agreed between the Employer and
Contractor at the time of appointment of the Adjudicator.
The Appointing Authority is the Institution of Engineers of Sri Lanka
(IESL).
38
Section III – Evaluation and Qualification Criteria
39
Section III - Evaluation and Qualification Criteria
This section contains all the criteria that the Employer shall use to evaluate bids and
qualify Bidders. In accordance with ITB 34 and ITB 36, no other methods, criteria and
factors shall be used. The Bidder shall provide all the information requested in the forms
included in Section IV (Bidding Forms).
40
Table of Contents
Clause Page
1 Evaluation .....................................................................................................................41
1.1 Adequacy of Technical Proposal .......................................................................... 41
1.2 Assessment of Non-Performing Contractors in projects with Employer................41
2 Qualification .................................................................................................................42
2.1 Eligibility .............................................................................................................. 43
2.2 Historical Contract Non-Performance .................................................................. 44
2.3 Financial Situation ................................................................................................ 45
2.4 Experience............................................................................................................. 47
2.5 Personnel ............................................................................................................... 49
2.6 Equipment ............................................................................................................. 50
41
1. EVALUATION
In addition to the criteria listed in ITB 34.2 (a) – (e) the following criteria shall apply:
1.1 Adequacy of Technical Proposal
Evaluation of the Bidder's Technical Proposal will include an assessment of the
Bidder's technical capacity to mobilize key equipment and personnel for the contract
consistent with its proposal regarding work methods, scheduling, and material
sourcing in sufficient detail and fully in accordance with the requirements stipulated
in Section VI (Employer's Requirements).
The Bidder’s Technical Proposal will include full details of the Bidder’s plans to
arrange for any of the work to be carried out by a Specialist. This is expected to apply
primarily to the electrical, mechanical and hydro-mechanical work included in the
Contract. Form EXP – 2.4.2 (b) of Part 1 Section V shall be completed in full by any
Specialist identified by the main Bidder. The evaluation of the Bid will take into
account this information supplied by the Bidder, who must satisfy the Employer that
the specialist work included in the Contract will be carried out by suitably qualified
and experienced personnel.
1.2 Assessment of Non-Performing Contractors in projects with Employer
Performance of the completed or on-going Contracts with the Employer shall be considered
during the evaluation.
The bidders shall be considered as a Non-Performing Contractor and their bids shall be
considered non-responsive, if the bidder found to be in one of the following:
I Any notice of breach by the Employer as per clause 56.3 of Conditions of Contract in
Small works documents of World Bank or unclosed Notice to Correct notices, as per
clause 15.1 of Conditions of Contract FIDIC MDB Harmonized Document, within
last five (05) years
II Delay damages have been imposed within last five (05) years
III If any Contracts have been terminated due to non-performance of the contractor
within last five (05) years
42
1 Qualification
Factor 2.1 Eligibility
1.1.1.1.1 Sub-Factor
1.1.1.1.2 Criteria
1.1.1.1.3 Docu
mentation
Required 1.1.1.1.4 Requirement
1.1.1.1.5 Bidder
Single Entity 1.1.1.1.6 Joint Venture, Consortium or Association
All partners
combined
1.1.1.1.7 Each
partner At least one
partner
2.1.1 Nationality Nationality in accordance
with ITB 4.2. Must meet
requirement Existing or intended
JV must meet
requirement
Must meet
requirement N / A Form ELI –1.1
and 1.2, with
attachments
2.1.2 Conflict of
Interest No- conflicts of interests as
described in ITB 4.3. Must meet
requirement Existing or intended
JV must meet
requirement
Must meet
requirement N / A Letter of Bid
2.1.3 Bank
Ineligibility Not having been declared
ineligible by the Bank as
described in ITB 4.4& 4.5.
Must meet
requirement Existing JV must
meet requirement Must meet
requirement N / A Letter of Bid
For Domestic
Bidders, only:
2.1.4 ICTAD/CIDA
Registration
Valid registration; 1
Grade: …………
Specialty: …………….
Must meet
requirement Existing JV must
meet requirement Must meet
requirement N / A Form ELI –1.1
and 1.2, with
attachments
2.1.5 Government
Owned Entity Compliance with conditions
of ITB 4.6 Must meet
requirement Must meet
requirement Must meet
requirement N / A
Form ELI –1.1
and 1.2, with
attachments
1Bidder has to provide his Grade and Specialty in ICTAD Registration
43
Factor 2.1 Eligibility
1.1.1.1.1 Sub-Factor
1.1.1.1.2 Criteria
1.1.1.1.3 Docu
mentation
Required 1.1.1.1.4 Requirement
1.1.1.1.5 Bidder
Single Entity 1.1.1.1.6 Joint Venture, Consortium or Association
All partners
combined
1.1.1.1.7 Each
partner At least one
partner
2.1.6 Ineligibility
based on a United
Nations resolution or
Borrower’s country
law
Not having been excluded
as a result of the
Borrower’s country laws or
official regulations, or by
an act of compliance with
UN Security Council
resolution, in accordance
with ITB 4.9
Must meet
requirement Existing JV must
meet requirement Must meet
requirement N / A
Letter of Bid
44
Factor 2.2 Historical Contract Non-Performance
1.1.1.1.8 Sub-Factor
1.1.1.1.9 Criteria
Documentation
Required 1.1.1.1.10 Requirement
1.1.1.1.11 Bidder
Single
Entity
1.1.1.1.12 Joint Venture, Consortium or Association
All partners
combined Each
partner At least
one
partner
2.2.1 History of non-
performing contracts Non-performance of a contract
did not occur within the last ten
(5) years prior to the deadline
for application submission,
based on all information on
fully settled disputes or
litigation. A fully settled
dispute or litigation is one that
has been resolved in accordance
with the Dispute Resolution
Mechanism under the
respective contract, and where
all appeal instances available to
the bidder have been exhausted.
Must meet
requirement
by itself or as
partner to
past or
existing JV
N / A
Must meet
requirement by
itself or as
partner to past or
existing JV
N / A Form CON – 2
2.2.2 Pending
Litigation All pending litigation shall in
total not represent more than
fifty percent (50%) of the
Bidder’s net worth and shall be
treated as resolved against the
Bidder.
Must meet
requirement
by itself or as
partner to
past or
existing JV
N / A
Must meet
requirement
by itself or as
partner to
past or
existing JV
N / A Form CON – 2
45
Factor 2.3 Financial Situation
Sub-Factor
1.1.1.1.13 Criteria
1.1.1.1.14 Docu
mentation
Required 1.1.1.1.15 Requirement
1.1.1.1.16 Bidder
Single Entity
1.1.1.1.17 Joint Venture, Consortium or Association
All partners
combined Each
partner
At least
one
partner
2.3.1 Historical
Financial
Performance
Submission of audited balance
sheets, other financial
statements acceptable to the
Employer, for the last five (5)
years to demonstrate the current
soundness of the bidder’s
financial position and its
prospective long term
profitability.
Must meet
requirement N / A
Must meet
requirement N / A
Form FIN – 3.1
with attachments
2.3.2. Average
Annual Turnover
Minimum average annual
construction turnover of LKR
100 Million within the last five
(5) years
Must meet
requirement Must meet
requirement
Must meet
Twenty five
percent
(25%) of the
requirement
Must meet
Fifty One
percent
(51%) of the
requirement
Form FIN –3.2
46
Factor 2.3 Financial Situation
Sub-Factor
1.1.1.1.13 Criteria
1.1.1.1.14 Docu
mentation
Required 1.1.1.1.15 Requirement
1.1.1.1.16 Bidder
Single Entity
1.1.1.1.17 Joint Venture, Consortium or Association
All partners
combined Each
partner
At least
one
partner
2.3.3. Financial
Resources
The Bidder must demonstrate
access to, or availability of,
financial resources such as
liquid assets, unencumbered
real assets, lines of credit, and
other financial means, other
than any contractual advance
payments to meet the following
cash-flow requirement:
LKR 40 Million
Must meet
requirement Must meet
requirement
Must meet
Twenty five
percent
(25%) of the
requirement
Must meet
Fifty One
percent
(51%) of the
requirement
Form FIN –3.3
47
Factor 2.4 Experience
Sub-Factor
Criteria
Documentation
Required Requirement
Bidder
Single Entity
Joint Venture, Consortium or Association
All partners
combined
Each
partner
At least
one
partner
2.4.1 General
Experience Experience under contracts in the
role of contractor, subcontractor,
or management contractor for at
least the last five (5) years prior to
the applications submission
deadline, and with activity in at
least nine (9) months of each year
Must meet
requirement
N / A
Must meet
requirement
N / A Form EXP -2.4.1
2.4.2 Specific
Experience (a)Participation as contractor,
management contractor, or
subcontractor, in at least one (1)
contract within the last ten (10)
years, each with a value higher
than LKR 47 Million that have
been successfully and substantially
completed and that are similar to
the proposed Works. The
similarity shall be based on the
physical size, complexity,
methods/technology or other
characteristics as described in
Section VI (Employer’s
Requirements).
Must meet
requirement
Must meet
requirements for
all
characteristics
N / A
Form EXP -
2.4.2(a)
48
Factor 2.4 Experience
Sub-Factor
Criteria
Documentation
Required Requirement
Bidder
Single Entity
Joint Venture, Consortium or Association
All partners
combined
Each
partner
At least
one
partner
b) For the above or other contracts
executed during the period
stipulated in 2.4.2(a) above, a
minimum experience in the
following key activities:
(1) Supply and fixing of high
tensile wire mesh 4000 m2
per year in slope
Stabilization work
Must meet
requirements
Must meet
requirements N /A
Must meet
requirements
Form EXP-
2.4.2(b)
49
2.5 Personnel
The Bidder must demonstrate that it will have the personnel for the key positions that
meet the following requirements:
Position
No.
of
Pos
itio
ns
Qualification
Total
Work
Experien
ce (years)
In Similar
Works
Experience(
years)
Project
Manager/Contractor’s
Representative
1
Bachelor’s Degree in the
Civil Engineering which is
recognized by the
University Grants
Commission or equivalent
qualifications
(Slope Stabilization including
soilnailing)
05 02
Technical Officer
(Civil) 1
NDT (Civil) or NDES
(Civil) or HNDE( Civil) or
equivalent qualification.
(Slope Stabilization with high
tensile wire mesh)
05 02
Quantity
Surveyor
1 Certificate/ Diploma in civil
engineering /quantity
surveying offered by a
recognized institution (Not
below NVQ level 5)
05 02
The Bidder shall provide details of the proposed personnel and their experience
records in the relevant forms included in Section IV (Bidding Forms).
50
2.6 Equipment
The Bidder must demonstrate that it will have access to the key Contractor’s
equipment, listed hereafter:
Item Equipment Type and characteristic Minimum
number
required
1 Crane 01
The Bidder shall provide further details of proposed items of equipment using the
relevant forms in Section IV (Bidding Forms).
51
Section IV – Bidding Forms
52
Section IV - Bidding Forms
Table of Forms
Page
Letter of Bid ..................................................................................................................... 53
Schedules .......................................................................................................................... 56
Preamble to the Bill of Quantity ........................................................................................ 57
Bill of Quantities ............................................................................................................... 61
Form of Bid Security (Bank Guarantee) ....................................................................... 67
Technical Proposal .......................................................................................................... 70
Forms for Personnel .......................................................................................................... 71
Forms for Equipment ......................................................................................................... 73
Site Organization ............................................................................................................... 74
Method Statements ............................................................................................................ 75
Mobilization and Construction Schedule .......................................................................... 76
53
Letter of Bid
54
Letter of Bid
The Bidder must prepare the Letter of Bid on stationery with its letterhead clearly
showing the Bidder’s complete name and address.
Note: All italicized text is for use in preparing this form and shall be deleted from the
final products.
Date: _______________
Bidding No.: CRIP/WORKS/RDA/NCB/328
Invitation for Bid No.: IFB/CRIP/WORKS/RDA/NCB/328
To: Chairman,
Project Procurement Committee,
Project Implementation Unit (PIU),
Climate Resilience Improvement Project (CRIP),
Road Development Authority,
122, Main Street,
Battaramulla
We, the undersigned, declare that:
(a) We have examined and have no reservations to the Bidding Documents, including
Addenda issued in accordance with Instructions to Bidders (ITB) Clause 8;
(b) We offer to execute in conformity with the Bidding Documents the following Works:
“Supply and fixing of High Tensile Wire Mesh and Accessories in Unstable slope
segments between Culvert Nos. 75/5 & 76/4 on Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi Road
(A005)”; Contract No. CRIP/WORKS/RDA/NCB/328
(c) The total price of our Bid, excluding any discounts offered in item (d) below is Sri
Lankan Rupees ………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………
…………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………. (LKR ……………………….). This price is before Value
Added Tax (VAT).
(d) The discounts offered and the methodology for their application are: _____________;
(e) Our bid shall be valid for a period of 119 days from the date fixed for the bid
submission deadline in accordance with the Bidding Documents, and it shall remain
binding upon us and may be accepted at any time before the expiration of that period;
55
(f) If price adjustment provisions apply, the Table(s) of Adjustment Data shall be
considered part of this Bid;
(g) If our bid is accepted, we commit to obtain a performance security in accordance with
the Bidding Document;
(h) Our firm, including any Subcontractors or suppliers for any part of the Contract, have
nationalities from eligible countries;
(i) We, including any Subcontractors or suppliers for any part of the contract, do not have
any conflict of interest in accordance with ITB 4.3;
(j) We are not participating, as a Bidder or as a Subcontractor, in more than one bid in
this bidding process in accordance with ITB 4.3, other than alternative offers
submitted in accordance with ITB 13;
(k) Our firm, its affiliates or subsidiaries, including any Subcontractors or Suppliers for
any part of the contract, has not been declared ineligible by the Bank, under the
Employer’s country laws or official regulations or by an act of compliance with a
decision of the United Nations Security Council;
(l) We are not a government owned entity / We are a government owned entity but meet
the requirements of ITB 4.6;6
(m) We understand that this bid, together with your written acceptance thereof included in
your notification of award, shall constitute a binding contract between us, until a
formal contract is prepared and executed;
(n) We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest evaluated bid or any other
bid that you may receive; and
(o) If awarded the contract, the person named below shall act as Contractor’s
Representative: ________________________________________________________
Name:
In the capacity of:
Signed:
Duly authorized to
sign the Bid for
and on behalf of:
Date:
6Use one of the two options as appropriate.
56
Schedules
Preamble to the Bill of Quantities
Bill of Quantities
Day works Schedule
57
Preamble to the Bills of Quantities
A. Preamble
1. The Bills of Quantities shall be read in conjunction with all parts of this entire Bidding
Document; the Instructions to Bidders, General and Particular Conditions, Technical
Specifications, and Drawings and other supplementary information.
2. The quantities given in the Bills of Quantities are estimated and provisional, and are given
to provide a common basis for bidding. The Contractor should not use the estimated
quantities for the purposes of ordering materials.
3. The Bills of Quantities includes lump sums, unit prices and provisional sums. The lump
sum price quoted shall be deemed to be full compensation at the completion of work
items. Measurements of lump sum items for the Interim Payments shall be based on
percentage completion of the work or milestones, as per the Contractor’s proposed
schedule of monthly payments, as approved by the Project Manager.
4. Provisional Sums included and so designated in the Bills of Quantities shall be expended
in whole or in part at the direction and discretion of the Project Manager in accordance
with Sub-Clause 37.7 of Particular Conditions.
5. The method of measurement of completed work for payment shall be in accordance with
relevant method contained in the Specification (including, if applicable, any Special
Provisions and/or other Specification Appendices).
6. The basis of payment will be actual quantities of work ordered and carried out, as
measured by the Contractor and verified by the Project Manager and valued at the rates
and prices tendered in the priced Bills of Quantities, where applicable, and otherwise at
such rates and prices as the Project Manager may fix within the terms of the Contract.
7. The rates and prices included in the priced Bills of Quantities, except insofar as it is
otherwise provided under the Contract, shall include all Contractor’s plant, equipment,
labour, supervision, materials, transport, erection, temporary works, maintenance, testing,
wastage, insurance, overheads, profit, taxes (excluding VAT) together with all general
risks, liabilities and obligations set out or implied in the Contract.
8. Quantities shall be measured net from the drawing. No allowance for bulking, shrinkage,
working space or wastage will be allowed.
9. The weight of steel reinforcement will be computed from drawings. The rate should allow
for wastage, spacers, laps, chairs, hooks, bends, binding wire, etc.
10. The rates and prices shall be quoted entirely in Sri Lankan Rupee and Cents. The
percentage for foreign currency requirements, included in said rates and prices, shall be as
indicated in the Appendix to Bid, see Instruction to Bidders, Clause 15.
11. A rate or price shall be entered against each item in the Bills of Quantities, whether
quantities are stated or not. The cost of items against which the Contractor failed to enter a
rate or price shall deemed to be covered by other rates and prices entered in the Bills of
Quantities.
12. The whole cost of complying with the provisions of the Contract shall be included in the
items provided in the priced Bills of Quantities, and where no items are provided the cost
58
shall be deemed to be distributed among the rates and prices entered for the related items
of work.
13. General directions and descriptions of work and materials are not necessarily repeated or
summarized in the Bills of Quantities. References to the relevant sections of the contract
documentation shall be made before entering rates or prices against each item in the Bills
of Quantities.
14. Errors will be corrected by the Employer for any arithmetic errors pursuant to Clause 31
of the Instruction to Bidders.
15. Drains/ Catch pits and Inlets to be measured separately such as, excavation, formwork,
reinforcement and concrete; relatively reference to the Sections 302, 1008, 1002 and 1001
of Technical Specification.
16. The units of measurement shown in the Bills of Quantities are metric units. Abbreviations
used are as follows:
Unit Abbreviation Unit Abbreviation
Millimeter mm Metric Tone t
Linear Metre m Lump Sum l.s.
Square
Millimeter
mm2 or
sq.mm.
Provisional
Sum
PS
Square Metre m2 or sq. m. Number, Each nr
Hectare ha Hour hr
Cubic Metre m3 or cu. m. Week wk
Litre ltr Month mth
Kilogram kg Vehicle-Month veh-mth
17. The contingencies included in the Contract Price may be used by the Employer for
approved payments to the Contractor for additional work for which payment is due to the
Contractor arising out of the performance of the Contract. The Contractor shall have no
entitlement to any contingency amount “per se”.
59
B. Day work Schedule
General
1. Reference should be made to Sub-Clause 50; General Conditions. Work shall not be
executed on a day work basis except by written order of the Project Manager. Bidders
shall enter basic rates for day work items in the Schedules. These rates shall apply to any
quantity of day work ordered by the Project Manager. Nominal quantities have been
indicated against each item of day work, however, the amount of day works will be
considered in the Tenders evaluation process. Unless otherwise adjusted, payments for
day work shall be subject to price adjustment in accordance with the provisions in the
Conditions of Contract.
Daywork Labour
2. In calculating payments due to the Contractor for the execution of day works, the hours
for labour will be reckoned from the time of arrival of the labour at the job site to execute
the particular item of day work to the time of departure from the job site, but excluding
meal breaks and rest periods. Only the time of classes of labour directly doing work
ordered by the Project Manager and are competent to perform such work will be
measured. The time of gangers (charge hands) actually doing work with the gangs will
also be measured but not the time of foremen or other supervisory personnel.
3. The Contractor shall be entitled to payment in respect to the total time that labour is
employed on day work, calculated at the basic rates entered by it in the “SCHEDULE OF
DAYWORK RATES: LABOUR”. The rates of labour shall be deemed to cover all costs
to the Contractor including (but not limited to) the amount of wages paid to such labour,
transportation time, overtime, subsistence allowances, and any sums paid to or on behalf
of such labour for social benefits in accordance with (Country of Borrower) law, as well
as Contractor’s profit, overheads, superintendence, liabilities and insurance and allowance
to labour, timekeeping and clerical and office work, the use of consumable stores, water,
lighting and power, the use of repair of staging, scaffolding, workshops and stores,
portable power tools, manual plant and tools. Supervision by the Contractor’s staff,
foremen and other supervisory personnel; and charges incidental to the foregoing.
Daywork Materials
4. The Contractor shall be entitled to payment in respect of materials used for daywork
(except for materials for which the cost is included in the percentage addition to labour
costs as detailed above), at the rates entered by him in the “SCHEDULE OF DAYWORK
RATES: MATERIALS” and shall be deemed to include overhead charges and profit as
follows:
a) The rates for materials shall be calculated on the basis of the invoiced price, freight,
insurance, handling expenses, damage, losses, etc., and shall provide for delivery to
store for stockpiling at the Site.
b) The cost of hauling materials for use on work ordered to be carried out as daywork
from the store or stockpile on the Site to the place where it is to be used will be paid in
accordance with the terms for Labour and Constructional Plant in this Schedule.
60
Daywork Constructional Plant
5. The Contractor shall be entitled to payments in respect of Construction equipment
employed on daywork at the basic rental rates entered by him in the “SCHEDULE OF
DAYWORK RATES: CONTRACTOR’S PLANT”. The said rates shall be deemed to
include due and complete allowance for depreciation, interest, indemnity and insurance,
repairs, maintenance, supplies, fuel, lubricants, and other consumables, and all overhead
profit and administrative costs related to the use of such equipment. The cost of drivers,
operators and assistants will be paid for separately as described under the section on the
Daywork Labour.
6. In calculating the payment due to the Contractor for Contractor’s Plant employed on
daywork, only the actual number of working hours will be eligible for payment, except
that where applicable and agreed with the Project Manager, the traveling time from the
part of the Site where the Contractor’s Plant was located when ordered by the Project
Manager to be employed on daywork and the time for return journey thereto shall be
included for payment.
61
Bill of Quantities
67
Form of Bid Security (Bank Guarantee)
68
Form of Bid Security (Bank Guarantee)
_____________________________________________________ [Bank’s Name, and
Address of Issuing Branch or Office]
Beneficiary: Director General, Road Development Authority, 1st Floor, “Maganeguma
Mahamedura”, No.216, Denzil Kobbekaduwa Mawatha, Koswatte, Battaramulla, Sri
Lanka.
Date: __________________________
BID GUARANTEE No.: __________________________
We have been informed
that____________________________________________________ (hereinafter called
"the Bidder") has submitted to you its bid dated _____________________ (hereinafter
called "the Bid") for the execution of “ Supply and fixing of High Tensile Wire Mesh
and Accessories in Unstable slope segments between Culvert Nos. 75/5 & 76/4 on
Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi Road (A005)” under Invitation for Bids No.
CRIP/WORKS/RDA/NCB/328 “the IFB”).
Furthermore, we understand that, according to your conditions, bids must be supported by
a bid guarantee.
At the request of the Bidder, we _____________________________________ [name of
Bank] hereby irrevocably undertake to pay you any sum or sums not exceeding in total an
amount of ____________________________________________ [amount in figures]
(_______________________________________________________________________)
[amount in words] upon receipt by us of your first demand in writing accompanied by a
written statement stating that the Bidder is in breach of its obligation(s) under the bid
conditions, because the Bidder:
(a) has withdrawn its Bid during the period of bid validity specified by the
Bidder in the Form of Bid; or
(b) having been notified of the acceptance of its Bid by the Employer during
the period of bid validity, (i) fails or refuses to execute the Contract
Form, if required, or (ii) fails or refuses to furnish the performance
security, in accordance with the ITB.
(c) has refused to accept the arithmetical corrections of the Bid
This guarantee will expire:(a) if the Bidder is the successful Bidder, upon our receipt of
copies of the contract signed by the Bidder and the performance security issued to you
upon the instruction of the Bidder; and (b) if the Bidder is not the successful Bidder, upon
the earlier of (i) our receipt of a copy your notification to the Bidder of the name of the
successful Bidder; or (ii) twenty-eight days after the expiration of the Bidder’s bid.
69
Consequently, any demand for payment under this guarantee must be received by us at the
office on or before that date.
This guarantee is subject to the Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees, ICC Publication
No. 758. _____________
[signature(s)]
70
Technical Proposal
Forms for personnel
Forms for equipment
Site organisation
Method statements
Mobilisation and construction schedule
71
Forms for Personnel
Form PER – 1: Proposed Personnel
Bidders should provide the names of suitably qualified personnel to meet the specified
requirements for each of the positions listed in Section III (Evaluation and Qualification
Criteria). The data on their experience should be supplied using the form below for each
candidate.
1. Title of position
Name
2. Title of position
Name
3. Title of position
Name
4. Title of position
Name
5. Title of position
Name
6. Title of position
Name
etc. Title of position
Name
72
Form PER – 2: Resume of Proposed Personnel
The Bidder shall provide all the information requested below. Fields with asterisk (*) shall
be used for evaluation.
Position*
Personnel information
Name
Date of birth
Professional qualifications
Present employment
Name of Employer
Address of Employer
Telephone
Contact (manager / personnel officer)
Fax
Job title
Years with present Employer
Summarize professional experience over the last five years, in reverse chronological
order. Indicate particular technical and managerial experience relevant to the project.
From* To* Company, project, position, and relevant technical and management experience*
73
Forms for Equipment
The Bidder shall provide adequate information to demonstrate clearly that it has the
capability to meet the requirements for the key equipment listed in Section III (Evaluation
and Qualification Criteria). A separate Form shall be prepared for each item of equipment
listed, or for alternative equipment proposed by the Bidder. The Bidder shall provide all
the information requested below, to the extent possible. Fields with asterisk (*) shall be
used for evaluation.
Type of Equipment*
Equipment Information
Name of manufacturer
Model and power rating
Capacity*
Year of manufacture*
Current Status
Current location
Details of current commitments
Source Indicate source of the equipment
Owned Rented Leased Specially manufactured
The following information shall be provided only for equipment not owned by the Bidder.
Owner Name of owner
Address of owner
Telephone
Contact name and title
Fax
Telex
Agreements
Details of rental / lease / manufacture agreements specific to the project
74
Site Organization
The Bidder shall provide a personnel chart for the proposed site organization, indicating the
key positions as given in Section III (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria) and other
positions, with names of personnel proposed and a description of the tasks assigned for such
positions.
75
Method Statements
The Bidder shall provide a method statement describing the methodology proposed to be
adopted in the execution of the contract.
76
Mobilization and Construction Schedule
The Bidder shall provide a detailed mobilization and construction schedule indicating the
sequence of all main operations and identifying critical activities.
78
Section V – Bidder’s Qualifications
79
Section V - Bidder’s Qualifications
Table of Forms
Page
Bidder’s Qualifications .......................................................................................................80
Bidder Information Sheet ...................................................................................................81
Party to JV Information Sheet ...........................................................................................82
Historical Contract Non-Performance ..............................................................................83
Current Contract Commitments / Works in Progress ....................................................84
Financial Situation ..............................................................................................................85
Average Annual Turnover .................................................................................................87
Financial Resources ............................................................................................................88
General Experience .............................................................................................................89
Specific Experience .............................................................................................................90
Specific Experience in Key Activities ................................................................................92
Form for Letter from the Bank for Granting of a Revolving Line of Credit…………94
Eligible Countries ................................................................................................................95
80
Bidder’s Qualifications
To establish its qualifications to perform the contract in accordance with Section III
(Evaluation and Qualification Criteria) the Bidder shall provide the information requested
in the corresponding Information Sheets included hereunder
81
Form ELI - 1.1
Bidder’s Information Sheet
Date: ______________________
Bidding No.: ________________
Invitation for Bid No.: _________
Page ________ of _______ pages
1. Bidder’s Legal Name
2. In case of JV, legal name of each party:
3. Details of CIDA/ICTAD Registration
Registration number:
Grade:
Specialty:
Expiry date
4. Bidder’s Authorized Representative Information
Name:
Address:
Telephone/Fax numbers:
Email Address:
5 Attached are copies of original documents of:
CIDA/ICTAD Registration (For Domestic Bidders only)
In case of JV, letter of intent to form JV including a draft agreement, or JV
agreement, in accordance with ITB Sub-Clauses 4.1
In case of government owned entity, documents establishing legal and financial
autonomy and compliance with the principles of commercial law, in accordance with
ITB Sub-Clause 4.6.
82
Form ELI - 1.2
Party to JV Information Sheet
Date:
______________________
Bidding No.:
_________________
Invitation for Bid
No.:_________
Page ________ of_ ______
pages
1. Bidder’s Legal Name:
2. JV’s Party legal name:
3. JV’s Party Year of Registration:
4. JV’s Party Legal Address in Country of Registration:
5. JV’s Party Authorized Representative Information
Name:
Address:
Telephone/Fax numbers:
Email Address:
6. Attached are copies of original documents of:
Articles of Incorporation or Registration of firm named in 1, above, in accordance
with ITB Sub-Clauses 4.1 and 4.2.
In case of government owned entity from the Purchaser’s country, documents
establishing legal and financial autonomy and compliance with the principles of
commercial law, in accordance with ITB Sub-Clause 4.6.
83
Form CON – 2
Historical Contract Non-Performance
Bidder’s Legal Name: _______________________ Date: _____________________
JV Partner Legal Name: _______________________
Bidding No.: __________________
Page _______ of _______ pages
Non-Performing Contracts in accordance with (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria)
Contract non-performance did not occur during the stipulated period.
Contract non-performance during the stipulated period is given below.
Year Outcome as
Percent of
Total Assets
Contract Identification
Total Contract
Amount (current
value, in Rs)
______
______
Contract Identification:
Name of Employer:
Address of Employer:
Matter in dispute:
___________
Pending Litigation, in accordance with Section III (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria)
No pending litigation at present.
Pending litigation is given below.
Year Outcome as
Percent of
Total Assets
Contract Identification
Total Contract
Amount (current
value, in Rs)
______
______
Contract Identification:
Name of Employer:
Address of Employer:
Matter in dispute:
___________
______
______
Contract Identification:
Name of Employer:
Address of Employer:
Matter in dispute:
___________
84
Form CCC
Current Contract Commitments / Works in Progress
Name of Bidder or partner of a joint venture
Bidders and each partner to a JVA should provide information on their current commitments on all contracts that have been awarded, or for which a letter of intent or acceptance has been received, or for contracts approaching completion, but for which an unqualified, full completion certificate has yet to be issued.
Name of contract Employer,
contact address/tel/fax
Value of outstanding
work
(LKR)
Estimated completion date
Average monthly invoicing over last six months
(LKR)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
etc.
Value at current price levels of existing commitments and on-going works to be
completed during the next 1 year:
The Bidder shall provide evidence to substantiate the adequacy of the sources of finance
to meet the Bidder’s cash flow requirements on the above contracts.
85
Form FIN – 3.1
Financial Situation
Historical Financial Performance
Bidder’s Legal Name: _______________________ Date: _____________________
JV Partner Legal Name: _______________________Bidding No.: __________________
Page _______ of _______ pages
To be completed by the Bidder and, if JV, by each partner
Information from Balance Sheet
Financial information
in LKR
Historic information for previous past 05 years
2015-
2016
2014-
2015
2013-
2014
2012-
2013
2011-
2012
Average
Total Assets (TA)
Total Liabilities (TL)
Net Worth (NW)
Current Assets (CA)
Current Liabilities (CL)
Total Revenue (TR)
Profits Before Taxes
(PBT)
86
The Bidder shall attach copies of financial statements (balance sheets, including all related
notes, and income statements) for the years required above complying with the following
conditions:
Statements must reflect the financial situation of the Bidder or partner to a JV, and
not sister or parent companies.
Historic financial statements must be audited by a certified accountant.
Historic financial statements must be complete, including all notes to the financial
statements.
Historic financial statements must correspond to accounting periods already
completed and audited (no statements for partial periods shall be requested or
accepted).
87
Form FIN – 3.2
Average Annual Turnover
Bidder’s Legal Name: ___________________________ Date: _____________________
JV Partner Legal Name: ____________________________ Bidding No.: ______________
Page _______ of _______ pages
Annual turnover data (civil engineering construction work only)
Year Turnover(LKR)
2014-2015
2015-2016
2016-2017
2017-2018
2018-2019
Total:
Average*
* Average annual turnover calculated as total certified payments received for work in
progress or completed over the number of years specified in Section III.
88
Form FIN - 3.3
Financial Resources
Specify proposed sources of financing, such as liquid assets, unencumbered real assets, lines of credit, and other financial means, net of current commitments, available to meet the total construction cash flow demands of the subject contract or contracts as indicated in Section III (Evaluation and Qualification Criteria)
Source of financing Amount (LKR)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Financial Resources
(As per Latest Audited Financial Statement)
2018/2019 or latest
Amount (LKR)
1 Current Assets
1.1.2
2
Current Liabilities
3 Working Capital (1-2)
4
Works in hand/ Current Contract
Commitments
1.1.3
5
Line of credit*
6
Available Liquid Asset/Financial
Resources’ {3-{(0.1) x4} +5}
* Line of credit if provided shall strictly be as per attached Form. (Page No.94)
89
1.2 Form EXP - 2.4.1
General Experience
Bidder’s Legal Name: ____________________________ Date:
____________________
JV Partner Legal Name: ___________________________ Bidding No.:
______________
Page _______ of _______ pages
Starting
Month /
Year
Ending
Month /
Year
Years*
Contract Identification
Role of
Bidder
______
______
Contract name:
Brief Description of the Works performed
by the Bidder:
Name of Employer:
Address:
_________
______
______
Contract name:
Brief Description of the Works performed
by the Bidder:
Name of Employer:
Address:
_________
______
______
Contract name:
Brief Description of the Works performed
by the Bidder:
Name of Employer:
Address:
_________
______
______
Contract name:
Brief Description of the Works performed
by the Bidder:
Name of Employer:
Address:
_________
______
______
Contract name:
Brief Description of the Works performed
by the Bidder:
Name of Employer:
Address:
_________
______
______
Contract name:
Brief Description of the Works performed
by the Bidder:
Name of Employer:
Address:
_________
* List calendar year for years with contracts with at least nine (9) months activity per year
starting with the earliest year
90
Form EXP – 2.4.2 (a)
Specific Experience
Bidder’s Legal Name: ___________________________ Date: _______________________
JV Partner Legal Name: _________________________ Bidding No.: __________________
Page ___________ of _______ pages
Similar Contract Number:
of (total number of contracts)
required.
Information
Contract Identification _______________________________________
Award date
Completion date
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
Role in Contract Contractor
Management
Contractor
Subcontra
ctor
Total contract amount __________________________ LKR_______
If partner in a JV or subcontractor,
specify participation of total contract
amount
__________%
_____________
LKR_______
Employer’s Name: _______________________________________
Address:
Telephone/fax number:
E-mail:
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
91
Form EXP – 2.4.2 (a) (cont.)
Specific Experience (cont.)
Bidder’s Legal Name: ___________________________ Page _______ of _______ pages
JV Partner Legal Name: ___________________________
Similar Contract Number: of
(total number of contracts) required. Information
Description of the similarity contracts
given in the Form of General Experience
Amount ________________________________
_
Physical size ________________________________
_
Complexity ________________________________
_
Methods/Technology ________________________________
_
Physical Production Rate
________________________________
_
92
Form EXP – 2.4.2 (b)
Specific Experience in Key Activities
Bidder’s Legal Name: ___________________________ Date: _____________________
JV Partner Legal Name: _________________________Bidding No.: _________________
Subcontractor’s Legal Name: ______________ Page _______ of _______ pages
Information
Contract Identification ____________________________________
___
Award date
Completion date
____________________________________
___
____________________________________
___
Role in Contract Contractor
Management
Contractor
Subcontrac
tor
Total contract amount _________________________ LKR_____
___
If partner in a JV or subcontractor,
specify participation of total contract
amount
__________%
_____________
LKR_____
___
Employer’s Name: ____________________________________
___
Address:
Telephone/fax number:
E-mail:
____________________________________
___
____________________________________
___
____________________________________
___
____________________________________
___
93
Form EXP – 2.4.2 (b)(cont.)
Specific Experience in Key Activities (cont.)
Bidder’s Legal Name: ___________________________ Page _______ of _______ pages
JV Partner Legal Name: ___________________________
Subcontractor’s Legal Name: __________________________
Information
Description of the key activities in the
contracts given in EXP 2.4.2 (a)
94
FORM FOR LETTER FROM THE BANK FOR GRANTING
OF A REVOLVING LINE OF CREDIT
FROM: ……………………………………………
…………………………………………….
…………………………………………….
TO : Director General
Road Development Authority (RDA)
1st Floor, “Maganeguma Mahamedura”,
No.216, Denzil Kobbekaduwa Mawatha,
Kosswatte, Battaramulla,
Sri Lanka
SUB: Letter from the Bank for providing a line of credit in favor of (1)
…………………………………….. in case of award to them of works for the
Contract of “Supply and fixing of High Tensile Wire Mesh and Accessories
in Unstable slope segments between Culvert Nos. 75/5 & 76/4 on
Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi Road (A005)”
Contract No: CRIP/WORKS/RDA/NCB/328
Dear Sir,
We (2) ……………………………………..bankers of (3)
………………….hereby agree to grant revolving line of credit for an amount of
Sri Lanka Rupees ………………….. for the purpose of the execution of the Civil
Work Contracts under the Contract of “Supply and fixing of High Tensile Wire
Mesh and Accessories in Unstable slope segments between Culvert Nos. 75/5
& 76/4 on Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi Road (A005)”
Contract No: CRIP/WORKS/RDA/NCB/328
This revolving line of credit will be maintained until the works are taken over by
the RDA.
……………………………………..
Signature of Representative of the Bank
Notes
(1) Name of Beneficiary / Bidder
(2) Name of Bank
(3) Name of Beneficiary / Bidder
95
Eligible Countries
1.2.1.1.1
Eligibility for the Provision of Goods, Works and Services in Bank-Financed
Procurement
1. In accordance with Para 1.8 of the Guidelines: Procurement under IBRD Loans and IDA
Credits, dated May 2004, the Bank permits firms and individuals from all countries to
offer goods, works and services for Bank-financed projects. As an exception, firms of a
Country or goods manufactured in a Country may be excluded if:
Para 1.8 (a) (i): as a matter of law or official regulation, the Borrower’s Country
prohibits commercial relations with that Country, provided that the Bank is
satisfied that such exclusion does not preclude effective competition for the
supply of the Goods or Works required, or
Para 1.8 (a) (ii): by an Act of Compliance with a Decision of the United Nations
Security Council taken under Chapter VII of the Charter of the United Nations,
the Borrower’s Country prohibits any import of goods from that Country or any
payments to persons or entities in that Country.
2. For the information of borrowers and bidders, at the present time firms, goods and
services from the following countries are excluded from this bidding:
(a) With reference to paragraph 1.8 (a) (i) of the Guidelines:
(b) With reference to paragraph 1.8 (a) (ii) of the Guidelines:
96
PART 2 – EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS
97
Section VI – Employer’s Requirements
98
Section VI - Employer’s Requirements
Table of Contents
Page
A General Information ....................................................................................................99
1 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 99
2 Location of Site ..................................................................................................... 99
B Scope of Work ............................................................................................................100
1 Scope of Works ................................................................................................... 100
C Specification................................................................................................................101
Standard Specification ................................................................................................ 101
Particular Specification ............................................................................................... 102
D Drawings .................................................................................................................... 275
E Environmental Management Plan........................................................................... 276
99
A GENERAL INFORMATION
1 Introduction
The transport component of the Climate Resilience Improvement Project
(CRIP) funded by the World Bank and the Government of Sri Lanka will
implementation of remedial measures for improvement of safety and
operational efficiency in Roads & bridges. The Climate Resilience
Improvement Project of the Ministry of Irrigation functions as the Project
Management Unit and the RDA function as the Implementing Agencies for the
bridges and roads in National Highways.
2 Location of the Site
The site is located at Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi Road (A 005) in Central
Province.
100
B SCOPE OF WORK
Supply and fixing of high tensile wire mesh in unstable slope segments between culvert
No 75/5 To 76/4 on Peradeniya - Badulla - Chenkaladi Road (A005)
This works will comprise of following.
I. Supply and fixing of high tensile wire mesh in the already installed soil nails and grid
beam system
101
C SPECIFICATIONS
Standard Specifications
The Standard General Specifications comprise the “CIDA/ICTAD Publication No –
SCA/5, 2nd Edition, June 2009 Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance
of Roads and Bridges”, published in Sri Lanka by the Construction Industry Development
Authority(CIDA) formerly known as the Institute for Construction Training and
Development (ICTAD).
These standard specifications are not attached with this bidding document and the bidder
should obtain them from the following address:
Construction Industry Development Authority (CIDA)
“Savsiripaya”
123,Wijerama Mawatha
Colombo 07
Sri Lanka
102
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENT
Section
Abbreviations …………………………………………………………………………….103
100 General ………………………………………………………… 104
200 Site Clearing …………………………………………………… 158
300 Earthworks ………………………………………………………166
400 Drainage Construction ………………………………………… 183
500 Incidental Construction …………………………………………194
600 Concrete and Other Structures …………………………………203
700 Soil Nailing, Horizontal Drains and Monitoring ………………227
800 Quality Control of Work ……………………………………… 230
900 Material Details ………………………………………………… 240
1000 Tests for Quality Control of Material and Works …………… 242
Appendix A ……………………………………………………………….… 263
Appendix B ………………………………………………………………..… 271
103
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS
Where there is discrepancy between standard general specification and particular
specifications, standard general specification will supersede.
ABBREVIATIONS
AASHTO - American Association of State Highway & Transportation Officials
AIV - Aggregate Impact Value
AOS - Apparent Opening Size
AS - Australian Standard
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
BS - British Standards
CEA - Central Environmental Authority
CIRIA - Construction Industry Research and Information Association
CS - Ceylon Standards
EIA - Environmental impact assessment
EMAP - Environmental Management Action Plan
EMP - Environmental Management Plan
EN - European Standards
EPL - Environmental Protection License
ESDD/RDA - Environmental and Social Development Division of the Road
Development Authority
FFPO - Fauna Flora Protection Ordinance
FIDIC - Federation International Des Ingenieurs - Conseils
FO - Forest Ordinance
GSMB - Geological Surveys and Mines Bureau
HMSO - Her Majesty’s Stationery Office, United Kingdom
HSP - Health and Safety Plan
ICTAD - Institute for Construction Training and Development
ISO - International Organization for Standardization
MARV - Minimum Average Roll Values
MQA - Manufacturer’s Quality Assurance
MS - Mild Steel
NC - Non Conformance report
NWSDB - National Water Supply and Drainage Board
OPC - Ordinary Portland Cement
PVC - Poly Vinyl Chloride
SLS - Sri Lanka Standards
STD - Sexually Transmitted Diseases
TRL - Transportation Research Laboratory, United Kingdom
W/C - Water : Cement
104
100 GENERAL
101 ARRANGEMENT FOR TRAFFIC WITH SAFETY PRECAUTIONS DURING
CONSTRUCTIONS,REHABILITATION OR CROSSING OF EXISTING
ROADS
101.1 General
The Contractor shall provide and maintain for the period of construction, traffic control
and safety devices including Traffic Sings, Barricade Boards, Traffic Cones, Lighting
Devices etc., at all locations where work is in progress in accordance with Part II of the
"Manual of Traffic Control Devices for Road Work Areas, Road Development Authority
(Second Edition, April 2004)" or their latest editions.
Material and equipment temporarily stored on, or adjacent to, the existing roadway shall
be so placed, and the work at all times, shall be so conducted as to cause minimum
disruption to the travelling public. Warning signs and barrels will be required to separate
the Contractor's material and equipment from the public.
The Contractor will not be permitted to have excavations open on sides of the road at a
particular location such that there is a step adjacent to public traffic which may create a
danger to traffic, i.e. the excavation/trimming for slope rectification.
The maximum length of one-way working controlled by stop or go boards for flagmen
shall be 100 m. This length may be further reduced if visibility is reduced at bends on
increased where appropriate at the Project Manager's discretion.
During construction which requires one-way-traffic, the Contractor shall be responsible
for the removal of broken down vehicles including vehicles damaged in accidents and
shall maintain one way uninterrupted traffic flow at all times.
As an alternative or in addition to one-way working, traffic diversions may be arranged
where this is feasible. Such diversions shall be approved by the Project Manager in
conjunction with the Sri Lanka Traffic Police. The Contractor shall also arrange for the
Traffic Police to be in attendance for traffic management. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the provision and maintenance of adequate signing for the duration of any
diversion.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing adequate number of flagmen,
wherever, temporary diversions or at sections where part of the road is used for the
purpose of carrying out of permanent work.
105
101.2 Using Part of the Road
Part of the carriageway shall be kept open to traffic, while improvement works such as
slope stabilization of the unstable or failed cut slope areasis being carried out in the other
part, provided the part kept open to traffic is adequate for the purpose. Shoulder area of
the road shall not be used for traffic diversion during rectification works.
101.3 Temporary Diversions
The Contractor shall construct temporary diversion ways wherever construction of the
Works will interrupt existing public or private roads or rights-of-ways. Diversions must
be constructed in advance of any interference with the existing rights-of-way, and the
subsequent traffic management, safety and control shall be in accordance with the
paragraphs of this Clause 101 and/or as directed by the Project Manager.
Where traffic management schemes are shown in the Contract Drawings they are for
guidance and bidding purposes only. It is Contractor’s role responsibility to plan and
design the necessary traffic diversions in the most efficient way possible in order to
enable him to complete the Works within the Contract Period, with the minimum
disruption of normal traffic flow, and absolute minimum impact on the Works, third
parties, and environment.
The standard of construction and lighting of diversions shall be suitable in all respects for
the volume, size and speed of traffic using the existing way. The level of lighting shall be
as indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager, and must satisfy the
requirements of the concerned local authorities prior to being approved by the Project
Manager. The width and number of lanes shall be sufficient to maintain an acceptable
traffic flow commensurate with existing conditions. In any case the minimum width of
traffic lane shall be 3.5 m. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain prior
permission of the relevant Local Authority to open detours and the use of local authority
roads.
Permanent roads used as temporary detour roads shall be signed and marked in
compliance with detour road requirements whilst under detour road status. Should this
road marking and signing be of a temporary nature the Contractor shall ensure that its
removal will not impair the quality of the Permanent Works.
Under no circumstances will the Contractor be allowed to open any new carriageway for
detour traffic with permanent road markings which are not in compliance with the
accepted detour markings.
The minimum pavement construction of any diversion road, unless otherwise specified,
shall not be less than 40mm of bituminous paving course on 150 mm of primed granular
road base. Paving may be laid directly on primed subgrade only with the Project
Manager's prior approval.
106
The Contractor shall responsible for the maintenance of the diversion roads during the
use of them and incase detour road is an existing road; Contractor shall responsible for
maintenance and repair of the pavement in a satisfactory condition to the Project
Manager and such local authorities.
In urban areas, the traffic diversions shall be illuminated to a suitable lighting. In rural or
other areas, where no street lighting exists, all signing shall be reflectorized and all
changes in direction shall be floodlit at night to an intensity approved by the Project
Manager.
101.4 Traffic Safety and Control
The Contractor shall, after consultation with the Project Manager, all the concerned
Local Authorities and Police prepare a scheme of traffic management for carrying out the
Works. Such proposals shall be submitted to the Project Manager for his approval,
together with written approval no objection certificates from the concerned authorities,
not less than 30 days before the planned implementation of each proposal.
The Contractor shall not commence any works affecting any public highway until all
approved traffic safety measures conforming to the Project Manager's prior approval
have been fully implemented to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
The Contractor shall take necessary measures for the safety of traffic and third parties by
providing, erecting and maintaining all signs, lamps, barriers, traffic control signals, road
markings, etc. in a clean and legible condition, and shall position, re-position, cover or
remove them as required by the progress of the Works. The barriers shall be strong. Red
lanterns or warning lights shall be mounted on the barriers at nights and shall be kept lit
till sunrise. If the Contractor fails to comply with these requirements; the Project
Manager shall order a third party to rectify the shortcomings and shall recover the cost of
such works from the Contractor.
101.5 Measurement and payment
a. Measurement
All the costs related to the implementation and execution of the Traffic Safety and
Management Plan shall be measured monthly. The quantity of work for payment during
the month shall be assessed by the Project Manager based on the Contractor's claim
supported with a check list to show key activities carried out. Suitable weightings may be
agreed on key activities between the Project Manager and the Contractor to indicate the
monthly payment based on performance.
Maintenance and repair of temporary diversion roads, if any shall be measured for
payment as a Provisional Sum.
107
b. Payment
(i) Payment shall include all costs necessary and required for the proper implementation
of the Traffic Safety and Management Plan in full accordance with the requirements
of this Specification Section, including periodic up to date submittals.
(ii) Payments shall be made monthly according to the Traffic Safety and Management
Plan. The Contractor shall maintain the record book of the monthly activities and
prepare a checklist for payment.
(iii) The Project Manager may at any time with hold payments if (in the opinion of the
Project Manager) the Traffic Safety and Control is not being provided in due
compliance with the requirements and procedures of this Specification.
Provision and maintenance of temporary diversion roads, if any; payment shall be made as
per a Provisional Sum.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
101(1)
Management, Safety & Control & Temporary Diversion of
Traffic, including provision of a general traffic
management plan
Month
101(2) Maintenance and Repair of temporary diversion roads, if
any
Provisional
Sum
102 CONTROL OF WORKS
102.1 Authority of the Project Manager
The Project Manager shall decide on all matters which may arise including the following:
1. The quality and acceptability of materials furnished
2. Rate of progress of work
3. Interpretation of, and change to, plans and specifications
4. Acceptable fulfillment of the contract on the part of the Contractor
5. Type of machinery and equipment to be used
Decisions regarding the above will be based on stipulations given in contract documents
and sound Engineering practice taking into consideration all factors bearing on the issue
including all regulations, instructions and guide lines established by the Client
organization for the administration of the contract.
In this regard the Project Manager shall be free to exercise such powers as are conferred
on him by the General Condition of Contract.
108
102.2 Conformity with Plans and Specifications
All works performed shall be in accordance with these Specifications and in conformity
with lines, grades, Cross-sections and dimensions shown on plans and working drawings.
All materials furnished shall also be in conformity with the Specifications. In the event
the work performed and/or the materials furnished are not in conformity with the Plans
and Specifications and have resulted in an inferior or unsatisfactory product, such work
or material shall be removed and replaced or otherwise corrected by and at the expense of
the Contractor.
Field Controls
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall set out such initial construction stakes
and bench marks that will serve as the field controls for the construction work and obtain
the approval of the Project Manager for the same. No work shall begin till such bench
marks, stakes, setting out points, reference points and all control points are certified as
corrected by the Project Manager or his representatives.
Submission
Unless otherwise specified, at least 28 (twenty-eight) days before the commencement of
the works, the Contractor shall submit Working Drawings and Method Statements for the
Project Manager’s approval.
The Method Statements shall satisfy the requirements of the Contract and the following:
Construction method
Quality control method
Measurement method
Safety precautions
Work schedule
Temporary Works plan
Plan for disposal of surplus soil
Plan for waste disposal
Environmental protection measures
The plan for disposal of surplus soil, plan for waste disposal and environmental
protection measures shall comply with the laws of Sri Lanka.
Temporary Works
The Contractor shall furnish construction yards which shall be flat and suitably graded
and covered with gravel to avoid any pooling of water and getting muddied. Construction
yards shall be located at every Location and shall be prepared and facilitated with
Contractor’s office with furniture, equipment, consumables, stockyard for various
109
materials and parking space etc. On completion of the Project, the construction yards
including all facilities shall be demolished and the area shall be properly restored and
returned to the legal owner.
Unless otherwise instructed by the Project Manager, upon completion of the Works, the
Contractor shall remove all temporary facilities including temporary roads, clean up and
restore the land and vegetation to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
The Contractor shall include the temporary work plan and working drawings in the
Method Statements.
102.3 Construction Programming
The Contractor shall program his work so as to reduce as far as is practicable, disruption
to all road users during construction of the Works and maintain traffic control measures
for the safety of traffic at all times. The Contractor shall provide with his time /location
program and detailed construction schedule, a list of proposed working area with relevant
location showing where he intends to commence his slope rectification work. The Project
Manager shall approve these locations without undue delay subject to compliance with
this Clause and the Contractor will then be given access to these sections. Subsequent
sections shall be requested and the Project Manager shall approve them in accordance
with the above procedure.
Where relevant the Contractor shall also provide with his programme, his proposal for
soil nailing, indicating the nailing sources and high strength reinforced mesh, etc., his
suppliers of above products, the programme of supplying of them and his resources
schedule and their time of availability at site. He shall also provide a complete method
statement explaining as to how be commences and proceeds with all major items of work
in his programme.
If required, the Contractor shall take into consideration, the works to be completed by
him in order to commence the works of the Service Agencies that would be made
available to him by the Employer, in preparing his Time/Location programme.
The Contractor shall ensure that sufficient labour, equipment and material is available to
complete the work. Before any subsequent 100 m section is made available to the
Contractor, the Contractor shall demonstrate that he has sufficient labour, equipment and
material available in approved stocks to progress the Works. If in the opinion of the
Project Manager, this is not demonstrated the Contractor shall not be permitted to start
work on the subsequent section.
102.4 Compaction – General
Compaction of materials shall be carried out in layers of uniform thickness using
approved compaction equipment, including combinations thereof if required by the
Project Manager to achieve the specified compaction.
110
During rolling, the top of the layer being rolled shall be checked for levels and any
irregularities in these regards corrected by scarifying the material in the affected area and
by removing or adding materials and continuing with the rolling until the entire area
being rolled has been brought to a state of uniform and desired compaction.
102.5 Mixing and Control of Moisture Content before Compaction
Before compaction is commenced, each layer of un-compacted material shall be brought
to a state of uniform composition, texture and moisture content by thorough mixing and
addition of water or drying as required. The Contractor shall be deemed to have taken
account of the fact that the materials encountered may vary widely with respect to their
in-situ moisture contents and the moisture contents at which the materials are to be
compacted is to be specified separately for each type of material. Accordingly, the
materials may have to be wetted by adding water or dried to the required degree, along
with intimate mixing of the entire mass of the materials.
102.6 Compaction Equipment
Mechanical equipment shall be used for compacting materials by rolling, tamping and
watering the materials (if needed) before compaction. For other operations such as
spreading, mixing and shaping, mechanical equipment only or a combination of
mechanical equipment and manually operated tools and equipment shall be used. The
choice of equipment and the procedure of their use shall be subject to the approval of the
Project Manager, upon his being satisfied about their effectiveness on the basis of trial
compactions.
It shall be understood by the Contractor that different type of materials are likely to
require different kinds of compaction equipment, including successive applications
thereof, to achieve the specified degrees of compaction and the Contractor shall keep
available a fleet of compaction equipment of the requisite kinds, sizes and numbers.
For compacting along narrow strips, for example in structure backfilling such as behind
gabion wall, appropriate sized purpose made compacting equipment will be required and
the same shall be provided by the Contractor.
All equipment shall be of modern construction, by established manufacturers, of proven
efficiency, and shall be operated and maintained at all times by skilled personnel in a
manner acceptable to the Project Manager.
102.7 Measurement and Payment
No separate payment shall be made for compliance of items under this section. Payments
shall be deemed to be included in the contractor's rates and prices.
111
103 CONTROL OF MATERIALS
103.1 Source of Supply and Quality Requirements
The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of all materials required to construct
the Works. All materials salvaged or removed from the Works remain the property of the
Employer, and the Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of replacement in the event
of their unauthorized use or removal.
Quarry and borrow pit (if required) areas identified by the Employer as being likely to
provide material shall be inspected and tested by the Contractor and it is the Contractor's
responsibility to satisfy him as to the quality and quantity of suitable material to be
gained from the identified sites. The Contractor is deemed to have checked carefully the
availability of suitable material in sufficient quantities in preparing his bid and to have
satisfied himself fully of the characteristics of the materials and the suitability of his
equipment and methods of working on which he has based his rates and prices.
No claims relating to the quantity or quality of material at identified quarry or borrow
areas shall be considered by the Employer.
The Contractor shall be responsible in obtaining at his own cost all permissions and
licenses for openings up and operating all quarry and borrow areas and shall organize his
method of operations so that only materials of a type and quality approved by the Project
Manager shall be selected for use in the Works.
The Contractor is at liberty to select and use material from his own sources provided that
the requirements of this section are fully met.
103.2 Storage of Materials
Materials shall be so stored as to ensure the preservation of their quality and fitness for
the work. Stored materials shall be located so as to facilitate their prompt inspection.
Approved portions of the right-of-way may be used for storage purposes. All storage
sites from which the stored materials have been removed shall be restored to their
original condition by the Contractor at his expense.
In case of materials, which need stockpiling for storage and measurements, these shall be
stockpiled on level areas and to standard shapes so as to facilitate easy measurements and
computations of volumes.
103.3 Handling of Materials
All materials shall be handled in such a manner as to preserve their quality and fitness for
the work.
112
103.4 Approval of Sources of Materials
The sources of the materials shall be selected by the Contractor but approved by the
Project Manager before the materials are used on the Site. For this purpose, the
Contractor shall furnish all relevant test data for representative samples from each source
area as desired by the Project Manager and also afford opportunities for the Project
Manager to visit the sources areas.
Notwithstanding approval of sources of materials, materials brought to Site for use in the
Works shall be subject to acceptance or rejection by the Project Manager based on
quality control tests to be performed before use in construction.
The Contractor shall submit mill sheets, test reports or manufacturer's certificates on each
material for the Project Manager’s approval at least 21 (twenty one) days before the
commencement of works or procurement of materials whichever occurs earlier. The
Contractor shall not commence the work or purchase the material without the Project
Manager’s approval. In case the Contractor failed to submit appropriate documents
satisfactory to the Project Manager and necessary for the approval by the Project
Manager by the aforesaid period, the Project Manager’s approval will be issued 21 days
after receiving satisfactory documents from the Contractor and the consequences of the
delay incurred from such situation shall be borne by the Contractor.
103.5 Stockpiling of Materials
Unless otherwise permitted by the Project Manager, natural gravels brought from borrow
pits shall not be loaded directly from the borrow area for use in the Works but shall first
be stockpiled. Such stockpiles shall be tested and approved by the Project Manager
before the material comprising them may be used in the Works.
All materials brought to Site shall be stockpiled and stored carefully at approved
locations and in a systematic manner so as to prevent deterioration or mixing of different
materials or contamination. Materials which have suffered contamination or deterioration
due to improper storage shall not be used in Works and shall be removed from the
stockpiling area.
The materials shall be free from foreign, organic or any other deleterious substances such
as vegetation and perishable matters, or any other substance which in the opinion of the
Project Manager may affect placing, mixing and compaction of the material or adversely
affect the future performance of the Works. Material may be tested in stockpiles by the
Project Manager to check suitability for use in the Works.
Stockpiling of material is not permitted in landslide body, head or any area that is
decided by the Project Manager or Employer as at a risk of activating landslide or slope
failure.
113
103.6 Temporary Stockpiling of Materials
Where the work program is such that materials cannot be placed directly in their required
position, or where mixing of two or more materials is required to meet the requirements
of the Specification for a material, the Project Manager may authorize their removal into
temporary stockpiles. Stockpile sites shall be to the Project Manager's approval and shall
be prepared by clearing and grading followed by compaction.
The material shall be stockpiled in successive layers of approved thickness over the full
stockpile area to the approximate dimensions required by the Project Manager and shall
subsequently be reloaded and placed.
103.7 Payment
No separate payment shall be made for items under this section. Payment shall be
deemed to be included in the Contractor's rates and prices.
104 GENERAL RULES FOR MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
All measurements shall be recorded in the metric system unless otherwise specified.
Different items of work shall be measured in accordance with the procedures laid down
in the relevant sections of Specifications read in conjunction with the relevant
stipulations in the Contract. In respect of lump sum contracts, however, the procedure
specified in the contract shall be adopted.
All measurements, unless otherwise specified, shall be recorded and computed nearest to
the following units.
(i) Length and breadth ……. 10 mm
(ii) Areas …….. 0.01 sq.m.
(iii) Cubic contents …….. 0.01 cu.m.
(iv) Height, depth or thickness of structural members ……. 5 mm
(v) Height, depth or thickness of earthwork measured by tape ……. 10 mm
(vi) Height, depth or thickness of earthwork measured with level and staff ……5 mm
In case of any difference between the above units and those specified under the relevant
items of Specifications the latter shall prevail.
The measurement of materials stock piled shall be recorded for arriving at the cubic
volume contents by measuring the length, width and height of piles. The quantity shall be
calculated in Cubic meter (m3) corrected to two places of decimals.Unless stated to the
contrary, any thickness, area or volume in any items of the Works shall be measured only
on finished work after compaction.
114
The payments for the various items shown in the Bill of Quantities shall constitute full
compensation for performing all of the requirements of the Contract for the item of work
as specified including furnishing all necessary materials, labour, tools, equipment,
supplies, testing, and incidentals.
104.1 Lead of Materials
Lead or transport distance where applicable shall be measured over the shortest
practicable route and not necessarily the actual route taken for transport. The decision of
the Project Manager shall be final in this regard.
(i) Carriage by manual labour shall be measured in units of 30 m.
(ii) Carriage by animal/mechanical transport shall be reckoned in unit of 1.00 km. Distance
of 0.50 km. or more shall be taken as 1.00 km. and distance of less than 0.50 km. shall
be ignored. However, when the total lead is less than 0.50 km., it will not be ignored
but paid for separately in stages of 30.0 m subject to the condition that the rate worked
on this basis does not exceed the rate for 1.00 km by mechanical transport.
(iii) The measurements of materials stockpiled and measured as specified at Section 104
above shall be the basis of payment for arriving at the transport charges, in respect of
materials transported unless otherwise specified.
(iv) The rate for transport is inclusive of all operations including loading, transport,
unloading and piling.
Haulage
No haulage on materials shall be measured or paid. The cost of haulage is deemed to be
included in tendered rates for supply of materials in accordance with Condition of
Contract.
104.2 Measurement for Area and Volume Based Payment
(a) Area Basis
When measurement of Clearing, Grubbing, Removing the objectionable material in
designated areas is stipulated to be made on an area basis, the thickness of the layer shall
be checked at regular intervals by level and staff or by other approved means, as directed
by the Project Manager.
Dimensions used to determine area shall be measured on a plan area basis.
(b) Volume Basis
The finished thickness of slope cutting or trimming to be paid on a volume basis shall be
computed in the following manner, unless otherwise specified.
115
Initials levels shall be recorded before the commencement of the work at a grid of points
normally not exceeding 5.00 m, centre to centre, longitudinally and at the profile
changing points not exceeding 2.00 m transversely. Transverse levels however, shall
include full width of the cross-section according to design. Final levels shall be similarly
recorded at the same grid points after completion of each item of work listed separately
for payment. The average thickness of the removal in any area shall be the mean of the
difference of initial and final levels in that area but limited to the thickness stipulated in
the relevant drawings, designs and Specifications.
104.3 Scope of Rates for Different Items of Works
In the absence of directions or stipulations to the contrary, the rates are to be considered
as full compensation for all the operations, and the rates are to be considered as the full
inclusive rates for finished work covering all labour, materials, wastage, temporary
works, overhead charges and the obligations and risks arising out of the Condition of
Contract.
104.4 Facilities for Verification of Measurements
The Contractor shall provide all the necessary facilities for checking and verification of
the measurements at all stages of work, to the officers of the Project Manager or
Employers organization.
104.5 Selection of Pay Items
Selection of pay items given under each section will depend on the method of
measurement adopted on the Contract.
104.6 Sub Divisions within Pay Items
Where sub divisions within pay items become necessary, due to variations of type of
material, thickness of layer, etc., letter suffixes in alphabetical order shall be used in the
BOQ to denote the sub divisions within each such pay item. These letter suffixes shall be
incorporated alongside the number given within the bracketed portion of the pay item
number.
105 SIEVE DESIGNATIONS
The sieve size that the generally used in this Specification for grading of soils and
aggregates are as stipulated in column 1 of Table 105–1, which also conforms to BS. It
should be noted that sieves given therein are the metric equivalents for the original sieves
in imperial units given in column 2 of Table 105–1, which conforms, to ASTM E11.
116
Table 105 – 1 Sieves used in these Specifications
Sieve Sizes used in these
Specifications (BS metric
sieves)
Corresponding Original
sieves in imperial units
Confirming to ASTM
mm μm in
ch Sieve number
(1) (2)
75 3
63 2
½
50 2
37.5 1
½
28 1
20 ¾
14 ½
10 3/
8
6.3 ¼
5 4
2.36 8
1.18 16
600 30
300 50
150 100
75 200
Even though some of the above sieves are not in the standard ISO series they are selected
for the purpose of these Specifications due to their common usage in Sri Lanka.
106 FACILITIES FOR THE CONTRACTOR AND GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
106.1 Performance Security
The Contractor shall provide a Performance Security for proper performance of the
Work, in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract.
117
a. Measurement
Performance Security shall be measured as a Lump Sum item for the cost of providing
the required Performance Security.
b. Payment
Payment shall be made as a Lump Sum and shall be payable when the Contractor has
provided satisfactory Performance Security, supported with proof of Premium payment.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
106.1(1)
Allow for Cost of Providing Performance Security LumpSum
106.2 Insurances
The Contractor shall provide all insurances for the performance of the Work, including at
least, those required under the General Conditions of Contract except where specifically
allowed for under other items.
The Contractor shall take all necessary measures such as photographic and other records
of the third party properties adjacent to the work which, in his opinion, may be affected
during construction activities.
Insurance policies shall be maintained and valid through the period of performance of the
Contract and shall be extended when and as necessary.
a. Measurement
Insurance shall be measured as a Lump Sum item for the cost of providing all the
insurances required during the period of performance of the Contract.
b. Payment
Payment shall be made as a Lump Sum and shall be payable when the Contractor has
provided all acceptable and satisfactory insurances valid for the Contract period.
Payment shall be made on submission of the original Insurances, policies supported with
confirmation of reinsurance if any and proof of payment of premium.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
106.2(1)
Allow for Cost of Providing Insurances Lump Sum
118
106.3 Advanced Payment Guarantee
The Contractor shall provide an Advanced Payment Guarantee for the purpose of the
Work issuing an interest free advanced payment, in accordance with the General
Conditions of Contract.
b. Measurement
Advanced payment guarantee shall be measured as a lump Sum item for the cost of
providing the required Bank Security.
b. Payment
Payment shall be made as a lump Sum and shall be payable when the Contractor has
provided satisfactory Advanced Payment Guarantee, supported with proof of Premium
payment.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
106.3(1)
Allow for Cost of Providing Advanced Payment
Guarantee Lump Sum
106.4 Mobilization, Maintenance and De-mobilization of Contractor's Facilities
and Plant/Equipment
Description
The Contractor shall be responsible for leasing or renting any extra land or building for
the purpose of establishing his site offices and establishment of housing, stores, testing
laboratory, temporary yards, equipment, plant and workshops and for all temporary
works and for the reinstatement of such land or buildings on completion of the Contract,
to the satisfaction of the Project Manager and the owners of such lands / equipment.
The Contractor shall obtain the prior approval of the Project Manager for the plans and
siting of his office and site establishment and for the leasing of any additional land before
such land is leased. He shall indemnify the Employer against all claims and charges in
respect of the occupation, use and reinstatement of leased land.
The Contractor’s site establishment shall include all his offices, housing, stores, testing
laboratory, plant, equipment, workshops etc. but not limited to these
119
Furnish all resources (incl. equipment) required to complete the specified work
Establish offices, testing laboratory as required under, housing, workshops and stores
for the Contractor
Provide laboratory equipment
Install electrical power supply with sufficient capacity and a standby generator of
similar capacity for use exclusively as a backup unit for this purpose
Install water supply
Provide access roads
Charges not otherwise itemised
1) The Contractor shall provide and maintain the offices, testing laboratory including
their contents, access roads and hard standing as required by him in order that he may
carry out his obligations under the Contract.
2) On completion of the Project, the following shall become property of the Contractor
- All the furniture in the offices, laboratory, housing, workshops, stores and the
standby generator of the Contractor.
- Testing equipment of the laboratory.
Mobile Phones for the Contractor
The Contractor shall have adequate numbers of mobile phones (e.g. group package
system) for their own use and to communicate with the Project Manager and the
Employer within 1 month of the date for commencement of the Works.
The system shall have an operating range which ensures reception throughout the site.
The Contractor shall maintain their mobile phones. If they are non-operative for any
reason, they shall either be repaired or replaced within 24 hours.
The Contractor shall pay the cost of the hardware and the communication charges, no
separate payment will be made (mobile phones for the Project Manager will be
included in the Project Manager’s contract).
Upon completion of the Contract, all mobile phones used by the Contractor shall
remain as the property of the Contractor.
a. Measurement
Site establishment of the contractor including his site office and reinstatement of land
shall be measured as a lump sum item as indicated in the Bill of Quantities. Payment
shall be made as following order;
1. 35% upon provision or erection of contractor’s site establishment including office,
testing, laboratory, housing, workshops, access roads, stores and equipment, etc., with all
finishes and fittings.
2. 20% upon furnishing laboratory with equipment and furniture.
3. 45% upon establishment of plant and equipment which is required for the work. For the
120
purpose of payment certification the Contractor shall provide his schedule of plant and
machineries to be mobilized.
Maintenance of site establishment of the Contractor shall be measured as the number of
months during which maintenance work is carried out.
b. Payment
Payment for the Contractor’s site establishment under 106.4 above shall include for:
Payment for leasing of any land required for his offices, laboratory, hard standing and
access roads and temporary buildings and reinstatement of such land.
Provision and erection of the buildings, including any necessary foundations,
refurbishment, improvements and equipping.
Provision of access roads, hard standing, fences and gates.
The connection of telephones, electrical, sewerage and water supply, including all
costs associated with their provision and use.
All furniture, stationery and equipment necessary for the proper execution of the
work.
Payment for removal of the offices of the Contractor shall include (if applicable),
The removal of the buildings including its foundations.
The removal of access roads, hard standing, fences and gates.
The disconnection of telephones, electrical, sewerage and water supply including all
costs associated with their use.
The reinstatement to the satisfaction of the Project Manager of the land used for the
office, laboratory, hard standing and access road.
Maintenance of the office of the Contractor shall include for labour, materials and
equipment necessary to ensure that they are maintained regularly and properly cleaned.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
106.4(1)
Mobilization of Contractor's Facilities and
Plant/Equipment Lump Sum
106.4(2) De-mobilization of Contractor's Facilities and
Plant/Equipment Lump Sum
106.4(3) Maintenance of Site Establishment for the Contractor Month
121
106.5 Progress Reports
Monthly progress report shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Project Manager and
the Employer.
A minimum of thirty-six (4 sets) photographs shall be taken by the Contractor each
month to record the progress of the Works. Photographs shall be 200 mm x 150 mm, in
colour, and shall be marked with date of exposure, and location. Where conventional
photography is used, the negatives shall be supplied to the Project Manager. High
resolution digital photographs (minimum 10 Mb pixel format) will be acceptable, in
which case a digital copy (CDR/W disc or equal) shall be supplied in lieu of negatives.
a. Measurement
Progress report and photographs shall be measured by the number of months or part
thereof.
b. Payment
The rate shall include for:
Taking the photographs;
Preparation of progress report;
Development of the film and prints;
Annotating and binding;
Delivery of the specified number of prints to the Project Manager /Employer;
Delivery of electronic copies of the progress report to the Project Manager by means
of CDR/W discs or otherwise;
Delivery of negatives or, in the case of digital photography, submitting or transferring
electronic copies of the prints to the Project Manager by means of CDR/W discs or
otherwise.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
106.5(1)
Progress Reports Month
106.6 Project Name Boards/ Inauguration Plaque
The Name Boards shall be erected to the following requirements;
122
Face plate size not less than 2.5 m by 2.0 m containing color messages and logos to
include project name, name of the Employer, name of the Contractor, name of the Project
Manager, name of the funding agency and anticipated completion date in all three
languages (Sinhala, Tamil and English). The board shall be erected on double post
supports with concrete foundations. The board shall be made of galvanized steel of gauge
18.The board shall be erected with the bottom of the board at a minimum of 2.3 m above
the adjacent ground and clear of motor traffic.
The Project Inauguration Plaque shall be made of granite and the text will be decided by
the Project Manager/Employer.
The Project Manager shall issue to the Contractor the text, letter sizes, and details. The
Contractor shall remove all name boards on completion of the Contract Period.
a. Measurement
Project name boards shall be measured as the number of boards/plaque satisfactorily
provided, installed, maintained throughout the Contract period and removed after
completion of works.
b. Payment
Payment shall be made at the stated unit rate per signboard/plaque. The price shall be full
compensation for all materials and labour required to perform the work described.
Project Inauguration Plaque and related services shall be measured as a provisional sum
and payment to the Contractor for such services shall not exceed the Provisional Sum
indicated for this purpose. The Contractor will be entitled to additional 15% overhead
and profit on the top of the premium in this regard.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
106.6(1)
Provide and Maintain project Name Boards Number
106.6(2) Project Inauguration Plaque and related services Provisional Sum
123
107 WORKMANSHIP AND QUALITY CONTROL
107.1 General
The Contractor is responsible for producing work which conforms in quality and
accuracy of detail to the requirements of the Contract (see relevant clauses of General
Conditions of Contract) and the Contractor shall, at his own expense, institute a quality
control system and provide experienced Engineers, technical officers, surveyors,
materials technicians, other technicians and other technical staff, together with all
transport, instruments and equipment, to ensure adequate supervision and quality control
of the Works at all times.
The cost of all supervision and quality control, including testing, carried out by the
Contractor shall be deemed to be included in the rates and prices tendered for the related
items of work, except where otherwise specifically provided for in the Contract.
The Contractor's attention is drawn to the provisions of the various sections of the
Specification regarding the minimum frequency of testing that will be required for
quality control. The Contractor shall, at his own initiative, increase this frequency where
necessary to ensure adequate control.
The Project Manager shall have the authority to increase the frequency of testing to
check the degree of compliance of works with the Specifications.
On completion of every part of the Works and submission to the Project Manager for
examination, the Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the results of all relevant
tests and survey checks that he has carried out indicating compliance with the
Specification.
For cement, tor steel bars, mild steel bars, high tensile reinforce net, coir net and such
materials, the Contractor shall furnish to the Project Manager the manufacturer's test
certificates of the actual material to be incorporated in the Works. When required by the
Project Manager to carry out essential testing at a manufacturer's plants or at laboratories
other than the Site laboratory, all costs involved shall be borne by the Contractor.
The methods of sampling and testing of materials shall be required under relevant clauses
stipulated in these Specification or as approved by the Project Manager.
The Contractor shall be required to demonstrate the adequacy of the equipment for each
operation to establish its/their capacity to achieve the requirements to the Specification to
the satisfaction of the Project Manager before commencement of the Work.
All equipment provided shall be of proven efficiency and purpose made for the required
operation and shall be operated by skilled operators and maintained at all times to
perform its proper function in a safe and efficient manner acceptable to the Project
Manager.
124
107.2 Measurement and Payment
No separate payment shall be made for items under this section. Payment shall be
deemed to be included in Sub-section 106.4.
108 STANDARDS
108.1 General
In the absence of any definite provisions in the Specifications on any particular issue
reference shall be made to the latest Codes of SLS, BS, ASTM, or AASHTO in this order
of sequence. Where these are unhelpful, the execution and completion of the Works and
relevant tests shall conform to sound engineering practice and, in case of any dispute
arising out of the interpretation of the above, the decision of the Project Manager shall be
final and binding on the Contractor.
Where BS tests are stipulated in the Specifications, the equivalent ASTM or AASHTO
test method may be substituted as directed by the Project Manager. All codes of practice,
standards and specifications applicable shall be the latest edition with all corrections and
incorporations as at 30 days before the closing date for bid submission.
108.2 Supply of Codes of Practice, Standards and Materials References
These shall be the latest editions or as stated below or as decided by the Project Manager.
The documents provided by the Contractor shall be original publications and not
Photostat copies. These shall be the latest edition with all corrections and incorporations
as at 30days before the closing date for bid submission. The publications shall become
the property of the Project Manager upon completion of the Contract. The type of
publications requested may include:
SLS - Sri Lanka Standards
BS - British Standards
AASHTO Publications- American Association of State Highway &
Transportation Officials
ASTM Publications - American Society for Testing and Materials
FIDIC Documents - Federation International Des Ingenieurs - Conseils
HMSO Publications - Her Majesty’s Stationery Office, United Kingdom
ICTAD Publications - Institute for Construction Training and Development
TRL Publications - Transportation Research Laboratory, United Kingdom
CIRIA Publication - Construction Industry Research and Information
Association
125
108.3 Measurement and Payment
Payment will be made for this item as a Provisional Sum. The Contractor shall verify
with the Project Manager the individual items required and obtain approval from the
Project Manager prior to purchase. The Contractor will be entitled to additional 5%
overhead and profit on the top of the premium in this regard.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
108(1) Allow for provision of standards / technical literatures
as required by the Project Manager Provisional Sum
109 WORK EXECUTED BY THE EMPLOYER OR OTHER
CONTRACTORS
The Employer reserves the right to execute on Site work not included in the Contract and
to employ for this purpose either his own employees or other contractors.
The Contractor shall ensure that neither his own operations nor the actions of his
employees shall interfere with the operations of the Employer or his contractors on such
works, and the same obligations shall be imposed on the Employer or contractors in
respect of work being executed under the Contract.
The Contractor shall provide unhindered access to all parts of the Site to the Employer
and authorized representatives of the Employer and of public bodies and corporations
and to contractors employed by the Employer and he shall make available to such
authorized persons the use of all temporary access tracks in or about the Site.
110 SERVICES
In the execution of Works by the Contractor, if any services, public or private may be
damaged shall be undertaken by the appropriate Authority or by the Contractor under the
supervision of the appropriate Authority, for reinstatement or repair.
110.1 Existing Services
The Contractor may be ordered to carry out certain works for and on behalf of various
statutory service authorities and he shall also provide, with the prior approval of the
Project Manager, such assistance to the various bodies as, may be authorized by the
Project Manager.
No removal of or alterations to any public utility shall be carried out unless ordered by
the Project Manager after authorization by the appropriate Authority.
126
The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to protect, and shall provide
temporary support to, existing services during construction and during reinstatement or
repair of damaged services.
Whenever services are encountered that interferes with the execution of the works and
requires moving or relocation, the Contractor shall advise the Project Manager who will
determine the extent of the work involved.
Any pipe, cable, conduit or other known service of any nature whatsoever, which has
been damaged as a result of the Contractor's operations shall be repaired and reinstated
forthwith by the Contractor or by the authority concerned, at all the expense of the
Contractor or the authority and to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
The Employer will not be held liable or responsible for any delay in completion of the
Works under this Contract which may occur due to any damage occurring to such
services in consequence of the Contractor's operations.
110.2 Measurement and Payment
a. Measurement
The work of temporary supporting and protecting public utility services during execution
of the Works shall be paid under a Provisional Sum.
The amount of work involved in reinstatement or repair to damages of existing services
shall be determined on Site and as instructed by the Project Manager.
b. Payment
Payment for repair to damages of existing services shall be made under a Provisional
sum. The Contractor will be entitled to additional 5% overhead and profit on the top of
the premium in this regard.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
110(1) Temporary supporting and protecting public utility
services during execution of works Provisional Sum
111 MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING ROADS
111.1 General Obligations
The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to minimize nuisance during the
construction of the works.
127
All existing highway and roads used by vehicles of the Contractor or any of his sub-
contractors or suppliers of materials or plant, and similarly any new roads which are part
of the Works and which are being used by traffic, shall be kept clean and clear of all dust
/mud /extraneous materials dropped by the said vehicles or their tyres. Similarly, all dust
/mud/extraneous materials from the Works spreading on these highways shall be
immediately cleared by the Contractor.
Clearance shall be affected immediately by manual sweeping and removal of debris, or,
if directed by the Project Manager, by mechanical sweeping and clearing equipment, and
all dust, mud and other debris shall be removed entirely from the road surface.
Additionally, if so directed by the Project Manager, the road surface shall be hosed or
watered using suitable equipment. The road surface shall be maintained in a better or
similar condition at all times.
Any structural damage caused to the existing roads by the Contractor’s constructional
plant or equipment shall be made good at Contractor’s expense.
a. Measurement and Payment
All these activities shall be deemed to be included in the Contractor’s rates and prices
and no separate payment will be made thereof.
112 PROTECTION OF THE WORKS AND REQUIREMENTS TO BE MET
BEFORE THE COMMENCEMENT OF CONSTRUCTION OF NEW WORKS
ON ALREADY COMPLETED WORKS
(i) The provision of temporary drainage works such as drains, open channels, bank, etc.,
and the furnishing and operation of temporary pumps and such other equipment as may
be necessary to adequately drain, protect and dewater the Works and Temporary
Works. This will be in addition to any permanent drainage works specified and
installed, and in addition to any temporary drainage works specifically paid for
separately.
(ii) Fill and cut slopes shall be promptly repaired whenever damaged by surface water.
(iii) The Contractor shall inform the Project Manager of damage or defects to any work
before repair or maintenance and the Project Manager shall instruct the extent and
method of repair.
b. Measurement andPayment
Work performed as part of the above obligations shall not be measured and paid for
separately and the cost thereof is deemed to be included in the Contractor’s rates and
prices.
128
113 REMEDIAL WORK
When any part of the Works fails to conform to the Specification, or is at any stage
before final acceptance damaged so that it no longer conforms to the Specification, the
Project Manager shall instruct its complete removal and replacement with satisfactory
work. In special cases the Project Manager may instruct the Contractor to apply remedial
measures in order to make good any such defects or damage. The remedial measures
taken shall be subject to the Project Manager’s approval regarding the details thereof.
In particular, remedial measures shall ensure that the final product is in full compliance
with the Specification shall not endanger or damage any other part of the Works, and
shall be carefully controlled and submitted to the Project Manager for examination when
completed, or at any inter mediate stage as may be required.
For the guidance of the Contractor an indication of what may be required in the more
common cases of defects or damage is given below, but the Project Manager will in no
way be bound to approve of or adhere to the measures indicated, as the actual remedial
measures will be dictated by the circumstances of each particular case.
113.1 Earthworks
Where a cut slope has been over-excavated, reinstatement by backfilling will not
normally be permitted and the entire slope may need to be re-trimmed to obtain a
uniform slope.
Where erosion has occurred on the surface of cuts or fills, the damage shall be made
good by back filling with suitable material and re-trimming. In more serious cases the
slope may have to be cutback and backfilled after benching, and compacted to the
required standard of compaction with suitable small equipment, followed by re-trimming.
113.2 Concrete
Defective concrete work will normally need the cutting back and complete removal of
any weak or honeycombed sections and making good using approved bonding agents to
bind fresh concrete to old concrete. Cracks, if permitted to remain, shall be injected with
approved compounds and test cores taken to confirm the efficacy of the injection process.
113.3 Measurement and Payment
Work performed as part of the above obligations shall not be measured and paid for
separately and the cost thereof is deemed to be included in the Contractor’s rates and
prices.
129
114 WATER SUPPLY ARRANGEMENTS
The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the procurement, transportation,
storage, distribution and application of water needed for construction and other purposes
except where otherwise specified.
Only clean water free from undesirable concentrations of deleterious salts and other
materials shall be used. All sources of water used shall be approved by the Project
Manager.
Mechanically driven and operated water bowsers with effective spray equipment shall be
provided at all times to ensure that compaction can proceed without any hold up on
account of watering.
114.1 Measurement and Payment
No direct measurement or payment shall be made for providing water and the cost
thereof shall be included in the rates tendered for the various items of work for which
water is needed.
115 SEETING OUT, SURVEY AND DRAWINGS
115.1 General
The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the requirements of the General Conditions of
Contract regarding setting out.
The Contractor shall check the condition of all permanent Ground Markers and shall
satisfy himself they have not been damaged or disturbed and are true in regard to position
and level. Where markers have been destroyed, damaged or displaced the Contractor
shall reinstate a new marker based on the markers which remain. A new marker shall not
be used unless it’s true position and level has been established and the new values
verified by the Project Manager.
Where a marker is likely to be disturbed during construction operations the Contractor
shall establish suitable reference markers at locations where they will not be disturbed
during construction. No marker shall be covered, disturbed or destroyed before accurate
reference markers have been established and the details of the position and levels of such
markers have been submitted to the Project Manager and approved by him. The
Contractor’s reference markers shall be of least the same quality and durability as that of
the existing markers.
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager the method of setting out he proposes
to employ. To ensure beyond doubt that the complex elements of the road or structure are
truly and correctly located and the Contractor shall check all setting out by a different
130
approved method. The Project Manager may at any time request the Contractor to submit
proof that his setting out has been satisfactorily checked.
The Contractor shall make all provisions necessary for the Project Manager to check and
measure the setting out of the Works and shall be in attendance to agree measurements
and levels before construction works commence.
115.2 Setting Out and Surveying
The Contractor shall set out the center line and establish location reference points which
are to be marked out on site and recorded. Level Bench Markers at locations of structures
requiring modification shall be established and checked regularly and tied into the
Permanent Ground Markers.
The Contractor will be provided with a set of cross sections at 5.00 m intervals. The cross
sections will be provided on computer disk in AutoCAD2013 version or latest version
Format on a zip disk. The Contractor shall provide for the use of an AutoCAD
technician/computer operator and a suitable computer and printer to enable the cross
sections to be printed. The cross sections will show the existing ground levels and the
finished design levels based on the design. The Contractor shall superimpose on these
cross sections, plotted out to an appropriate scale approved by the Project Manager.
The Project Manager takes no responsibility for the accuracy of the computer disc
information provide to the Contractor. The Contractor shall survey the original ground
levels which will be jointly checked by the Contractor’s and Engineer’s Surveyors prior
to the Project Manager’s approval and commencement of any construction work. The
cross section once checked and approved by the Project Manager shall be the basis for
measurement and payment.
The Contractor shall complete the setting out work within two weeks following the date
of the Project Manager’s Notice to Commence the Works. Sufficient survey and drafting
staff be available to enable the full setting out of the Works and for the drawing up of
cross sections to be complete such that no delay is caused to the setting out of the Works.
The Contractor shall employ on the Works sufficient qualified surveyors with at least 2
years’ experience in similar works and have a thorough knowledge and experience of
computer methods for calculating quantities. The surveyors shall have available
sufficient modern survey equipment and instruments which shall be to the Project
Manager’s approval. The Contractor shall assist and supply services of his surveyor and
his team to the Project Manager whenever required by the Project Manager or his
Representatives in checking and measuring the Works.
No construction work shall commence on any section until the cross sections for the
whole of that section have been checked by the Contractor and checked and approved by
the Project Manager.
131
115.3 Measurement
The quantity to be measured for cross-sections are detailed on drawings and approved by
the Project Manager. No separate measurement for construction ground markers shall be
made.
115.4 Payment
The prices shall be full compensation for all labour, materials, equipment and incidentals
required to furnish the required Setting out work, working drawings and cross sections as
indicated.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
115(1) Setting out work, working drawings and cross sections Lump Sum
116 FACILITIES AND STAFF FOR THE PROJECT MANAGER AND HIS
STAFF AND EMPLOYER
116.1 General
The following facilities and services for the Project Manager /Employer shall be
provided by the Contractor:-
Housing for the Project Manager and Employer with equipment and furniture
Site Office(s) with equipment and furniture including telecommunications equipment
Supply and keep refurnished at all times all consumable items such as tea, coffee,
milk, sugar, insecticides, first aid supply, potable water and so forth
Vehicles (including drivers)
Removal of facilities and equipment upon completion
All necessary Personal Protective Equipment as required
Staff
All matters in respect of facilities or services shall be subject to the Project Manager’s
formal approval. The Contractor shall submit details of all proposals prior to placing
order or making any arrangements. All facilities and services shall be for the exclusive
use of the Employer, Engineer and their staff during the period of the Contract and as
further required to finalize measurement, payment etc. The Contractor shall provide the
Office facilities and services as soon as is practical and not later than 30 days after the
date of receipt of Letter of Acceptance. During the period prior to completion of
construction or provision of the regular office accommodation the Contractor shall
132
provide fully functional office accommodation at a suitable location mutually agreed
with the Project Manager. Refer Appendix A for more details.
The Contractor shall provide the Employer/Engineer with staff to assist in the
administration and supervision of the works. The staff provided shall be experienced and
be capable of performing their allotted duties. The staff shall be nominated by the
Employer and appointed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall ensure the continuity of
the services of the selected personnel.
In particular, site supervisor shall be capable of supervising similar works with
NCT(Civil) qualification or equivalent with at least two years experience in similar
works. Clerk shall be experience in using computers/word processors and be capable of
using the latest version of Microsoft Office computer software and have a good
command of the English Language.
The contractor shall pay EPF, ETF, etc in relation to their employment.
c. Measurement
Maintenance of each facility shall be measured as the number of months during which
the maintenance for each facility is satisfactorily provided. Maintenance shall not be
measured during any period occurring between the expiration of the contract period
(including awarded Extension of Time – EOT) and the date the works are certified as
complete. Measurement will be made for maintenance performed after the completion of
the works, during the time the facilities are required by the Employer and Engineer’s
staff for post-construction contract completion activities.
Providing of equipment and furniture for the offices and accommodations of Employers
and Engineers shall be made under the provisional sum.
The providing of staff shall be measured under monthly basis.
d. Payment
Payment for maintenance for each facility shall include all labour, materials and
equipment required for satisfactory maintenance of the facilities and shall include all
other costs including but not limited to supply of electricity, water and telephone
facilities, cleaning, guarding, disposal of rubbish, repairing equipment and all other work
required to ensure the facilities and equipment provided are in good operational order.
Payment for staff shall be made from the monthly rates. The monthly unit rates payable
to the Contractor shall include EPF,ETF, etc payable by the Contractor in relation to their
employment plus 5 % overheads and profits.
.
133
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
116(1) Provide and maintenance of office and other facilities
for the Project Manager Month
116(2) Provide and maintenance of Accommodation and other
facilities for the Project Manager Month
116(3) Provide furniture and equipment for the Project
Managers office & accommodation Provisional Sum
116(4) Provide and maintenance of office and other facilities
for the Employer Month
116(5) Provide and maintenance of Accommodation and other
facilities for the Employer Month
116(6) Provide and maintain Vehicle for the Project Manager
and the Employer Month
116(7) Provide equipment and furniture for the Employers
office and accommodation Provisional Sum
116(8) Site Supervisor Month
116(9) Clerk Month
116(10) Office Aide Month
The Contractor will be entitled to additional 5 % overhead and profit on top of the actual
cost, on the payments which are made under provisional sum items.
117 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT
117.1 General
During the whole period of project the Contractor shall comply fully with National
Environmental Protection laws and those pertinent to prevent nuisance to public
stipulated by the democratic Socialist Republic of Sri Lanka and the Environmental
Management guidelines of the donor agency. This obligation shall extend to the
construction sites themselves and all of the Contractor’s installations elsewhere within
the national territories.
The project activities during site preparation, construction and post construction should
comply but not limited to the National Environmental Act No. 47 of 1980 and amended
Act No.1562/22 of 2008 with respect to emission of gaseous, liquid and solid waste,
National Environmental Noise Control Regulations No.01 of 1996 for emission of noise,
Interim Standards on Vibration Pollution control for Central Environmental Authority
134
(CEA), Fauna Flora Protection Ordinance (FFPO) and Forest (Amendment) Act No.22
of 2009), Forest Ordinance and Forest (Amendment) Act No.65 of 2009 (FO), Felling of
trees under Act Felling of tree (Control) Act No 09 of 1951, and Soil Conservation Act
No. 24 of 1996 and the excavated material (earth, rubble and aggregates) should be
done under a license of Geological Surveys and Mines Bureau (GSMB) as per the Act
No.33 of 1992 amended by No.66 of 2009.
The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to protect the environment on and off the
Site and to avoid damage or nuisance to persons, private and/or public properties or
others resulting from pollution, noise, vibration or other causes arising as a consequence
of his methods of operation. The Contractor should fully aware with the implementation
of Environmental Management Plan (EMP), and the pollution control facilities should be
installed adequately and appropriately before commencement of the project actions
where there is potential to emit pollutants to the environment.
The Employer/Engineer under any terms is not responsible either fully or partly for
damage caused due to the Contractors’ failure to apply necessary pollution control
measures, environmental protection measurers or measurers to minimize nuisance to
public. The Employer/Engineer will not appear in courts, pay compensation or engage in
public conflict resolution on behalf of the Contractor under such situations if arise.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Project Manager for review and approval,
a site specific “Environmental Management Action Plan (EMAP)” based on the
Environmental Management Plan (EMP) to theEngineer within one month from the
Letter of Acceptance but prior to commencing construction.
The Contractor shall appoint an Environmental Officer, whose duties throughout the
period of the Contract shall be exclusively connected with the Environmental
Management activities at the Site.
Monthly EMAP performance reports should be prepared and submitted, on-site
checklists and log books should be maintained.
The EMP implementation and the costs should be included clearly according to the
format given under “Payment Schedule”.
117.2 Environnemental Management Plan – EMP
The Environmental Management Plan (EMP) outlines the framework for planning,
implementation and monitoring of environment, measures required to ensure that
potential adverse environmental impacts from the project activities are eliminated, offset,
or reduced to an acceptable level. At the same time, it is expected that the plan will help
the project enhance environmental benefits from the project interventions. The EMP is
built based on relevant existing national policies, legislation, regulations and guidelines.
135
(a). All works should be arranged to cause the least possible disturbance to the
environment and local residents/institutions, in particular soil erosion along the
Right-Of-Way (ROW) and adjacent area, to the river/stream banks, irrigation canals
and other water ways. Similarly, cutting of trees, tea shrubs and other vegetation of
economic, religious and ecological value found outside of the ROW, whenever
possible be avoided; else replacement planting in a place selected by the owner of the
affected tree and/or vegetation will be carried-out by the Contractor at his own cost
for the damages caused.
(b). Proposals shall be submitted for:
(1) Storage on Site
i. Materials and equipment on Site shall be stored in a manner so as to prevent damage
to the Site and adjacent areas, and minimize hazards to persons, materials and
equipment and all Temporary and Permanent Works. Storage areas shall be kept
organized, neat and tidy.
ii. Areas assigned for carrying out Permanent Works shall not be used to store materials,
plant and equipment, nor used as access to storage areas without prior approval of the
Project Manager.
iii. Hazardous materials (including fuel and oil) shall be stored and handled only within
an area set-aside specifically for this purpose. This area shall be enclosed from the
remainder of the Site with waterproof concrete flooring and rainproof roof, so as to
contain any spillage, clearly marked and signs installed at a close distance from the
storage area to warn unauthorized workers and visitors to stay away.
iv. The area shall be located away from any natural waterways, drainage lines and open
drains. In case of petroleum fuel and oil, a collection basin is to be installed in the
storage area to gather any spillages, to facilitate the recovery of the petroleum
products for reuse or proper disposal using government licensed recyclers or
otherwise.
(2) Noise and Vibration
i. The Contractor shall abide by the Central Environmental Authority (CEA)
regulations and other applicable laws and regulations related to noise and vibration
levels.
ii. The Contractor shall take all practical precautions to minimize noise resulting from
work under the Contract, especially Sites adjacent to residential and institutional
areas, from polluting such areas and shall fit all equipment with noise suppressors so
that noise levels are minimized. Similarly, as much as practicable, construction
methods that produce minimal vibration be adopted, most especially in sites adjacent
to residential and institutional areas where possible damage to the structures due to
vibration may occur.
136
(3) Disposal of Contaminants
i. Solid, liquid and gaseous contaminants shall be disposed in accordance with relevant
Sri Lanka Environmental laws and contractual requirements.
ii. Non-toxic and/or non-hazardous liquid waste shall be stored in approved containers
for transport and disposal at locations approved by the Project Manager and local
authorities.
iii. Non-toxic and/or hazardous solid wastes shall be disposed of by removal from site,
transport and depositing in approved locations.
iv. Toxic and hazardous wastes must be temporarily stored using suitable containers at a
designated place authorized by the Project Manager and local authorities, and
disposed through a government licensed collection agent or otherwise.
(4) Disposal of Refuse
i. The Contractor shall take adequate measures to ensure the Site and associated areas
are maintained in a clean and orderly condition. Provision shall be made for the daily
removal of rubbish, debris, surplus materials, etc., and for the stacking and storing of
materials in authorized locations.
ii. The excavated materials should be covered and stored safe until removed. The
location of onsite storage should be sufficiently away from stream banks, water ways,
runoff paths etc.
iii. The final disposal site should be approved by the Project Manager before dumping.
The disposed matter should not pollute water bodies
iv. The contractor shall obtain approval from relevant Authority such as Pradeshiya
Sabha, Municipal Council and other government agencies (as required), for disposal
and spoil at the specified location, as directed by the Project Manager. Private land
that will be selected for disposal should also require written consent from the land
owner.
(5) Dust Control
i. Dust screens and/or watering of open and unpaved areas shall be used to control dust
and eliminate public health issues and/or nuisance to adjoining residential and
institutional areas, national highways often travelled by commuters, and natural
habitats frequented by wildlife during the period of the Works.
ii. The on-site piles should be covered secularly to prevent particles to become air bone.
(6) Transport of construction materials and waste
i. Transportation of material should be done covered always using tarpaulin
ii. Precautions should be made to prevent spill of any material on ground during
transportation and minimize damage to ground cover/ vegetation
iii. Should not to be a nuisance to public: Transportation of material should be avoided
during peak hours (e.g. office on off times, school starting and finishing time)
iv. Transportation should be done only in the dedicated hull roads. Use of any other
access roads should be strictly avoided.
137
v. The tyres of the vehicles should be inspected regularly when leaving the sites and
disposal site, should clean mud in tyres before entering the hull road.
(7) Water
i. Water removal
Surplus water shall be promptly removed from the Site by draining off or mechanical
means to keep the Works reasonably dry and so as not to interfere with construction
work. The water removed from the Site is kept reasonably free of soil, oil/petroleum
and other debris, and the discharge shall not adversely affect the adjoining
landowner’s residential and livelihood assets, or to pose as a pollution hazard to
waterways and farmlands
ii. Water quality
The Contractor shall ensure that construction activities do not have a detrimental
impact on the water quality of surface or ground water in the areas adjoining the Site.
Specific measures shall be adopted to prevent the discharge of contaminated runoff
from the Site. When necessary, potable water source of local people such as springs
located immediately down slope of the Site shall be provided with protection (“spring
box”) from contaminants originating from construction works as appropriate.
iii. Contaminated water
The Contractor shall adhere to the CEA recommendation on disposal of wastewater.
Wastewater shall not be discharged to ground or waterways in a manner that will
cause unacceptable surface as ground water pollution.
iv. Siltation
All drains, streams, and waterways shall be kept clear from mud, silt and other
obstructions arising from the execution of work under the Contract. Soil and other
debris removed from the drains, streams and waterways are to be deposited by the
Contractor in suitable areas subject to the approval of the Project Manager and the
concerned local authorities. The Contractor shall ensure that effective construction
practices are employed to minimize siltation to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
v. Alternation of drainage paths
Contractor shall not close or block existing canals and streams permanently. If
diversion or closure user or blocking of canals and streams is required for the
execution of works, Contractor must obtain the Project Managers approval. Contractor
shall restore drainage paths back to its original status once the need for such diversion
or closure or blockage no longer required.
(8) Flora and Fauna
All works shall be carried out in a manner that the destruction to flora and fauna and
their habitat is minimal. Trees and vegetation shall be felled /removed only if that
affect directly on permanent works or necessary temporary works.
138
i. Contractor shall take effort to avoid removal/ destruction of religious, cultural,
aesthetic species.
ii. Contractor shall adhere to the guidelines and recommendations of CEA, if any with
regard to felling of trees and removal of vegetation.
iii. A list of trees to be removed during construction of site to be marked and forwarded to
the Project Manager.
iv. Measures shall be taken to avoid or minimise any adverse impacts on fauna and flora
(either terrestrial/ aquatic) living in natural environments adjacent to the Site during
the construction period.
v. During construction, if a rare/ threatened/ endangered flora and or fauna is found, it
shall be immediately informed to the Project Manager. All activities that could destroy
such flora/fauna and its habitat shall be stopped with immediate effect. Contractor
shall carry out works again only after the Project Manager’s approval.
vi. Hunting and collection of wildlife from within the Site and adjacent area is strictly
prohibited. The Contractor shall ensure that no damage occurs to any trees, tea
shrubs and other vegetation with ecological, spiritual and/or economic value that are to
be retained at the Site; and that none of its workers and subcontractors are engaged in
wildlife hunting or collection.
vi. Contractor shall take measures to avoid introduction of invasive species during
transportation or refuse or spoil.
(9) Soil Erosion
The Contractor shall take measures to minimize the soil erosion that may result from
construction activities using any of the control measures. Control measures include but
not limited to.
i. Install sediment filter, fences, hay bale filters drains, and filter strips, grass outlets,
sediment transport basin traps around culverts, drains, soil stockpiles and all other
areas which may have the potential to erode or be affected by soil erosion.
ii. Install catch drains, slope drains and nearby dissipaters in conjunction with sediment
traps installed to divert storm water around the Site.
iii. Stabilize by grass, materials (excluding pavements and screenings) stockpiled for
periods longer than one month.
iv. Stabilize disturbed areas using measures such as drains and batters.
v. Minimize as much as practicable, when the removal of existing vegetation within and
around the project area at any time.
vi. Plan the execution of work under the Contract in stages to minimize soil erosion
during continuous periods of rainfall that will cause heavy run-off.
vii. Soil erosion control devices shall be regularly inspected and maintained, especially
after heavy and/or continuous periods of rain.
139
(10) Soil Contamination
The Contractor shall undertake all practicable control measures to prevent the
contamination of the soil in and around the site. Control measures include but not
limited to;
i. Acceptance of Clean Fill:
All fill material to be imported and used on the Site shall be free of contamination.
ii. Fuel Chemicals and other Hazardous Materials:
All practicable steps shall be taken to ensure contamination of soil does not occur
through: fueling, maintenance of vehicles or equipment; storage of fuel, chemicals,
and other hazardous materials; and spillage of such materials on to the soil, by
ensuring all the above activities are conducted in bounded or sealed areas.
iii. Clean up of Soil Contamination:
All soils contaminated during construction shall be cleaned up by the Contractor to the
satisfaction of the Project Manager, and at no cost to the Employer.
Any contaminated spoil material (whether or not contaminated by the Contractor)
shall be removed from the Site in an approved manner to prevent further pollution.
iv. Installation of Oil Separators:
Contractor shall install oil separator to prevent fuel, oil and other petroleum products
from spilling into the existing drainage lines and then into the adjacent soil, resulting
in its (soil) contamination.
(11) Borrowing Earth
i. Earth available from construction site excavation works as per design, may be used as
embracement materials, subject to approval by the Project Manager.
ii. Contractor shall comply with environmental requirements/ guidelines issued by CEA
and the respective local authorities with respect to the locating burrow areas and with
regard to all operations related to excavation and transportation of earth from such
sites.
iii. Contractor can also find suitable soil materials from currently operated licensed
borrow pits in the surrounding area, subject to approval of the Project Manager.
iv. Borrow areas shall not be opened without having a valid mining license from the
Geological Survey and Mines Bureau (GSMB) and the Contractor shall pay Royalty
fees to the Government and provide evidence of payment to the Project Manager.
v. All borrow pits/ areas should be rehabilitated at the end of their use by the contractor
in accordance with the requirement/ guidelines issued by the CEA and the respective
Government Authority.
(12) Quarry Operations
i. Utilizing the existing quarry sites available in the project influential area as much as
possible which are approved by GSMB with valid Environmental Protection License
(EPL) and Industrial mining license.
140
ii. If new quarries are to be opened, prior approval should be obtained from GSMB,
NBRO (as applicable), CEA and Local authorities.
iii. Selected quarry sites should have proper safety measures, such as warning, safety nets
etc.
iv. Quarry sites should not be established within protected sites under FFPO and FO.
(13) Maintenance of Vehicles and Machinery
i. All maintenance and servicing should be done outside the site.
ii. Waste clothes, wrappings, waste machine oil, rugs etc. should be collected separately
and disposed outside through proper disposal channels
iii. Operation of concrete mixer
iv. Storage of construction materials cement, sand concrete aggregates and any other
should be done in a dedicated place closer to the concrete mixture yard. Materials
prone to wash off or air borne would be covered with impervious material.
v. Separate places should be kept for cleaning concrete mixes away from storm water
drains. Cleaning should be done with minimum quantity of water and wastewater
generated should be allowed soaked into ground. If extra wastewater is generated, the
drain water should be filtered through check dams and temporary sand mounds before
letting to storm water drains.
(14) Disruption to Public
i. Loss of Access
At all times, the contractor shall provide safe and convenient passage for vehicles,
pedestrians and livestock.
ii. Work that affects the use of existing accesses shall not be undertaken without
providing adequate provisions to the provisions to the prior satisfaction of the Project
Manager.
iii. On completion of the works, all temporary obstructions to access shall be cleared
away, all rubbish and piles that obstruct access be cleared to the satisfaction of the
Project Manager.
(15) Utilities and Roadside Amenities
i. The Contractor shall take care not to damage/destroy or affect the functional purposes
of utilities such as water, electricity, telephone posts. The arrangements the Contractor
made with those service providers shall be informed to the Project Manager.
ii. In case of an unintentional damage cause to a utility, the Contractor shall
immediately inform the service providers and help to restore the service without delay.
(16) Visual Environment Enhancement
i. Landscape plantations, re-vegetation and filling slopes and other slopes, edge
treatment of water bodies shall be carried out.
141
ii. The Contractor shall remove all debris, piles of unwanted earth, spoil material, away
from the roadsides and from other work places and disposed at locations designated to
acceptable to the Project Manager.
iii. On completion of the works, the temporary structures shall be cleared away in full, all
rubbish burnt, waste dumps and septic tank shall be filled and closed and roadsides
work places and labour camps cleared and cleaned.
117.3 Environmental Management Action Plan (EMAP)
The selected Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Project Manager for review and
approval, the Environmental Management Action Plan (EMAP) based on the
Environmental Management Plan (EMP) that shall be implemented during the work
execution, and shall be monitored on a daily basis. The Contractor shall take into account
the regulations and all applicable Local Government by-laws in the preparation of the
EMAP.
The directions on preparing EMAP will be given by the Project Manager for selected
Contractor. The Contractor should submit the EMAP statement to the Project Manager
within 28 days from the Letter of Acceptance but prior to commencing construction.
117.4 The Contractor’s Environmental Officer
Within 28 days before the commencement of the works, the Contractor shall appoint an
Environmental Officer, whose duties throughout the period of the Contract shall be
exclusively connected with the Environmental Management activities on the Site.
The Environmental Officer shall have an acceptable working knowledge of the ruling
language of the Contract as stated in the Conditions of Contract, and shall be a suitably
qualified and experienced person who shall prepare, supervise and monitor
environmental management activities. The person should responsible for community
liaison and to handle public complaints regarding environmental/social related matters.
The appointment and designation of the Environmental Officer shall be subject to the
Project Manager’s approval.
Unless specifically agreed in writing by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall not
undertake any work on the Site, which may affect the environment, until the
Environmental Officer has commenced duties on Site, and the Environmental
Management Action Plan (EMAP) has been approved by the Project Manager.
The Contractor shall not remove the Environmental Officer from the Site without a
written permission of the Project Manager. Within fourteen (14) days of any such
removal, or notice of intent of removal, the Contractor shall nominate a replacement
Environmental Officer for the Project Manager’s approval.
142
117.5 Environmental Monitoring
The contactor shall monitor the compliance of implementation of Environmental
Management actions and the emission of pollutants with respect to the environmental
regulations. The contractor shall include the monitoring plan in his site specific EMAP.
The monitoring plan should be prepared in accordance with the monitoring regulations of
National Environmental Act and that of the funding agency, and any other specific
monitoring indicated in Environmental Assessment reports (EIA, IEE) as appropriated.
The environmental monitoring plan should be approved by the Project Manager.
The Contractor shall monitor the environmental aspects of the construction according the
environmental monitoring plan, and control measures shall be implemented to minimize
the environmental impacts. However, should the control measures put in place be found
to be unsatisfactory as a result of monitoring, then the Contractor shall amend the control
measures to provide a satisfactory result.
The contractor shall:
i. Prepare monthly and quarterly progress reports in three copies on the implementation
of the EMP using a report format acceptable to the Project Manager.
ii. Participate in coordination meetings called by the Project Manager to discuss the
progress of the EMP implementation, among others, and act on agreements reached
during the activity.
iii. Participate in Site Inspections requested by the Project Manager, and/or the
(Environmental and Social Development Division of the Road Development
Authority) ESDD/RDA, to review the EMP performance.
iv. Keep daily records of environment related incidents (if any), note the details, actions
taken, identify persons responsible for these actions, the results of the actions, and any
recommendations for further work. Also indicate in the record if the Project Manager
had been informed of the incidents as well as other local authorities. Complaints and
their status will also be included in the record.
Monitoring environmental parameters for regulations for pollutant emissions;
i. The contractor shall monitor the environmental parameters for regulations for
pollutant emissions. The monitoring parameters should be decided based on the
sensitive environmental elements within the project area and in its proximity. For this,
the contractor should obtain the services of a competent local organization, to decide
and conduct environmental monitoring as baseline and during construction for
ambient air quality, surface and ground water quality, noise and vibration levels at the
specific locations of the site.
ii. The monitoring agency shall review environmental data obtained for conduct baseline
monitoring for parameters as per the Table 1. The monitoring agency shall prepare
environmental quality monitoring reports with the results of field sampling and
laboratory analysis, interpretations of the results and recommendations.
143
iii. And shall set out same monitoring stations for the monitoring during the construction
period.
iv. The reports should be analyzed by the environmental consultants of the Project
Manager to ensure that effectiveness of the mitigation measures implemented, the
necessary environmental regulations are complied, and non-compliances should be
acted according to conditions of the contract.
Table 117-1: Guidance to select Environmental Quality Monitoring Parameters
Activi
ty
Instructions for the
Contractor Parameters
Frequency and
monitoring
Agency
*Base
line
surve
ys
The contractor shall
conduct a baseline
environmental assessment
for all sites before
commencing the
constriction activities.
The assessment should
include Ambient Air
quality, noise, vibration
and water quality at closes
streams (reflecting
upstream and downstream)
as compliance to:
Air quality - The National
Ambient Air Quality
standards stipulated under
the Extraordinary Gazette,
No. 1562/22 August 15,
2008 -Central
Environmental Authority of
Sri Lanka.
Noise- Extraordinary
Gazette, No. 924/1- May
23, 1996 -Central
Environmental Authority of
Sri Lanka.
Vibration- The interim
standards on Vibration for
the Machinery,
Construction activities and
Vehicular Movements -
Central Environmental
Authority of Sri Lanka.
Air Quality
parameters
Carbon Dioxide
(CO2), Carbon
Monoxide
(CO), SO2,
NO2, Total
Suspended
Particulate
Matter (TSPM),
Repairable
Particulate
Matter (PM10)
&PM(2.5),
Particulate
Lead (Pb)
Noise
(15 min and 1
hour in
Morning,
Afternoon,
Evening and
Night in a day)
Leq, L90, L50
& L10
Vibration
(Ground and
Structural)
PPV, Hz
Water quality
parameters
Once
From a
laboratory
accepted by the
Project Manager
144
Ambient Water Quality-
Ambient water quality
standards –CEA –EAIP-
DHV-2000
Crack surveys should be
conducted if necessary on
existing buildings or
structures before
commencing the work by
the contractor. The reports
should be analyzed by the
experts to identify cracks
that might get aggravated
by some project actions.
And necessary precautions
should be made during
execution of project actions
to keep such possible
aggravation of the cracks if
identified sensitive to
specific project actions.
pH,
temperature,
electricity
conductivity ,
DO, BOD,
TSS, Oil and
Grease, FC, Pb,
and any other
specific
parameters
deemd
necessary
Cracks in each
building within
50 m from the
site boundary
Once by the
Contractor
Durin
g
constr
uction
Ambient Air Quality,
Noise, vibration, water
quality Compliance to;
Air quality - The National
Ambient Air Quality
standards stipulated under
the Extraordinary Gazette,
No. 1562/22 August 15,
2008 -Central
Environmental Authority of
Sri Lanka.
Noise- Extraordinary
Gazette, No. 924/1- May
23, 1996 -Central
Environmental Authority of
Sri Lanka.
Vibration- The interim
Air Quality
parameters
Carbon Dioxide
(CO2), Carbon
Monoxide
(CO), SO2,
NO2, Total
Suspended
Particulate
Matter (TSPM),
Repairable
Particulate
Matter (PM10)
&PM(2.5),
Particulate
Lead (Pb)
Noise
(15 min and 1
145
standards on Vibration for
the Machinery,
Construction activities and
Vehicular Movements -
Central Environmental
Authority of Sri Lanka.
Ambient Water Quality-
Ambient water quality
standards –CEA –EAIP-
DHV-2000
hour in
Morning,
Afternoon,
Evening and
Night in a day)
Leq, L90, L50
& L10
Vibration
(Ground and
Structural)
PPV, Hz
Water quality
parameters
pH,
temperature,
electricity
conductivity ,
DO, BOD,
TSS, Oil and
Grease, FC, Pb,
and any other
specific
parameters
deemd
necessary
Cracks in each
building within
50 m from the
site boundary
In critical noise
and vibration
monitoring
activities
From a
laboratory
accepted by the
Project Manager
Site
inspection
s,
Execution
of EMP
An environmental officer
from contractor should be
present at site responsible
for execution of EMP and
monitoring project actions
in respect of environmental
compliance and giving
necessary instructions at
site to ensure satisfactory
implementation of EMP
After
completio
n of
works
Post Crack Surveys
146
117.6 Environmental Complaints
The Contractor shall maintain a register of all environmental complaints received and
shall notify the Project Manager of each complaint. Complaints received by the Project
Manager shall refer to the Contractor shall also be detailed in the complaint register.
The Contractor shall investigate all environmental complaints received and, where
necessary, undertake measures to address the complaint. All measures undertaken to
address the complaints shall be detailed in the register. A summary of the complaints
received, actions taken and the ensuring results; and further actions needed (if any); are
to be included in the regular reports submitted by the Contractor to the Project Manager.
117.7 Environmental Incidents
Should an environmental incident (being environmental nuisance, medium environmental
harm, or serious environmental damage) occur during the construction phase, the
Contractor shall immediately take appropriate action to minimize any impact and inform
the Project Manager of the incident. The Contractor shall carry out any instructions
received from the Project Manager to remedy the situation. The Contractor is responsible
for the clean-up of any contamination caused by construction work and no additional
payment will be made in this regard.
117.8 Environmental Training
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring all employees (including Sub-
Contractors’) have received training/orientation in relation to the Contractor’s
Environmental Management Action Plan (EMAP) and other related operating guidelines.
Posters are to be placed on strategic places, as well as reading materials are to be made
available, to remind workers and visitors on how each one can on a personal basis, help
protect the environment. The Contractor will ensure that all machinery on the Site are
operated within the appropriate guidelines in-order to minimize environmental impacts
related to excessive noise and vibration; deteriorated air and water quality; waste and
pollution control; as well as damages to the natural ecology in and around the project
area. All construction materials used on the Site shall be utilized in a manner to minimize
negative environmental impacts. Reusable containers no longer needed at the Site, can be
donated to the local schools or government units for use in their community development
projects.
117.9 Reporting and Maintenance of Records
(a) Environmental Management Action Plan (EMAP): The Contractor should prepare an
EMAP and obtain approval.
(b) Monthly EMAP performance reports shall be prepared and submitted.
(c) On-site checklists shall be maintained regularly.
147
(d) Logbooks shall be maintained at site with daily inspection entries, issues noticed,
action taken and produced to the Project Manager on-site inspections.
(e) Emission test reports and approvals etc. shall be made available officers of the Project
Manager at on-site inspections.
117.10 Attending to Progress Meeting
The Project Manager will hold monthly progress meeting at a venue that will be either at
the head office or at a pre informed location in the proximity of the project site. An
authorized officer responsible for EMAP should attend the meeting and should present
the progress.
117.11 Performance Monitoring by the Project Manager
The Environmental Officer (EO) shall be appointed by the Project Manager to monitor
performance of EMP at site. The monitoring shall include site inspections, checking on-
site environmental records, reviewing EMAP, raise non compliances on EMAP where
performance is not satisfactory. The EO of the Project Manager shall endorse log entries
and on-site checklists, and shall prepare monthly performance review reports including
non-compliances and present at the progress meetings. All claims are subjected to
approval of the EO.
117.12 Measurement and Payment
a. Measurement
(i) Environmental Officer shall not be measured separately and shall be included in
construction management staff as stated in Section 120.1.
(ii) Submission of EMAP and site arrangement before commencing the Works shall be
measured as a Lump Sum.
(iii) Baseline Environmental Monitoring shall be measured as Lump Sum.
(iv) Environmental Quality Monitoring reports during construction shall be measured as a
Provisional Sum.
b. Payment
(i) Environmental Officer shall not be paid and all the expenditure incurred by the
Contractor in keeping the personnel at the Site and all the facilities provided to such
personnel to discharge his duties satisfactorily shall be deemed to be included in
contractor’s staff.
(ii) Environmental Quality Monitoring and mitigation measures shall comprise all the
expenditure incurred by the Contractor in carrying out this work, according to the
Environmental Quality Monitoring Parameters as instructed and to the satisfaction of
the Project Manager.
148
(iii) All the other obligations of the Contractor under this Section are deemed to be
included in the rates and no separate payment shall be made in respect of them.
- Submission of claims– All claims regarding the EMAP implementation are
subjected to submission of reports followed by approval by the Project Manager.
The format for claim form and authorized signatories should be informed prior to
commencement of the project. The incomplete claims or those with inadequate
information will not be paid and the Project Manager holds no responsibility for
delays encountered in submission of such claims. All claims are subjected to
approval of the EO certifying satisfactory performance. Full payment, No or partial
payment or payment suspension will be based on the endorsement by the EO on
the claims of Contractor.
- Reporting large number of NCs in the given month, not attending to rectify the NCs
within minimum possible time, unsatisfactory performance of implementation of
EMP will be subjected to decision of suspension of payments disregarding the
submission of monthly report.
- Performance of environmental officer at site and attending the progress
meetings– No or partial payment will be made, or payment will be suspended for
unsatisfactory performance of environmental officer of contractor.
- Performance of on-site EMAP– No or partial payment will be made, or payment
will be suspended for unsatisfactory performance
- Suspension of work – If the contractor is seriously violating the norms of
environmental regulations, the Project Manager reserve the right to suspend the
project activities until satisfactory control measures are set in place. The under
such situations the Project Manager will not pay any delay claims.
Damage Surcharge – If substantial damage has resulted to environment or public
due to contractor poor performance of EMAP the contractor should remedy it from its
own expense. The contractor inability or unsatisfactory delay in attending to remediation
the Project Manager reserve right to deduct specified fraction from the payment as
remediation cost
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
117(1)
Implementation of satisfactory Environmental
Management Action Plan (EMAP) and on site
arrangement before commencing the project action.
Lump sum
117(2) Baseline Environmental Monitoring and submission
of the report ( If Required) Lump sum
117(3)
Monitoring Environmental Quality Parameters and
Environmental mitigation measures during
construction ( If Required)
Provisional Sum
The Contractor will entitle to additional 15% overhead and profit on the top of the
premium in this regard.
149
118 HEALTH AND SAFETY
118.1 General
The Contractor shall, as a priority in all its activities, undertakings and endeavors, ensure
the continuous safety measures of the public and all persons directly or indirectly
associated with the Works. The Contractor shall comply with all safety and industrial
health legislation and regulations of Sri Lanka and shall submit a Health and Safety Plan
(HSP) for the Project Manager’s approval. The Contractor shall appoint aSafety Officer
for all safety on the site.
The Contractor will be responsible for the safety of the public legitimately passing
through or adjacent to the Site. All excavations, plant or items of potential danger to the
public must be barricaded and sign-posted to the satisfaction of the Project Manager and
the Contractor must provide sufficient watchmen to ensure the safety of the public at all
times. All existing pedestrian routes shall be maintained in a safe condition unless an
alternative route is provided to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
Availability of Safety-related Documents: The Contractor shall comply with the Project
Manager’s requirements insofar as displaying in each of its site offices
andworkshopscopy of such safety and industry health posters and keeping on the Site
copies of such regulations and documents. All regulations and documents shall be
translated into languages which are understood by the workers and operators engaged by
the Contractor or subcontractors and such translations shall be displayed or kept
alongside those in Sinhala, Tamil and English languages.
Assistance to the Project Manager: The Contractor shall provide full co-operation and
assistance in all safety surveillance carried out by the Project Manager or the Employer.
118.2 Health and Safety Plan (HSP)
e. (a) Submission, Approval and Change
i. Within 28 (twenty-eight) days before the commencement of the works, the
Contractor shall submit his Health and Safety Plan (HSP). The Contractor shall
cooperate and comply with Engineer’s instruction to have HSP approved by
Engineer before start of site works.
ii. The Contractor shall comply with the approved HSP and any of the Project
Manager’s instructions on safety.
iii. If the Project Manager makes any subsequent recommendation or instructions on
the HSP in writing, the Contractor shall revise the HSP accordingly.
iv. Where the Contractor proposes to change, he shall give at least (7) calendar days’
notice in writing. Proposed changes are subjected to the Project Manager’s
approval.
150
(b) Contents of Health and Safety Plan
Main contents of the Health and Safety Plan shall include following:
i. Safety Organizations and Communication
- Safety control staff organizational structure, which should identify the
personnel to be engaged solely for safety assurance (including Safety Officer
will be responsible for all safety on the Site), their responsibilities and
authorities
- Proposed interaction and communication procedures between the Contractor’s
construction personnel and safety assurance staff
- Frequency and coverage of site safety meetings, and regular site safety reports
- Safety information and training
- Records to be prepared and maintained by the Safety Officer.
ii. Measures for compliance by Subcontractors
iii. Safety equipment and faciliti
iv. es
- Safety equipment, rescue apparatus and protective clothing which will be
required for the Works. Such equipment shall include, but not limited to, eye
protectors, hearing protectors, safety harnesses, safety equipment for working
underground and in the confined spaces, rescue equipment, fire extinguishers,
first aid equipment, lanyards, hard hats and, where appropriate, associated
shock absorbers, chest harnesses
- Testing, inspection, and replacement of safety equipment, scaffolds,
guardrails, working platforms, hoists, ladders and other means of access,
lifting, lighting, signing, and guarding equipment
- Equipment of the specified first aid station
- Emergency and rescue procedure and associated equipment
- Any other equipment, gear and facilities necessary for prevention of accidents
v. Protection of authorized and unauthorized visitors to the site (including people from
the vicinity)
vi. Supervision of Safety systems
vii. The means by which the Safety systems will be supervised, monitored and audited by
the Safety Officer to ensure due compliance with the principles and objectives of the
Health and Safely Plan; Procedures for updating the Health and Safely Plan
151
viii. Safety of Construction methods
ix. Proposals to ensure that construction methods do not compromise the Contractor’s
commitment to the Health and Safety Plan or his compliance with regulations
x. Types of Hazards and Emergency Measures
- An appreciation of the industrial health hazards, and proposals for
minimization of the risks associated with such hazards.
xi. Personal Health and Sanitation program which focus on measures to be adopted by
the Contractor in the worker’s camp to ensure that the health of every personnel hired
in the Project is properly taken care of. This program includes the following:
1. Installation of a temporary workers camp that is provided with sleeping quarters,
sanitary toilet and shower rooms, adequate potable water supply and lighting
facilities
- Location for worker camps shall be approved by the Project Manager and
comply with guidelines recommendations issued by the CEA/local Authority
- Worker camps should be located 200 m away from water ways or site of
religious cultural or archeological importance or near schools
2. Personal hygiene and sanitation training for workers;
3. Orientation on the prevention of communicable diseases.
4. Prevention on vector borne diseases.
5. For foreign workers, an orientation on local customs and traditions.
- Worker camps shall be provided with appropriate facilities for disposal of
solid waste and sewerage.
- Garbage bins shall be provided the camps and regular emptied.
The design and location of the worker’s camp is subject to the approval of the Project
Manager and local authorities.
118.3 Safety Officer
(a) The Contractor shall appoint Safety Officer whose duties throughout the period of
the Contract shall be exclusively connected with Safety activities on the Site.
(b) The Safety Officer shall be a suitably qualified and experienced person who shall
supervise and monitor compliance with the Health and Safety Plan and shall carry
out auditing of the operation of the Health and Safety Plan in accordance with a
rolling program to be submitted, from time to time, to the Project Manager for his
approval.
I(c) The Safety Officer’s selection shall be subject to the Project Manager’s approval.
(d) The Contractor shall provide the Safety Officer with supporting staff in accordance
with the staffing levels set out in the Health and Safety Plan.
(e) The Contractor shall empower the Safety Officer and his staff to instruct employees
of the Contractor and of its Subcontractors to cease operations and to take urgent and
appropriate action to make safe the Site and prevent unsafe working practices or
other infringements of the Health and Safety Plan or regulations.
152
118.4 Safety Reports and Notification of Accidents
(a) Safety Reports
The Contractor shall submit regular site safety reports to the Project Manager as a
requirement of the Project Health and Safety Plan. A summary report shall be
submitted as part of the Monthly Progress Report. Prior to submission, the
Contractor’s Representative shall endorse the Report. Site safety reports shall
comprehensively address all relevant aspects of site safety and industrial health
regulations and, in particular, report on all site safety audits undertaken during the
period covered by the report.
(b) Notification of Accidents
The Contractor shall notify the Project Manager immediately when any accidents
occur whether on-site or off-site in which the Contractor, his personnel or
Contractor’s Equipment, or those of his Subcontractors are directly or indirectly
involved and which result in any injuries to any persons. Such initial notification
may be verbal and shall be followed by a written comprehensive report in the format
approved by the Project Manager within 24 hours immediately after the accident.
.
118.5 Safety Equipment and Clothing
The Contractor shall ensure that safety equipment and protective clothing as described in
the Health and Safety Plan are available on the site at all material times and that
measures for the effective enforcement of proper utilization and necessary replacement of
such equipment and clothing are incorporated into the Health and Safety Plan.
(a) The Contractor shall provide all authorized persons on the Site (including the
Employer’s and Engineer’s personnel) with protective clothing, where the minimum
items (Personnel Protective Equipment-PPE) shall be as follows;
- protective headgear (hard hat or similar),
- a reflective jacket
- safety boots (with steel toe caps and steel sole plate)
Other items such as safety glasses, gloves, safety harness, rubber boots etc. will be
provided as necessary to the operation being undertaken.
(b) The Contractor shall provide other necessary safety equipment, clothing and facilities
as instructed by the Project Manager.
(c) The contractor shall provide all persons of sub-contractors with Personnel
Protective Equipment (PPE)
153
118.6 Safety Inspections
The Contractor shall regularly inspect, test and maintain all safety equipment, scaffolds,
guardrails, working platforms, hoists, ladders and other means of access, lifting, lighting,
signing and guarding equipment. Lights and signs shall be kept clear of obstacles and
legible to read. Equipment, which is damaged, dirty, incorrectly positioned or not in
working order, shall be repaired or replaced immediately.
118.7 First Aid Facilities
The Contractor shall establish, maintain at least one fully equipped first aid box at each
Location prior to start the any construction activities at site. All provided facilities should
be maintained during construction at site.
118.8 Health and Safety Information and Training
(a) The Contractor shall ensure that safety, rescue and industrial health matters are given
a high degree of publicity to all persons regularly or occasionally on the Site. Posters,
in Sinhala, Tamil and English languages, that draw attention to site safety, rescue and
industrial health regulation, shall be made or obtained from appropriate sources, and
shall be displayed prominently in strategic areas within the Site.
(b) The Contractor shall carry out regular safety training courses, the frequency,
coverage and application of which, shall be in accordance with the Health and Safety
Plan. The Contractor shall require all Subcontractors’ employees to participate in
relevant training courses appropriate to the nature, scale and duration of the
subcontract works.
(c) The Contractor shall carry out monthly general meetings and give out safety awards
to deserving laborers employed in the project, as motivation for all to be more safety
conscious.
118.9 Plant, Equipment, and Qualified Personnel
All construction plants and equipment used on or around the Site shall be fitted with
appropriate safety devices. These shall include but not be limited to:
(a) Effective safety catches for crane hooks and other lifting devices,
(b) Functioning automatic warning devices and, where applicable, an up-to-date test
certificate, for cranes and hoists.
All construction plants and equipment used on or around the Site, shall be operated by
suitably qualified personnel.
154
118.10 Measurement and Payment
a. Measurement
All the costs related to the implementation and execution of Health and Safety shall be
measured in months during which they are carried out to the satisfaction of the Project
Manager.
Provisional Sum is allocated in the Bill of Quantities for conducting awareness
programmes regarding Sexually Transmitted Diseases (STDs). Minimum three (03)
numbers of awareness programmes shall be conducted by the Contractor during the
period of construction, and the amount allocated for this Provisional Sum shall not be
exceeded, without prior approval of the Project Manager.
b. Payment
Payment for health and safety measures during the construction period shall include all
costs necessary and required for the proper implementation of the Project Safety and
security in compliance with the safety plan, and also incompliance with the requirements
of this Specification, including updating, monitoring and submittals, monthly.
Payment to the Contractor for preparation and implementation of STD program shall not
exceed the Provisional Sum indicated for this purpose. Payment shall be based on the
rates and sums assessed and agreed by the Project Manager for the completed works to
the satisfaction of the Project Manager, which shall include full compensation for
providing all materials, labour, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to carry out
the work. The payment for awareness programmes shall be made upon conducting
programmes and submission of evidence reports regarding the work to the satisfaction of
the Project Manager. The Contractor will entitled to additional 5% overhead and profit
on the top of the premium in this regard.
The Project Manager may at any time withhold payments if, in his opinion, the Project
Safety has not been provided in due compliance with the requirements and procedures of
this Specification.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
118(1) Health & Safety measures during construction
confirming to the latest industrial standards Month
118(2) Awareness Programme for STDs Provisional Sum
155
119 PROGRAMME OF WORKS
119.1 General
The Contractor shall submit the programme of work mentioned in the Conditions of
Contract, to comply with following:
(i) The programme of work shall be prepared using the scheduling software Microsoft
Project or other similar project management software approved by the Project Manager.
Notwithstanding the above, the software must be capable of fulfilling the requirements
described below. The Contractor’s programme shall be submitted in both hard and soft
copies to the Project Manager at intervals mentioned in the Conditions of Contract. In
addition, the Contractor shall provide facilities to the Project Manager and Employer to
study the submitted programme and to track and monitor the progress of work, and carry
out their obligations under the Contract which need the use of such project management
software, within 14 days of receiving notice under the Conditions of Contract. Such
facilities shall include, but not limited to, installing the software in the computers of the
personnel handling the progress tracking in the Employer’s and Engineer’s team and
imparting the required training. Cost of providing such facilities is deemed to be included
in the rates.
(ii) The Contractor shall maintain on Site the necessary computing, printing and plotting
facilities together with suitably experienced staff to enable the Programme to be
reviewed and updated daily and, where necessary, revised.
(iii) The Programme shall be structured to allow the Contractor and Engineer to appreciate
the general progress of the Works, while also providing sufficient detail for the
Contractor to control, and the Project Manager to monitor, day-to-day progress against
scheduled progress.
(iv) The Programme shall be continually updated by the Contractor to include actual progress
of the Works.
(v) The Programme shall clearly identify, at whatever level of detail necessary, the order of
precedence of the Works, the interdependencies between the component parts of the
Works and the critical path.
(vi) The unit of time for the Programme shall be the day and it shall show all rest days and
public holidays.
(vii) Each discrete activity shall be made up of tasks of sufficient detail to identify the
individual resources needed for the task.
(viii) In addition to showing the starting dates, finishing dates, and the duration of
activities, the Programme shall show or incorporate, amongst other things:
- The dates and periods allowed for the design of important Temporary Works.
- The quantities and productivities used to calculate the duration of all activities.
- Resource histograms showing the daily and cumulative requirements for the major
categories of labour, equipment and materials necessary to complete the Works in
accordance with the Programme.
156
- The cost to the Employer of each activity based upon the rates and prices in the Bill
of Quantities.
- In the case of a sequential requirement for possession of Site, the areas involved, the
dates upon which possession will be required and the expected duration of such
possession.
- Proper allowance for adverse weather conditions and any consequent disruption to
the Works.
- Proper allowance for any increase in traffic over during week-ends and public
rest days.
(ix) The Project Manager shall review the programme within 7 days, and where required
by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall revise and resubmit the programme for the
consent of the Project Manager.
(x) Two copies of the Programme, in both electronic and printed form, and two copies of
associated method statements are to be submitted each time.
(xi) This version of the Programme, initially submitted under the Conditions of Contract
and agreed by the Project Manager shall be used as a “Baseline Programme”. Any
revised Programme shall be presented such that the Project Manager can identify the
departures from the Baseline Programme and the revised resources necessary to meet the
demands of the revised Programme.
119.2 Measurement and Payment
No separate payments shall be made for compliance under this Section. Payment shall be
deemed to be included in the Contractor’s rates.
120 CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT AND STAFF
120.1 Description
Contractor shall seek Engineer’s approval to employ following key personnel as fulltime
engagement for construction management staff and technical supervisory staff with
required qualifications as specified in the Bidding Document and accordance with these
specifications.
a) Project Manager/ Contractors Representative
Bachelor’s Degree in the Civil Engineering which is recognized by the University
Grants Commission with at least 10 years of post-qualification in relevant field and
full membership of recognized professional institution of Engineers or equivalent
qualifications
b) Geotechnical Engineer
Bachelor’s Degree in the Civil/Earth Resource Engineering which is recognized by
the University Grants Commission with at least 5 years of post-qualification in
157
relevant field or equivalent qualifications
c) Site Engineer
Bachelor’s Degree in the Civil Engineering which is recognized by the University
Grants Commission with at least 5 years of post-qualification in relevant field or
equivalent qualifications
d) Quantity Survey or equivalent
Bachelor’s Degree in the Quantity Surveying which is recognized by the University
Grants Commission with at least 1 year of post-qualification in relevant field or
equivalent qualifications
e) Technical Officer
NCT with 1 year of post-qualification in relevant field or equivalent qualifications
f) QA/QC Manager/ Material Engineer
Bachelor’s Degree in the Civil Engineering which is recognized by the University
Grants Commission with at least 3 years of post-qualification in relevant field or
equivalent qualifications
g) Safety Officer
5 years of post-qualification in Health & Safety field in civil construction or
equivalent qualifications
h) Environmental Officer
Bachelor’s Degree in Science which is recognized by the University Grants
Commission with at least 1 year of post-qualification in relevant field or equivalent
qualifications
120.2 Measurement and Payment
a. Measurement
Expenses of employing all necessary construction management staff &technical
supervisory staff shall be measured monthly basis. The Project Manager may time to
time withhold or deduct fully or partly payment under this section due to non-
employment of key personnel or employment of incompetent under qualified personnel.
b. Payment
Payment shall include only for above mentioned key personnel. No separate payment
shall be made for other staff of the Contractor.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
120(1)
Employing all necessary construction management staff
&
technical supervisory staff
Month
158
200 SITE CLEARING
201 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
201.1 Description
This work shall consist of clearing and grubbing necessary for the performance of the
work covered by the Contract in accordance with the Specification.
The work shall consist of clearing and grubbing the designated areas within the right of
way including trees girth less than 300mm, dead wood, snags, vegetation, rubbish, loose
boulders and objectionable material and shall include grubbing stumps and roots and
disposing of all material resulting from the clearing and grubbing. It shall not include the
demolition, removal and disposal of structures that obtrude into or encroach upon or
obstruct the work, which are covered under Clause 202.
201.2 Preservation of Property
Existing roads, improvements, facilities, adjacent property, utilities, services, and trees
and plants designated for preservation shall be carefully protected from injury or damage,
which could result from the Contractor's operations.
201.3 Construction Methods
a. General
Generally clearing and grubbing shall be performed on the areas designated by staking or
detailed in the Contract. If no areas are so designated the areas, shall in principle be
carried out over the entire area covered by right of way unless otherwise instructed by the
Project Manager.
b. Clearning and Grubbing
All surface objects, all trees, including stumps and roots, stumps and roots of previously
felled trees, overhanging branches, except those trees and objects the Project Manager
directs to be left undisturbed, shall be cleared and grubbed subject to the following
provisions:
(i) Outside the limits of the earthworks these are allowed to remain provided that the top
of the stumps is not more than 300 mm above ground level. However, trees within
these limits shall be cut so that the stumps are in line with the natural ground level as
far as practicable.
159
(ii) Where lined drains or ditches are to be constructed stumps and roots shall be removed
to a minimum depth of 250 mm below the excavated bottom or into the shaped slope.
(iii) In cut areas removed to a depth of at least 0.15 m below the top of the existing
ground level.
(iv) All fences, buildings, structures, and encumbrances of any character, except those to
be removed by others, upon or within the limits of the right of way, shall be removed
by the Contractor and carefully placed on the abutting property or otherwise disposed
of as indicated on the drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager. Materials so
removed, including any existing drain or culvert pipes, which the Project Manager
may order salvaged, shall be carefully removed and shall be the property of the
Government.
c. Disposal of Cleared Material
(i) Saleable timber as designated by the Project Manager shall be neatly stored in an
approved accessible place within or near the right of way as directed and shall be
trimmed and staked in accordance with the requirements of the appropriate
Government agency to which the timber belongs.
(ii) Un-saleable timber may be used by the Contractor for his own purposes in connection
with the Contract always provided that he has ascertained and complied with the
requirements of the appropriate Government Agencies or Authorities.
(iii) All un-saleable timber except that to be used, and all brushes, stumps, roots, logs and
other refuse from the clearing and grubbing operations shall be burned or be disposed
by other means approved by the Project Manager.
In such cases the Contractor will be solely responsible for making the necessary
agreements and for paying the resulting expenses.
Piles of material for burning shall be placed either at or near the centre of the cleared
area, or in adjacent open spaces where no damage to trees, other vegetation and
adjacent property shall occur.
All burning shall be done in conformance with the regulations and at such times and
in such a manner as to prevent the fire from spreading to areas adjoining the right of
way.
(iv) At the end of such operations the roadway and adjacent areas shall be left with a neat
and finished appearance. No accumulation of burnt, half burnt or other material shall
remain on or adjacent to the right of way.
201.4 Back-filling of Holes and Depression Caused by Removal of Stumps or
Loose Boulders
As instructed by the Project Manager, holes and depressions caused by the removal of
stumps or loose boulders shall be back-filled in layers with excavated or other approved
materials and compacted at the appropriate moisture contents with vibrator tampers to
required densities as per Section 304. The control of quality shall be exercised in
accordance with Section 702.
160
201.5 Tests and Standards of Acceptance
The materials shall be tested in accordance with these Specifications and shall meet the
prescribed criteria. The work shall conform to these Specifications and shall meet the
prescribed standards of acceptance.
201.6 Measurement and Payment
a. Measurement
Clearing and grubbing will be measured on a plan area basis by the square metre (m2), as
indicated in Drawing on the actual work done at site. The work of clearing and grubbing
at disposal sites, material sites, and borrow pit sites shall not be paid for when such areas
outside the areas designated for clearing and grubbing.
Any areas occupied by existing asphalt, concrete or sealed road or otherwise maintained
area are excluded from the designated areas and shall not be included in measurement.
Removal of trees, including stumps and roots unless otherwise specified, of girth less
than 300 mm and overhanging branches of girth less than 300 mm shall be considered as
included in clearing and grubbing.
Removal of trees including stumps and roots, as well as stumps and roots of previously
felled trees of girth greater than 300 mm, shall be measured in numbers and separately
assessed according to the size categories given below:
(a) Girth greater than or equal to 300 mm and less than 600 mm
(b) Girth greater than or equal to 600 mm and less than 1,200 mm
(c) Girth greater than or equal to 1,200 mm and less than 2,000 mm
(d) Girth greater than or equal to 2,000 mm
Girth shall be measured at a level of 1.0 m above average ground level, or in case of
stumps shorter than 1.0 m, at the highest level of the stumps.
Overhanging branches of trees of girth greater than 300 mm shall be measured as
directed by the Project Manager. The girth shall be the girth of cut.
161
b. Payment
(i) Cleaning and grubbing
This work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the Contract unit rate. The
rates shall be full compensation for furnishing all labour, materials, tools, equipment and
incidentals necessary to do the work and for doing all the cleaning and grubbing in the
designated areas and as specified in these Specifications and the Special Provisions and
as directed by the Project Manager including the removal, backfilling and compaction,
reinstatement and making good, preservation of property, storage, transporting and
disposal of all the resulting material.
(ii) Removal of Trees and Removal of Stumps of previously Felled Trees.
Payment for removal of trees and stumps shall be made at the Contract unit rates and
shall be the payment in full for carrying out the required operations including full
compensation for all labour, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to
complete the work. These will include felling, excavating, backfilling with suitable
material in layers and compacting as per Section 201.4, handling, transporting,
reinstatement and making good, preservation of property, storage and disposal.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
201(1) Clearing and grubbing inclusive of backfilling holes
and trenches caused by removal of stumps Square meter
201(2) Removal of trees: 300 ≤ Girth < 600 mm Number
201(3) Removal of trees: 600 ≤ Girth < 1,200 mm Number
201(4) Removal of trees: 1,200 ≤ Girth < 2,000 mm Number
201(5) Removal of trees: 2,000 ≤ Girth mm Number
201(6) Removal of stumps of previously felled trees; 300 ≤
Girth < 600 mm
Number
201(7) Removal of stumps of previously felled trees; 600 ≤
Girth < 1,200 mm
Number
201(8) Removal of stumps of previously felled trees; 1,200 ≤
Girth < 2,000 mm
Number
201(9) Removal of stumps of previously felled trees; 2,000 ≤
Girth mm
Number
201(10) Removal of overhanging branches: 300 ≤ Girth mm Number
162
202 REMOVAL OF EXISTING STRUCTURES
202.1 Description
This work shall consist of dismantling and removing existing retaining wall structures
(i.e. gabion wall, mass & reinforce concrete, masonry and etc.), masonry structures and
other structures such as guard rails, manholes, catch basins, inlets and the like which are
in place, but interfere with the Works and are not suitable to remain in place, and
salvaging and disposing of the resulting materials. It shall include the demolition,
removal and disposal of buildings or parts thereof necessary to widen the existing right of
way where such has not been undertaken or completed by the Employer or the building
owners.
All materials obtained from dismantling shall be the property of the Employer.
Dismantling and removal operations shall be carried out with such equipment and in such
a manner as to leave undisturbed any adjacent pavement, structures or other items
specified to be left in place. All operations necessary for the removal of any existing
structure which might endanger new work shall be completed prior to the start of the new
work.
Prior to commencement of the work, the Contractor shall submit his “Disposal Plan” to
the Project Manager for approval.
202.2 Dismantling of Structures
Structures shall be dismantled carefully and the resulting materials so removed as not to
cause any damage to the serviceable materials to be salvaged, the part of the structure to
be retained and any other properties or structures nearby.
Unless otherwise specified, the superstructure portion of culverts shall be entirely
removed and other parts removed to below the ground level or as necessary depending
upon the interference they cause to the new construction. Removal of overlying or
adjacent material if required in connection with the dismantling of the structures shall be
deemed to be included in this item.
Where existing culverts or retaining structures or drains are to be rehabilitated only such
part or parts of the existing structure shall be removed as are necessary to provide a
proper connection to the new work. The connecting edges shall be cut, chipped and
trimmed to the required lines and grades without weakening or damaging any part of the
structure to be retained. Reinforcing bars, which are to be left in place, so as to project
into new work as dowels or ties shall not be damaged during removal of concrete.
Pipe culverts shall be carefully removed in such a manner as to avoid damage to the
pipes.
163
Masonry structures shall be dismantled to the extent shown in the Drawings and as
directed by the Project Manager.
The serviceable materials shall be transported and stacked at locations approved by the
Project Manager, and the unserviceable materials shall be disposed of as directed by the
Project Manager
202.3 Salvaged Materials
Materials which may be used directly in the Permanent Works shall be stockpiled
separately from those which require processing for reuse. The materials selected for
processing should be of such quality as will meet the Specification after breaking,
screening and mixing with better quality materials if necessary. The responsibility of
selecting a particular material for processing or incorporating in the Permanent Works
shall lie with the Contractor.
Acceptability of the materials (after processing as the case may be) shall be determined
by the Project Manager and only such materials that satisfy the Specification in all
respects shall be permitted for incorporation in the Permanent Works.
The materials failing to satisfy the Specification may be used in the Temporary Works or
may be used in the lower layers of structure backfilling or to fill depressions, stump
holes, boulder holes and the like with the approval of the Project Manager. The materials
not required by the Contractor for incorporation in the Works, but which are of use to the
Employer, shall be neatly stockpiled as directed by the Project Manager.
Structural and reinforcing steel obtained from dismantling existing structures shall not be
considered suitable for use in the Permanent Works and shall be stored in a neat and
presentable manner in locations suitable for loading. Structures or portions thereof which
are specified in the Contract for re-erection, shall be stored in separate stockpiles. Pipe
culverts that are removed in good condition shall be cleaned and neatly stockpiled at
points designated by the Project Manager.
All the products of dismantling operations which in the opinion of the Project Manager
cannot be used in the Works or reused by the Employer shall be disposed of outside the
right of way or may be spread in deep borrow pits, as directed by the Project Manager.
The Contractor shall comply with the laws, ordinances, building regulations, etc. as
prevailing in Sri Lanka. Unless otherwise permitted by the Project Manager, the
Contractor shall furnish, erect and maintain suitable barricades to prevent personal injury
or damage to property.
202.4 Removal of Fences and Guard Rails
The work shall consist of removal of fences and guard rails at locations as instructed by
the Project Manager. The re-useable material shall be removed with due care and stacked
164
and stored for re-use. The unusable material and debris shall be transported and disposed
as instructed by the Project Manager.
202.5 Backfilling
As instructed by the Project Manager, holes and depressions caused by dismantling
operations shall be backfilled with excavated or other approved materials and thoroughly
compacted to match surrounding areas as per section 201.4.
202.6 Measurement and Payment
a. Measurement
The required and accepted work of dismantling and removing structures shall be
measured as the cubic metre (m3) of structural material in place before demolition.
Removal of fences shall be measured per linear metre (m).
b. Payment
The Contract unit rate specified for the work concerned shall be full compensation for
furnishing all labour, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete
all the work required by the Contract and as directed by the Project Manager.
Payment shall include full compensation for carrying out the operations described
including but not limited to excavation, backfilling of excavations using approved
materials, preparing and shaping, handling, sorting out, salvaging, stockpiling and
disposing of material.
Pay Item Description Pay Unit
202(1) Dismantle and removal of rubble
masonry structures Cubic meter
202(2) Dismantle and removal of gabion
structures
Cubic meter
202(3) Dismantle and removal of concrete
(R/F and mass) structures
Cubic meter
202(4) Dismantle and removal of dress stone
masonry structures
Cubic meter
202(5) Removal of fencing and Guard rail Linear meter
165
203 UTILITY RELOCATION
203.1 Description
Where utility relocation is encountered in construction work, it shall be executed by the
Contractor under the co-supervision of the Project Manager and the utility agency with
the consent of the utility agency.
203.2 Measurement and Payment
Payment shall be made as a Provisional Sum and shall be payable when the Contractor
has completed the works to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. The Contractor shall
also submit relevant proof documents. The Contractor will be entitled to additional 5 %
overhead and profit on top of the actual cost, in this regard.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
203(1) Relocation of utility services as per requirements of
the utility service agency
Provisional
Sum
166
300 EARTHWORKS
301 SIDE SLOPE EXCAVATION OR TRIMMING
301.1 Description
Side slope excavation or trimming shall consist of all the required excavation within the
limits of the right of way except excavation otherwise classified. The work shall include
the removal, stockpiling, multiple handling, hauling and proper utilization in the Works
or disposal to spoil tips located by the Contractor and approved by the Project Manager
of all excavation materials, and shaping of excavation and preparation of exposed
surfaces of excavation on the entire length of the slopes, in accordance with the
Specification and the lines, grades, dimensions and cross-sections shown on the
Drawings and as required by the Project Manager.
Slope excavation or trimming shall include the following:
(i) All excavated material indicated on the Drawings within the faces of the cross-
sections, excavation of all materials for approach roads, streets, intersections and all
other areas but not including excavation for ditches, channels, berm ditches, drains
and flumes.
(ii) Excavation for stream and channel diversion except where covered under Section
303.
(iii) Excavation not specified elsewhere but nonetheless required for a proper execution of
the Works.
301.2 Classification of Materials
a. Soil Suitable for Fill
Soil suitable for fill shall include all suitable materials excavated in accordance with the
Specification which is not otherwise specified below as hard rock, soft rock, boulders,
unsuitable soil, and material from slips /slides.
b. Hard Rock
Slope or retaining wall foundation excavation classified as hard rock shall include only
slope or retaining wall foundation excavation which, in the judgment of the Project
Manager, is not practicable without the use of pneumatic tools or drilling and chemical
blasting operations. Hard rock shall not include boulders less than 1m3 in size. Hard rock
shall not include material which, in the judgment of the Project Manager, can be
loosened or excavated with equipment equivalent to that of the following description:
167
(i). Tractor Unit: Equipment with a minimum weight of 17 tones and net horse power
rating of 150 HP or more. The tractor unit is to be in good condition and operated by
experienced personnel skilled in the use of ripping equipment.
The ripper to be attached to the tractor shall be the most efficient parallelogram type
recommended by the tractor or ripper manufacturer. The ripper shall have a single
shank in first class condition with sharpened cutting point.
(ii). Bucket Excavator (backhoe): Equipment able to be fitted with a bucket of maximum
size 0.3cubic metre.
c. Boulders
Boulders shall comprise solid pieces of rock that are weathered on all faces (boulders)
that are between 0.25 m3 and 1.0 m3 in volume. Boulders that exceed the stated volume
shall be classified as Hard Rock. Boulders that are less than the stated volume shall be
measured as Unsuitable Soil.
Measurement of boulders will take as the maximum dimension along the longest axis of
the boulder (length) multiplied by the area of a circle of a circumference equal to the
measured girth of the boulder at its widest point.
d. Unsuitable Soil
Excavation of soil from cuts above road level judged by the Contractor to be unsuitable
in accordance with the Specification for use in the Works and approved as such by the
Project Manager. No soil shall be classified as unsuitable without the approval of the
Project Manager. Such unsuitable soil shall be excavated and disposed of to spoil tips as
instructed by the Project Manager.
Normally highly organic clays and silts, peat soils containing excess of roots, grass and
other vegetable matter shall be considered unsuitable. Materials that are soft or unstable
merely because they are too wet or too dry shall not be classified as unsuitable unless
otherwise so classified by the Project Manager.
e. Material from Slips/ Slides
All the loosened and unstable debris such as soil, rock boulders and fragments, trees,
vegetation must be cleared and removal from the site prior to commencement of
implementing any mitigation measures. However, since there is a high tendency of slope
instabilities followed by them, all such earth removal works must be undertaken under
full supervision and instructions of the Project Manager. Hence in this regard, prior
written approval must be obtained from the Project Manager for a clearly described
methodology of statement.
168
f. De-Watering
If water is met within the cut area due to seepage, springs or rain, it shall be removed by
suitable means as and where required by the Project Manager.
Care shall be taken to discharge the drain water so as cause no damage to the works or
any adjacent property.
301.3 Construction Requirements
a) All excavation or trimming work shall be performed as specified required alignment,
levels, grades and cross sections.
Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings, excavation in hard rock shall extend a
minimum of 200 mm below the required level for the entire width and shall be
backfilled and compacted with suitable materials as indicated on the Drawings or as
instructed by the
b) Engineer
Topsoil encountered in excavation and classified as suitable for re-use shall be
removed to such a depth as the Project Manager may direct and be neatly stockpiled.
The topsoil so stockpiled shall be made available for the Works without additional
charge. No topsoil shall be disposed of without prior written approval of the Project
Manager.
All suitable excavated materials shall be deemed to be used in constructing the
structure backfilling and slope rectification work. Unsuitable material and slope
excavation in excess of that needed for executing the Works shall be known as spoil.
Spoil shall be removed and disposed of at designated areas or spoil tips located by the
Contractor and approved by the Project Manager in such a manner as to present a
neat appearance and to avoid obstruction to drainage or drainage to any road or road
works or other property. The final condition of spoil tips shall be to the approval of
the Project Manager.
All slopes shall be finished in a neat and workman like manner and to accuracy
appropriable to the material and care shall be taken that no material is loosened below
the required slopes. Breakages and slides shall be removed and disposed of as
instructed.
169
All material derived from any excavation required for the Works shall be deemed to
be the property of the Employer and the use of all such materials shall be in
accordance with the Contract and to the approval of the Project Manager.
301.4 Measurement and Payment
a. Measurement
Unless otherwise specified, all required and accepted slope excavation/trimming shall be
measured in its original position after clearing and grubbing; wherever applicable and the
volume determined in cubic metres by the average end area method as computed from
the original and final cross-sections of required and completed work. No allowance shall
be made for bulking or shrinkage. Separate measurements shall be made for each class of
material encountered.
Measurement of rock excavated as required in Section 301.2 herein shall be computed on
the basis of excavation to the specified minimum depth only and no over break shall be
included. Interim payment may be made on measured volumes of required excavation
actually executed, before final shaping, provided the Co’ntractor's intention to complete
the work is clear. Excavation for removal of slides, breakages and cave-ins shall not be
measured nor paid for and shall be deemed to be included in the Contractor's rates unless
otherwise decided by the Project Manager.
b. Payment
The quantities of excavation of soil suitable for fill are measured as specified above will
be paid for at the Contract unit rates per cubic metre for the various types as detailed
below. Such rates shall include laboratory and field test, excavating, chemical blasting,
drilling, breaking, uphold the sides, working space, taking precaution to avoid property
damage, compaction, loading, transport, stockpiling.
The quantities of disposal of excess materials; any remainder after using materials,
measured as specified above will be paid for at the Contract unit rates per cubic metre for
disposal of all type excess of excavation, to designated spoil tips or to spoil tips located
by the Contractor and approved by the Project Manager, for shaping, dressing and
completion of all surfaces and for furnishing all labour, materials, tools, equipment and
incidentals necessary to complete the work. The rate for top soil shall include stockpiling
or disposal as instructed.
The quantities of excavation of unsuitable materials measured as specified above will be
paid for at the Contract unit rates per cubic metre for the various types as detailed below.
Such rates shall include laboratory and field test, excavating, chemical blasting, drilling,
breaking, uphold the sides, working space, taking precaution to avoid property damage,
170
compaction, removal, stockpiling, multiple handling and satisfactory disposal of all type
of excavation of unsuitable materials, to designated spoil tips or to spoil tips located by
the Contractor and approved by the Project Manager, for shaping, dressing and
completion of all surfaces and for furnishing all labour, materials, tools, equipment and
incidentals necessary to complete the work. The rate for top soil shall include stockpiling
or disposal as instructed.
The Contract unit rate specified for the work concerned shall be full compensation for
furnishing all labour, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete
the work, including compaction and trimming to specified tolerances as instructed by the
Project Manager.
The slides cause due to the contractor’s less caution will not be measured or pay.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
301(1) Excavation of slope(soil suitable for fill including soft
rocks) up to required angle (for reuse) Cubic meter
301(2) Excavation of Boulders - 0.25 m3 - 1.0 m3 (Provisional
Quantity)
Cubic meter
301(3) Excavation (chemical blasting) of Hard rock
(Provisional Quantity)
Cubic meter
301(4) Excavation of Un-suitable soil disposal away from site Cubic meter
301(5) Disposal of excess excavated materials, disposal away
from site
Cubic meter
302 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL OF STRUCTURE
302.1 Description
This work shall consist of necessary excavations for retaining walls, lined drains and
other structures. The work shall include the necessary diverting of streams; construction
and subsequent removal of necessary cofferdams and cribs: all necessary sheeting;
shoring, bracing, dewatering and pumping: removal of logs, stumps and other deleterious
matter and obstructions for placing foundation; trimming and excavation: backfilling
clearing the site of debris and disposal of excess excavated material.
The work shall be carried out in accordance with these Specifications and with the lines,
levels, grades, dimensions and cross-sections as shown in the drawings or as directed by
the Project Manager.
171
a. Line Drains
Excavation for lined drains shall be measured as excavation for structures and shall be
measured to the dimensions of the drain as shown on the Drawings. Casting of concrete
against the excavated earth faces will be permitted subject to the Project Manager's
approval.
Drains shall be cleared of all debris prior to backfilling and any structural concrete above
the top of bed level of proposed lined drain shall be removed and disposed of as noted in
Section 202 herein. Drains shall be backfilled with suitable material in layers of
appropriate thickness as detailed on the Drawings or as instructed by the Project
Manager. Any spaces between the lined drain and over excavation for drains shall be
cleared of debris prior top backfill. Such spaces shall be backfilled with suitable material
in layers of appropriate thickness as detailed on the drawings and as directed by the
Project Manager.
302.2 Classification of Materials
a. Excavated Materials
The classification of excavated material shall be as given in Section 301.2 herein.
b. Backfill Materials
Backfilling shall be with material approved as suitable soil. It shall be obtained from the
structure excavation if the material is approved as suitable for backfilling. Any additional
material needed shall be obtained from slope excavation or trimming unless otherwise
instructed by the Project Manager.
c. Concrete for Foundation Fill
Concrete shall conform to the general requirements of Section 600 and concrete to be
placed under water shall conform to the requirements of Section 601.10. Concrete to be
used as foundation fill in dry excavation shall be made with aggregate and cement
conforming to the requirements of Section 601 and shall be mixed and placed in
accordance with Section 601.10, except that minimum cement content shall be 275
kilograms per cubic metre.
d. Foundation Fill Material
Material for foundation fill shall consist of graded sand, gravel or crushed stone as shown
in the Drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager.
172
302.3 Construction Requirements
a. General
Prior to commencement of excavation operations, the limits of excavation shall be send
out as shown in Drawings and as directed by the Project Manager.
The depth/thickness of excavation shall be as shown in the Drawings, unless the
foundation strata encountered is such as to require changes. In the latter case the depth of
excavation shall be as directed by the Project Manager. Where chemical blasting is
required it shall be carried out under the Project Manager’s instructions and all necessary
precautions given therein carefully observed.
After each excavation is completed the Contractor shall notify the Project Manager to
that effect, and no bedding material or structure shall be commenced until the Project
Manager has approved the depth of Excavation and the characteristics of the foundation
material.
b. Excavation for Foundation above Water Table
Unless otherwise directed excavation for foundations above water table shall be carried
out to the width of the lowest step of the foundation and the sides lest vertical without
shoring where the nature of the soil and the depth of excavation allow it. Where this is
not possible the Contractor shall erect all necessary shoring, shuttering and planking for
the safety of personnel and works, subjected to the approval of the Project Manager.
c. Excavation for Foundation below Water Table
Where water is encountered within the excavation due to stream flow, seepage, springs
etc. the Contractor shall take adequate measures such as bailing, pumping, construction
of diversion channels and bunds, coffer damming and any other measures to keep the
foundation trenches free from water as necessary.
Where coffer damming is required, these shall be constructed to adequate depths and
heights with due regard to safety and stability and made as water-tight as necessary to
permit work to be carried out inside them. The interior dimensions of the cofferdams
shall be such as to give sufficient clearance for the construction and inspection and to
permit installation of pumping machinery etc., as may be required within the enclosed
area.
d. Preparation of Foundation
The bottom of the foundation shall be to the lines and levels as given in the Drawings or
as required by the Project Manager. Where this is in soil and above the water table it
shall be watered where necessary and rammed and where it is below the water table it
173
shall be prepared as directed by the Project Manager.
Where rock strata are encountered, soft and weathered material shall be removed as
necessary and the surface trimmed and dress as directed by the Project Manager.
If the excavation has been carried out deeper than necessary, as given in the Drawings or
as otherwise directed by the Project Manager, the extra depth shall be made good with
concrete or masonry of the foundation grade or any other approved material at the cost of
the Contractor.
When, in the opinion of the Project Manager, the foundation material is soft, contains
organic matter, or is otherwise unsuitable, the Contractor shall remove the unsuitable
material and insert foundation fill material, sand, rubble or concrete as specified or
shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Project Manager. If foundation fills material
is instructed it shall be placed and compacted in layers not more than 200 mm compacted
thickness or as instructed by the Project Manager. The degree of compaction shall be the
same as for embankment fill. Rubble used shall confirm to Section 603.2 herein and sand
used shall confirm to Section 801.1 and Table 801-3 herein.
e. Backfilling
Backfilling of the foundation shall be carried out in accordance with sub section 304.3 h
(ii). As stated therein it shall be noted that the backfilling shall be done only after the
foundation concrete or masonry has been in portion for at least 7 days and in a manner
not to cause undue thrust on any part of the foundation. Wherever possible, the sides of
the pit to be backfilled should be brought to the straight shapes enabling the use of small
compactors or rollers. A step of 150 mm on every two layers of backfill and as directed
by the Project Manager shall be maintained, especially on the road side to avoid
differential settlements.
Where backfilling is required to the same level on more than one side of the structure, it
shall be maintained at heights not differing by more than 400 mm on opposing sides of
the structure as backfilling proceeds, unless otherwise agreed by the Project Manager.
If backfilling is required on more than one side of the structure, due to over excavation or
collapse of sides or due to any other reason, backfilling shall be carried out in accordance
with sub section 304.3 h (ii).
302.4 Test and Standards of Acceptance
The material shall be tested in accordance with these Specifications and shall be
prescribed criteria. The work shall conform to these Specifications and shall meet the
prescribed standards of acceptance.
174
302.5 Measurement and Payment
a. Measurement
All excavation shall be according to dimensions as given in the Drawings prepared for
the purposes of excavation and as directed by the Project Manager, in Cu.m., for each
class of material encountered. Excavation for working spaces and contractors convenient
will not be measured. Excavation shall be measured using undisturbed volume excavated
from the top of the surface after doing necessary excavation, clear and grubbing.
Any excavation in excess of above other than what had been allowed by the Project
Manager shall be considered as carried out for the convenience of the Contractor in
exceeding the work and shall not be measured for payment.
For lined drains, excavation shall be measured as lined drain excavation and shall be
measured to the dimensions of the drain as shown on the Drawings. Excavation for
working spaces and contractors convenient will not be measured. Excavation shall be
measured using undisturbed volume excavated from the top of the surface after doing
necessary excavation, clear and grubbing.
Backfilling shall be measured using undisturbed volume in Cu.m., using the types of
materials given in the Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager. Backfill below the
design levels and outside the dimensions as given in the Drawings prepared for the
purposes of excavation will not be measured.
b. Payment
The quantities of excavation for structures as measured above will be paid for at the
Contract unit rates per cubic metre for each class of material encountered. Such rates
shall include full compensation for all labour, materials, tools, equipment, safety
measures and incidentals necessary to carry out the work to this Specification. This work
shall include;
(i) Setting out
(ii) Removal of all logs, stumps and other deleterious matter and obstructions for placing
for foundations
(iii) Cleaning the site and disposal of all surplus material
(iv) Shoring, Excavation
(v) Compaction, ramming
(vi) Constructing and disposing all cofferdams, dewatering
(vii) All safety precautions
(viii) Preparation of base of foundation
(ix) Diverting of streams.
175
The quantities of backfilling for structures as measures above will be paid for at the
contract unit rate for filling for each type of fill material used. Such rates shall include
full compensation for all labour, materials, tools, equipment, safety measures and
incidentals necessary to carry out the work to this Specification.
For line drains, no separate or extra payment shall be made for backfilling which shall be
deemed to be included in the Contractor's rates. No extra or separate payment shall be
made for over-excavation and there shall be no allowance for bulking or shrinkage.
No separate payment shall be made for the excavation for the working space.
Payment for cleaning of site shall be made under Pay Item 201(1) at Section 201.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
302(1) Excavation for structures, soil suitable for filling
including soft rock for reuse Cubic meter
302(2) Excavation for structures, boulders - 0.25 m3 - 1.0 m3
(Provisional Quantity)
Cubic meter
302(3) Excavation for structures (chemical Blasting), hard
rock (Provisional Quantity)
Cubic meter
302(4) Excavation for structures, unsuitable soil, disposal
away from site
Cubic meter
302(5) Backfill with crush stone aggregate (20-200mm) Cubic meter
302(6) Backfill with suitable soil for structures Cubic meter
303 CHANNEL EXCAVATION
303.1 Description
This work consists of excavation for all channels, drains, ditches and the like both inside
and outside the right of way where shown on the drawings or as instructed by the Project
Manager. The work shall include the proper utilization and hauling or disposal of all
excavated materials, backfilling where required, constructing, shaping and finishing all
earthwork involved in conformity with the required alignment, levels, grades and cross-
sections.
All drainage works in any section shall be constructed to the satisfaction of the Project
Manager before approval is given to commence pavement operations.
176
303.2 Classification of Materials
Materials excavated shall be classified as noted in Section 301.2 herein.
303.3 Construction Method
The channels, drains, ditches and the like shall be excavated to the alignment, levels,
grades and cross sections, required on the Drawings or as instructed by the Project
Manager. Any excavation beyond the limits required shall not be paid for.
303.4 Measurement and Payment
a. Measurement
Channel or unlined drain excavation shall be measured as channel excavation and
classified in accordance with Section 301.2 herein.
Quantities of channel excavation shall be measured in cubic metres determined by the
average end area method computed from the original and the final cross-sections of the
authorised and completed excavations. No allowance shall be made for bulking and
shrinkage.
b. Payment
The payment shall be full compensation for all excavation, dewatering, backfilling where
required, multiple handling, hauling and otherwise properly using and disposing of
materials in spoil tips, for establishing and maintaining access to channels and for all
labour, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
303(1) Channel excavation, soil suitable for fill Cubic meter
303(2) Channel Excavation– boulders - 0.25 m3 - 1.0 m3
(Provisional Quantity)
Cubic meter
303(3) Channel Excavation (chemical blasting) – Hard rock
(Provisional Quantity)
Cubic meter
303(4) Channel Excavation, unsuitable soil Cubic meter
177
304 FILLING WORK
304.1 Description
This work shall consist of the construction of filling and other miscellaneous backfill
with approved material obtained either from the excavation of the roadway, slope
excavation or trimming, borrow pits or other sources in accordance with these
Specifications and lines, levels, grades, dimensions and Cross-sections shown in the
Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager.
304.2 Materials
All materials which are deposited in place prior to compaction shall confirm to Section
804 herein and shall be evenly spread over the whole of the designated area for the layer
concerned and in such quantity that the thickness of anyone layer, when measured after
compaction, shall comply with the requirements specified.
Any new layer less than 75 mm in compacted thickness shall be bonded to the previous
layer by scarifying the previous layer to a depth not less than 25 mm or to such greater
depth so that the total compacted thickness of the new layer plus the scarified portion of
the previous layer will not be less than 100 mm.
304.3 Construction Requirements
a. Sources of Supply of Filling Material
All suitable material available from the roadway and other excavation shall be used for
filling construction as directed by the Project Manager. Where additional materials are
necessary they shall be obtained from approved borrow pits or other approved sources.
b. Setting Out
The pegs or stakes showing the limits of the filling shall be fixed a suitable distance
outside the actual limits of the fill and such pegs or stakes shall be painted in a distinctive
colour for vicinity.
c. Removal of Top Soil
Where the height of fill is more than 500 mm and less than 3.0 m, the topsoil shall be
removed as described in Section 201 herein. Topsoil shall also be removed under fill
whose height is greater than 3.0 m and where topsoil is required in other locations or on
the instructions of the Project Manager. If the in-situ material conforms to Type II filling
material it shall be compacted to a minimum depth of 150 mm to not less than 95% of the
maximum dry density of the material at moisture content within 5% of the predetermined
178
optimum moisture content as determined by BS 1377 Test 13 (Modified Procter) or
AASHTO T-180. The degree of compaction shall be checked by field density
measurements (BS 1377 Test 15) at the rate of one test for every 100 square metres or as
instructed by the Project Manager.
Where the height of fill is less 500 mm, the topsoil shall be removed as described in
Section 201 herein. If the in-situ material conforms to Type I filling material, it shall be
compacted to a minimum depth of 150 mm below formation level, or to such depth as
instructed by the Project Manager, to not less than 95% of the maximum dry density of
the material at moisture content within 5% of the predetermined optimum moisture
content as determined by BS 1377 Test 13 (Modified Procter) or AASHTO T-180. The
degree of compaction shall be checked by field density measurements (BS 1377 Test 15)
at the rate of one test for every 100 square metres or as instructed by the Project
Manager.
d. Placing and Compaction of Filling Material
The material placed on the filling area shall be thoroughly broken down throughout the
layer by means of equipment suitable for this purpose. During such processing the layer
shall be frequently bladed using a grader to bring oversize material to the surface to
facilitate breaking down. The material shall be broken down to a size not exceeding 70%
of the compacted layer thickness. The compacted thickness of the layers will be
dependent upon the size to which the material can be broken down by the technique used
but shall in general not be greater than 225 mm.
In order that layer thicknesses are not dictated by the presence of isolated larger rocks or
stones, the Project Manager shall instruct that the material which cannot be broken down
to the size generally achievable for the rest of the material in the layer be removed from
the fill.
Any water required before material is compacted shall be added to the material in
successive applications by means of water bowsers fitted with sprinkler bars or by means
of pressure distributors all capable of applying the water evenly and uniformly over the
area concerned.
The water shall be thoroughly mixed with the material to be compacted by means of
motor graders or other suitable equipment. Mixing shall continue until the required
amount of water has been added and until a uniform mixture is obtained. Compaction
may proceed when the moisture content of the un-compacted layer is within 5% of the
predetermined optimum moisture content.
If the material is too wet it shall be dried by aeration and if it is too dry the material shall
be sufficiently watered prior to compaction. Compaction shall be carried out as a
continuous operation covering the full width of the layer and to be compacted with the
available equipment before drying out
179
The types of compaction equipment to be used and the amount of rolling to be done shall
be such as to ensure that specified densities are obtained without damage to the
underlying layers or to structures. During compaction the layer shall be maintained to the
required shape and cross section and all holes filled and ruts and laminations shall be
removed.
The Project Manager may permit thicker layers than as specified above to be constructed,
provided that he is satisfied that the specified densities can be obtained throughout the
full depth of each layer and that the layers will be uniformly compacted by using
equipment specifically suited to this purpose. Fill shall be placed in successive layers
whose planes are parallel to the final surface, wherever this is practicable.
Each successive layer shall be placed only after the previous layer has been tested and
found satisfactory as specified in Section 304.3(e) herein.
If at any time after compaction the layer is damaged by drying out or is damaged by rain,
it shall be scarified, and re-compacted to the requirements of the specifications at the
Contractor’s expense and to the approval of the Project Manager.
The Contractor shall ensure that oversize material be disposed of or utilized elsewhere in
the construction of the Works. The Contractor shall exercise all reasonable care to avoid
bringing onto the road material which cannot be broken down to the required size by
processing on the road. This shall be avoided by proper selection in excavation in cut or
in borrow. In cut such material shall be taken directly to spoil or shall be utilized as
instructed by the Project Manager.
Unless otherwise specified, the top 500 mm of the embankment shall be constructed
using Type I material and the lower layers of the embankment shall be constructed using
Type II material, as specified in Section 804 herein.
e. Degree of Compaction of Filling
The top 150 mm layer of the filling shall be compacted to not less than 95% of the
maximum dry density of the material at a moisture content within 5% of the optimum
moisture content as determined by BS-1377 Test 13 (Modified Procter) or AASHTO T-
180. The degree of compaction shall be checked by field density measurements (BS-1377
Test 15) at the rate of one test for every 100 square metres or as instructed by the Project
Manager. The top of the layer shall be trimmed to line and level.
The remainder of the embankment shall be compacted to not less than 95% of the
maximum dry density of the material at a moisture content within 5% of the optimum
moisture content as determined by BS1377 Test 13 (Modified Procter) or AASHTO T-
180. The degree of compaction shall be checked by field density measurements (BS-1377
Test 15) at the rate specified in Section 702 herein.
180
f. Drainage of Protection of Filling
All permanent drains shall be constructed at the earliest opportunity, along with any
temporary drains that may be necessary to protect the fill, and they shall be maintained in
working condition throughout the construction period.
g. Finishing Operation
The fill shall be finished to levels, grades, slopes and Cross-sections shown on the
Drawings and as directed by the Project Manager. Where specified the slopes of fill shall
be top soiled and grassed, measured and paid in accordance with Section 501 and 502
respectively.
h. Filling Work under Special Condition
(i) Fill on Hill Slopes
Where filling are to be constructed on hill slopes, adequate bonding between the existing
slope and new filling shall be established by removing the top soil and benching into the
existing slope in vertical and horizontal faces including rock and the fill built in
successive layers.
(ii) Filling around Structures
The Contractor shall take special precautions to see that the construction work of
structures is not disturbed as a result of the filling operations and that the filling in the
vicinity of a structure shall not be carried out till the concrete or masonry or gabion had
been in position at least for 7 days, unless otherwise directed by the Project Manager.
Filling around structures shall be carried out using suitable material and compacted to
densities given in sub section 304.3(e) using special equipment such as mechanically
operated hand rammers. The control on the quality of materials and works damage is
done to the structure by these operations.
The filling shall be brought up simultaneously on each side of the structure to avoid
unequal pressure acting on it. Any damage that is caused to the structures by the
negligence of the Contractor shall be made good by him at his own expense.
304.4 Measurement and Payment
a. Measurement
Filling work shall be measured as compacted in Cu.m. The undisturbed volume of fill
material within the design area shall be computed by the average end area method on
Cross-sections given in the Drawings or on Actual Cross-sections taken at site before and
after the construction of the fill. No measurement should take for the settlements and
voids for such as culverts should be excluded.
181
Filling work using rock shall be measured in Cu.m. in the same manner as for earth fill.
The trimming, levelling and compaction of original ground shall be measured in Sq.m.
Application of topsoil on filling slopes and verges shall be measured as given in Section
501.
Filter medium behind earth retaining structures shall be measured separately as given in
Section 405.
b. Payment
Payment will be based on the Contract unit rate for the separate items as measured above
and shall include full compensation for all labour, materials, transport, tools, equipment
and other incidentals necessary to complete the work to the Specification. This work
shall include the following where applicable.
(i) Setting out and pegging
(ii) Scarifying and benching slopes of existing fill and hill sides
(iii) Special arrangements and equipment that may be necessary for working under
restricted conditions such as in the vicinity of structures.
(iv) Laying and compaction of suitable material.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
304(1) Fill in slope by using excavated soil including soft rock Cubic meter
304(2) Filling work using rock material Cubic meter
305 NON – EXPLOSIVE BLASTING OPERATIONS
305.1 Description
This work shall consist of the breaking of rock or boulders using non-explosive
expansive silent cracking agent for removing of unstable boulders, formation of
foundation for structurers and excavation of hard rock in accordance with these
Specifications and lines, grades, levels, dimensions and Cross-sections shown in the
drawings or as directed by the Project Manager. The work shall include the removal,
stockpiling, multiple handling, hauling and proper utilization in the Works or disposal to
spoil tips located by the Contractor and approved by the Project Manager of all
excavation materials.
182
305.2 Materials
Material used for blasting operation shall be non-explosive expansive silent cracking
agent. The Contractor shall get prior approval for the blasting material.
305.4 Construction Requirements
Design of blasting operation and drilling design shall be done by a Mining Engineer and
design shall be submit to the Project Manager for approval.
The Contractor shall submit a method statement for the approval of the Project Manager.
The method statement shall consist with blasting design, drilling design, safety
management etc. and shall submit for the approval of the Project Manager. The
Contractor shall inform the Project Manager 14 days prior to commencing of the blasting
operation and the Work shall be carried out according to the method statement approved
by the Project Manager. Blasting operation shall not produce any noise or vibration.
305.5 Measurement and Payment
Measurement and payment shall be made according to the Sections 301, 302 and 303.
183
400 DRAINAGE CONSTRUCTION
401 CUT-OFF DRAINS, CASCADE DRAINS AND SURFACE DRAINS
401.1 Description
The construction of drains, un-lined or lined, and covered where required, to dimensions,
grades and in positions shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Project Manager.
401.2 Materials
The materials used for lining the drains shall meet the requirements of the following,
unless otherwise specified.
a) Reinforcing steel to SLS 375, SLS 26 or BS 4449
b) Formwork used shall be of steel or any other material approved by the Project
Manager conforming the Section 604
c) Cement used shall conform to requirements of Section 802 of the Specifications.
d) The dowels shall be of mild steel having mechanical and physical properties specified
in Section 602.
401.3 Construction Requirements
a. Excavation for Drains
The excavation shall be carried out as detailed in Section 302.
b. Line Drains
All drains that are designated to be lined shall be constructed as shown in drawings or as
directed by the Project Manager.
In-situ construction with concrete Grade C25 or C20 shall be carried out as shown in the
Drawings or as instructed
In cascade drains, the fixing of dowels into the designated depths shall be as shown in
Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager.
c. Expansion Joints
10 mm thick expansion joint should be provided as shown in the drawings or as directed
by the Project Manager. The Contractor should be get prior approval for joint sealant
material applies for expansion joint from the Project Manager.
184
d. Weep holes for Raised Drainage Walls
Weep holes shall be made of PVC pipe (Type 600) for the raised drainage walls to
facilitate the drainage of any water collected at the back of the structure, as per the
drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager. When pipes are embedded in the
drainage walls, they shall be laid to the slope given in Drawings or required by the
Project Manager and shall extend from the rear face to the front face of the structure.
They shall be protected from ingress of materials during construction and shall be
cleaned before backfilling is placed behind the structure.
401.4 Measurement and Payment
a. Measurement
The excavation for lined drains shall be measured and paid as provided in Section 302
herein.
Measurement of lining of drains shall be in cubic metres. Reinforcement and Formwork
for concrete shall be measured separately in kilograms and in square metre respectively.
The weep holes for raised drainage walls shall be measured in linear metres of weep
holes.
b. Payment
No separate payment shall be made for compliance of expansion joint works and
polythene cover for concrete, payments shall deemed to be included in the concrete rates
and prices.
Payment for supply and installation of dowels shall include drilling, grouting, cutting,
tying etc., to complete the works.
The excavation for lined drains shall be paid as provided in Section 302.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
601(1) Concrete C15/20 for beds poured on or against earth or
un-blinded hardcore Cubic meter
601(2) Concrete C20/20 for walls and base of drains Cubic meter
601(3) Concrete C25/20 for walls and base of drains Cubic meter
602(1) Tor – Steel reinforcement Kilograms
604(1) Formwork for concrete sides of drains plain smooth Square meter
185
finish
605(1) Supply and installation of 20 mm dia. hot dipped
galvanized Mild steel dowels
Linear meter
401(1) 50mm dia. PVC Weep holes (type 600) for raised
drainage walls
Linear meter
402 SUB-SURFACE DRAINS (UNDERDRAINS OR TRENCH DRAINS)
402.1 Description
This work shall consist of construction of subsurface drains (under drains or trench
drains) and drains outlets using perforated pipes, non-perforated pips and granular filter
material. The work shall be carried out in accordance with this Specification and in
conformity with the Plans or as directed by the Project Manager.
402.2 Materials
The non-perforated pipes shall be of concrete, PVC or earthen, conforming to following
standards.
Concrete pipes to SLS 452
PVC pipes to SLS 147
Earthen ware pipes to SLS 449
The filter material shall be Geotextile/filter fabrics to requirement given in Section 805.
Unless otherwise instructed, the perforated pipe to be installed shall be 110mm PVC
(Type 600) pipe. The pipe shall be drilled with 100 mm x 5 mm grooves at 100 mm
centres on the bottom half of the perimeter of the pipes as shown in the Drawings or as
directed by the Project Manager.
Granular filter material, for bedding and for surrounding the pipe under-drains, shall be
single graded aggregate of maximum size 37.5 mm conforming to the requirements of
Section 801 unless or otherwise specified by the Project Manager.
402.3 Construction Requirements
a. Sub-surface drains
Trenches shall be excavated to the dimensions and grades required and a minimum of
150 mm thick bedding layer of granular filter material shall be compacted in the bottom
of the trench for its full width and length.
186
Care shall be taken to prevent the contamination of the granular filter material with soil
or silt or other deleterious material during construction of the sub surface drains and all
filter material contaminated shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own
expense.
Perforated pipes unless otherwise required, shall be laid with the perforations down and
the pipe sections shall be securely jointed as specified or directed.
After the pipe installation has been approved, granular filter material shall be placed to a
depth as specified so as to completely surround the pipe as shown in the Drawings or
required by the Project Manager. Single sized aggregate of nominal maximum size of
37.5 mm, instead of granular filter material can be used with the approval of the Project
Manager. The remaining portion of the trench shall then be filled and compacted in layer
of 300 mm with impervious materials, as specified.
Where specified or ordered by the Project Manager, geo-fabric filter as specified in Sub-
section 805.6 shall be installed as shown on the Drawings. Filter fabric shall not be
exposed to direct sunlight for prolonged and shall be protected from mechanical damage
during installation and construction.
b. Subsurface Drain Outlets
Trenches for the outlets shall be excavated, to the dimensions required by the Project
Manager. The outlet pipes shall be laid on approved compacted bedding in the trench
with their ends firmly jointed as required. On approval of the pipe installation the trench
shall be back filled with approved suitable material and compacted in layers in
accordance with section 304.3(d).
c. Aggregate Drains
Trenches shall be excavated to the dimensions and grades required and fill with filter
material (20mm single graded aggregate) shall be compacted of the trench for its full
width and length.
Care shall be taken to prevent the contamination of the granular filter material with soil
or silt or other deleterious material during construction of the gravel pack drains and all
filter material contaminated shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own
expense.
Where specified or ordered by the Project Manager, geo-fabric filter as specified in Sub-
section 805.6 shall be installed as shown in drainage drawings.
187
402.4 Test and standard of acceptance
The materials shall be tested in accordance with these Specifications and shall meet the
prescribed criteria. The work shall conform to these Specifications and shall meet the
prescribed standards of acceptance.
402.5 Measurement & Payment
a. Measurement
Excavated and approved soil back fill shall be measured and paid for as provided for
Section 302.
For subsurface drains; perforated and outlet drain pipes shall be measured by the linear
meter along the centre line of the pipe for each type and size specified. No separate
measurement for granular filter material and filter fabric.
For aggregate drains shall be measured by linear meter along the centre line of the drain
including filter fabric.
b. Payment
The quantities as determined above will be paid for at the Contract unit price which shall
be full compensation for furnishing and placing of all materials such as geo-fabric,
granular filter and PVC perforated pipe and including all labour, equipment, tools and
incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed.
No separate payment shall be made for outlet preparation of the sub-surface drains and
aggregate drains.
The Pay Items and Pay Units shall be as follows:
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
402(1) Sub-surface drain – PVC pipe Dia 110 mm (type 600) Linear metre
402(2) Aggregate drains Linear meter
403 CATCHPITS AND INLETS
403.1 Description
This work shall consists of construction of manholes, catch-pits and inlets for
underground drainage systems in accordance with these Specifications and with the lines
188
and levels as shown on Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager.
The inlets may be of gully type or side entry type or a combination of both as shown in
the Drawings.
403.2 Materials
Materials shall conform to the requirements of the following unless otherwise specified.
Reinforcing steel to SLS 375 or CS 26
Cement mortar for jointing to Section 802
Mastic joint filler shall be of the approved varieties
Frames, grating, covers and any other incidental items shall be as given in the
Drawings or elsewhere in the Contract documents
403.3 Construction Requirements
All excavation and backfill required for construction shall be carried out in accordance
with the requirements of Section 302.
Inlets, catch-pits and manholes shall be constructed in-situ. In-situ construction of catch-
pits shall be carried out using concrete as specified or instructed at site. Depth of the
catch-pit as specified or instructed at site.
In-situ construction of inlets shall be carried our using concrete Grade C25.
Formwork for in-situ concreting of units shall conform to the requirements of Section
604.
403.4 Tests and standards of acceptance
The materials shall be tested in accordance with these Specifications and shall meet the
prescribed criteria. The work shall conform to these Specifications and shall meet the
prescribed standards of acceptance.
403.5 Measurement and Payment
a. Measurement
The excavation for inlets and catch-pits new or reconstructed shall be measured and paid
as provided in Section 302 herein.
189
Measurement of Concrete inlets and catch-pits new or reconstructed shall be in cubic
metres. Reinforcement and Formwork for concrete shall be measured separately in
kilograms and in square metre respectively.
b. Payment
The excavation for manholes, inlets and catch-pits shall be paid as provided in Section
302.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
601(1) Concrete C15/20 for beds poured on or against earth or
un-blinded hardcore Cubic meter
601(3) Concrete C25/20 for walls and base of catch pits Cubic meter
602(1) Tor – Steel reinforcement Kilograms
604(1) Formwork for concrete sides of drains plain smooth
finish
Square meter
404 BERM SEALING
404.1 Description
The work shall consist of construction of berm seals in accordance with these
Specifications and locations and thicknesses as specified in Drawings or as instructed by
the Project Manager.
404.2 Materials
Materials shall conform to the requirements of the following unless otherwise specified.
Cement used shall conform to requirements of Section 802 of the Specifications.
Mastic joint filler shall be of the approved varieties
404.3 Construction Requirements
In-situ construction of berm seals with concrete Grade C25 shall be carried out as shown
in the Drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager. At every 5 m interval should be
maintained 10 mm width expansion joint and sealed the joint with joint sealant approved
by the Project Manager.
190
404.4 Measurement and Payment
a. Measurement
Measurement of Concrete for berm sealing shall be in cubic metres.
b. Payment
No separate payment shall be made for expansion joint and polythene cover for concrete
as per drawings and payments shall deem to be included in the concrete rates and prices.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
601(3) Concrete C25/20 for berm sealing Cubic meter
405 DRAINAGE BACKFILL BEHIND EARTH RETAINING
STRUCTURES
405.1 Description
This work shall consist of the construction of a permeable layer of aggregate behind
retaining structures to facilitate the free drainage of the retained soil layers (including any
backfill) through the weep-holes of the structure.
The layer shall consist of a layer of large sized aggregate backfill immediately behind the
wall and a layer of graded small aggregate, referred to as the filter medium placed along
the sloping face of the aggregate backfill.
All works shall be carried out in accordance with the Specification and in conformity
with Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager
405.2 Materials
(a) Aggregate Backfill
The aggregate backfill shall be free draining and normally consist of aggregate larger
than 20 mm and smaller than 200 mm, shall consist of hard and durable crushed stone.
(b) Filter Medium
191
The filter medium shall be Geotextile/ filter fabrics to requirement given in Section 805.
405.3 Construction Requirements
Prior to placement of the larger size aggregate behind the structure, the soil layer, on
which the aggregate is placed, shall be well compacted and made impervious either by
constructing a clay puddle or by the application of a bituminous binder or gauge 1000
polythene as required.
The aggregate backfill shall be placed along the wall and to a stable configuration and
dimensions as indicated on the Drawings or as instructed. The material shall be hand
packed using a hand tamper.
405.4 Tests and standards of acceptance
The materials shall be tested in accordance with these Specifications and shall meet the
prescribed criteria. The work shall conform to these Specifications and shall meet the
prescribed standards of acceptance.
405.5 Measurement and Payment
a. Measurement
The quantity to be measured shall be the number of Cu.m placed, compacted and
accepted in place, separately for the aggregate backfill and the filter medium.
b. Payment
The work measured as provided above will be paid for at the unit price per Cu.m of
drainage backfill behind earth retaining structures. The price shall be full compensation
for all labour, materials, equipment and incidentals required to finish and acceptably
place the materials.
There shall be no separate payment for the impervious layer and payment shall be
deemed to be included in the Contractor's rates.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
405(1) Aggregate backfill – 20-200 mm Cubic meter
192
406 WEEPHOLES FOR EARTH RETAINING STRUCTURE
406.1 Description
This work shall consist of providing opening in earth retaining structures to facilitate the
drainage of any water collected at the back of the structure, as given in the Drawings or
as directed by the Project Manager and in accordance with these Specifications.
The weep holes may either be cast in-situ or consist of pipes embedded in the structure.
406.2 Materials
Unless otherwise instructed by the Project Manager, weep holes shall be made of PVC
pipe (Type 600).
406.3 Construction Requirements
When pipes are embedded in the earth retaining structure, they shall be laid to the slope
given in Drawings or required by the Project Manager and shall extend from the rear face
to the front face of the structure. They shall be protected from ingress of materials during
construction and shall be cleaned before backfilling is placed behind the structure.
406.4 Tests and standards of acceptance
The materials shall be tested in accordance with these Specifications and shall meet the
prescribed criteria. The work shall conform to these Specifications and shall meet the
prescribed standards of acceptance.
406.5 Measurement and Payment
a. Measurement
The weep holes for earth retaining structures shall be measured in linear metres of weep
holes.
b. Payment
Payment shall be based on the Contract unit price for the item and shall include full
compensation for all materials, labour, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to
complete the work to the Specifications.
193
The pay Items and pay Units will be as follows;
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
406(1) Weep holes using PVC pipes (Type 600) – diameter to
be specified Linear metre
194
500 INCIDENTIAL CONSTRUCTION
501 TOP SOILING
501.1 Description
This work shall consist of supply of topsoil furnished and transported from approved
sources or stockpiles and spread in conformity with these Specifications at locations
shown on Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager. Generally where top soil is
stockpiled adjacent to the Works, filling slopes shall be top soiled in accordance with the
Project Manager's instructions.
501.2 Materials
Top soil provided by the Contractor or salvaged during clearing and grubbing shall
consist of loose friable natural surface soil free of admixtures of sub soil, refuse, stumps,
roots, rocks, weeds or other material which would be conductive to proper development
of vegetative growth.
501.3 Construction Requirements
The Contractor shall notify the Project Manager at least 7 days before he intends to start
collecting top soil from specified areas.
Unless otherwise specified top soil shall not be spread on slopes steeper than 1:1.5 (1
vertical to 1.5 horizontal). Slopes steeper than 3:1 shall be scarified to depths indicated in
Plans or established by the Project Manager, prior to placing top soil. The area to be top
soiled shall normally be roughened by hand scarifying, or by any other means approved
by the Project Manager, to ensure the stability of top soil spread.
After the Project Manager has approved the prepared and graded areas, top soil shall be
spread to a thickness after settlement shall not be less than 75 mm or the depth shown on
Drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager. Spreading shall not be done when the
ground or the top soil is excessively wet or in a condition considered detrimental to the
work. The topsoil layer shall be leveled off and raked.
The slope surface shall be kept clean during hauling and spreading operations. After
spreading has been completed, large clods, stones larger than about 40 mm in diameter
and any roots, stumps and other litter shall be raked up and removed and disposed of at
an approved location.
501.4 Test and standards of acceptance
The materials shall be tested in accordance with these Specifications and shall meet the
prescribed criteria. The work shall conform to these Specifications and shall meet the
195
prescribed standard of acceptance.
501.5 Measurement and Payment
No separate payment shall be made for compliance of items under this section. Payments
shall be deemed to be included in the Section 802.
502 GRASSING
502.1 Description
This work shall consist of providing grass cover by seeding, sprigging or sodding,
including soil preparation, fertilizing, mulching and watering as required, in conformity
with these Specifications and with the Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager.
502.2 Materials
a. Grass Seeds
The grass seeds shall be of an accepted variety reputed to produce a good grass cover.
Seeds shall be furnished by the Contractor in standard sealed containers along with seed
name, weight and other details as necessary.
Where required, a certificate from the vendor stating that the seeds have been tested
within a stipulated period of time, not exceeding 6 months, and prior to the time of
delivery shall be furnished.
b. Grass Sods
Grass sods shall be of living vigorous growth of the type of grass to the size of 200 mm x
150 mm and thickness specified, having a dense root system, contained in suitable sods
and free form noxious weeds and diseases and shall contain a minimum of 50 mm of
topsoil.
c. Fertilizer
Fertilizer shall be from a standard commercial grade conforming to all relevant
regulations and shall provide the minimum percentage of nutrients specified.
The fertilizer shall be evenly applied over all surfaces where grass is to be planted and
shall then be thoroughly mixed with the soil to a depth of 100 mm either mechanically or
manually.
Where the type of fertilizer is not specified the Contractor shall obtain the Project
196
Manager approval prior to use of a particular fertilizer.
d. Mulch
Mulch used shall be straw, hay, saw dust or any other similar material specified in the
Contract. They shall be free from material injurious to plant growth.
e. Water
Water used in planting or care of vegetation shall be free from oils, acids, alkalis, salts or
any other substance injurious to plan life.
f. Plants
Plants used in soil nailed surface shall consist of deep root system such as Vetiveria.
502.3 Construction Requirements
The area to be grassed shall meet the specified finish grades, be free of any weeds or
plant growth, stones and other debris.
If top soiling is required it shall be done in accordance with the requirements of Section
501. The surface, where required, shall be loosened by raking.
a. Planting/Seeding on soil nailed surface
Plants or seeds shall be filled in to the coir mesh pockets along with soil and fertilizers
prior to laying of high tensile wire mesh on soil nailed surface as per the Drawings or as
directed by the Project Manager. The Contractor should get prior approval for the method
of Planting/Seeding from the Project Manager.
b. Sodding (Turfing)
Sodding shall be done just before or during the rainy season or as instructed by the
Project Manager. The Contractor shall notify the Project Manager not less than 7 days
before cutting of sods begin. Sods shall be approved by the Project Manager, in its
original position before cutting and delivery to the site. Areas to be covered with sods
shall be given a layer of top soil 75 mm thick unless, due to the presence of suitable
subsoil, the Project Manager orders that the topsoil be omitted.
The areas to be covered with sods shall be thoroughly watered beforehand so that they
are wet to a depth of at least 150 mm when sodding is done. Sods shall be laid on the
prepared sod-bed within 24 hours after cutting expect where the Project Manager has
approved their being stored in stacks or piles, grass or root to root, for a period not
197
exceeding 3 days.
The moving and laying of sods shall be done as far as possible, when weather conditions
and soil moisture are favorable. Sodding may be done in one of the following methods as
designated in the Drawings or as approved by the Project Manager.
a) Solid sodding
b) Strip sodding
c) Spot sodding
In solid sodding, sods shall be laid edge to edge with staggered joints and the joints
where necessary shall be filled with suitable top soil. After laying and joint filling,
sodding shall be tamped in an approved manner to provide and eve surface. On slopes of
2:1 or steeper sods shall be pegged after tamping, at approximately 0.6 metre centres and
close to the center of sods.
Strips sods shall be laid in parallel rows as indicated in Drawings or as required by the
Project Manager. Each strip of sod shall be of width shown in Drawing or approved by
the Project Manager and shall be laid in a shallow trench and firmly tamped until the
surface of the sod is approximately level with the adjacent ground.
Spot sodding shall consist of sod blocks laid as shown on Drawings or as required by the
Project Manager. The piece of sod shall be firmly tamped so that the surfaces of sod
blocks are approximately level with the adjacent ground.
All grassed areas, be it by seeding or by sodding, shall be watered and cared for and
maintained for a minimum period of 3 months in a satisfactory condition until final
inspection and acceptance of the work.
Hydro seeded areas where grass has not taken root and sodded areas where grass has
died, shall be made good by the Contractor by suitably replanting before final
acceptance. At the time of acceptance, areas considered by Engineer as poorly grassed
shall not be measured for payment and the Contractor may be given a further extension
of time for replanting and correction of such areas as required.
502.4 Test and standard of acceptance
The materials shall be tested in accordance with these Specifications and shall meet the
prescribed criteria. The work shall conform to these Specifications and shall meet the
prescribed standard of acceptance.
502.5 Measurement & Payment
a. Measurement
198
The quantity measured for payment, in each method of grassing (i.e. planting/seeding on
soil nailed surface or sodding) shall be the area measured along the slope in Sq.m. and
accepted in place by the Project Manager. Transporting to site, soil mixing to improve
the soil, miscellaneous works, such as preparation of temporary working platforms and
maintenance will not be measured separately, but their cost shall be deemed to be
included in the rate for grassing.
b. Payment
The work measured as above will be paid for at the Contractor’s unit rate for the
particular method of grassing. The payment shall be full compensation for furnishing of
materials, labour, equipment, tools, fertilizer and incidentals necessary to complete the
work and for the supply and placing of timber stakes and top soiling under Section 501
and for all other incidentals that may be required to establish an acceptable cover and to
maintain the grass.
The Pay Items and Pay Units shall be as follows:
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
502(1) Planting/Seeding on nailed surface Square meter
502(2) Sodding/Turfing Square meter
503 GABION WALLS AND MATTRESSES USING WIRE MESH
503.1 Description
This section covers the construction of gabion walls and mattresses for the construction
of retaining walls, lining of channels, revetments, aprons and other anti-erosion structures
to hill slopes, filling slopes, stream banks and etc.
The Gabions/mattresses shall be flexible, box/mattresses shape with galvanized steel wire
mesh cages of rectangular sides, packed with rock and in constructing the
walls/mattresses, as indicated in Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager.
503.2 Materials
Unless otherwise specified the material used shall meet the following requirements.
a) Double twisted hexagonal mesh made of zinc coated mild steel conforming to BS
1052:1980, BS 443:1982.
b) Binding and connecting wire of at least 3.2 mm diameter galvanized to the same
199
standard as the mesh wire.
c) Broken rock for filling baskets shall preferably be of sizes normally varying from
about 100 mm in minimum dimension to about 300 mm in maximum dimension
and they shall be clean, hard and durable, free from weathered pieces and
extraneous matter. The rock shall be reasonably well graded between the two
limiting size
d) Where indicated on the Drawings or ordered by the Project Manager, a layer of
filter fabric, or approved equivalent material shall be placed on the prepared
surface prior to the placing of the gabions. The filter fabric shall be placed as
instructed in vertical strips with a minimum overlap 300 mm and shall be
properly fastened to prevent any movement or slipping during the placing of
gabions.
e) Granular backfill material to Section 801
503.3 Construction Requirements
The hill slopes, filling slopes or stream banks which the Gabion walls are to abut shall be
suitably trimmed and the ground on which the Base of gabion walls is to be constructed
shall be leveled and compacted required.
Where no firm Base layer is specified the ground shall be well compacted and leveled
prior to placing of the gabions as specified in Drawings or as required by the Project
Manager. A thin layer of Nominal single graded aggregates shall be spread over the
compacted soil, if required by the Project Manager. Basket shall, where appropriate, be
maintained square and with an inclination as specified in Drawings or as instructed by
the Project Manager during filling. Internal tie wires shall be inserted and baskets shall be
tensioned.
The wire basket for gabions shall be made out of double twisted hexagonal mesh. The
size of gabion boxes will be 1 m x 1 m x 1 m or as instructed by the Project Manager.
The length shall be multiples of one metre subject to a maximum of 4.0 m. The gabions
shall have diaphragm walls at 1.0 m intervals.
The general Specifications of gabions are as follows:
Thick
ness
(mm)
Mesh
Type
(mm x
mm)
Wire Dia.
(mm)
Stone size
(mm)
D50
(mm)
500
1000
100 x 120
100 x 120
2.70
2.70
120 – 250
120 – 250
190
190
200
The filling of baskets shall be carried out in-situ, unless otherwise directed. This requires
that the empty baskets, open on the top, be positioned on the Base or top of the gabions
and in-filled with the rock pieces in such a manner as to completely fill up the baskets
leaving only the minimum of voids prior to closing and securely tying the lid using wire
of approved gauge. In building the wall the gabions shall be placed with staggered joints
and where so required they shall be tied together using standard of wire.
The cut edges of all mesh used in the construction of gabions, except the bottom edge of
the diaphragms and end panels, shall be selvedge with galvanized wire having a diameter
of at least 0.5 mm more than that of the mesh wire.
The diaphragms and end panels shall be selvedge on the top and vertical sides only.
Sufficient binding and connecting wire shall be supplied with the gabion cages to
perform the connecting operations in accordance to these Specifications. The diameter of
the wire shall be at least 3.2 mm.
The methods of assembly shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions but
the Contractor shall ensure that sufficient connecting wire braces are provided to prevent
deformation of the cages as they are being filled with stone.
It is essential that the corners of the gabions / cages be securely wired together to provide
a uniform surface and to ensure that the structure does not appear as a series of blocks or
panels.
Particular care shall be exercised in filling visible faces of gabion boxes, for which only
selected stones of adequate size shall be used and be so prepacked that a fair faced finish
is obtained. The filling of boxes shall be done in stages in order to prevent deformation
and bulging.
As the wall is being constructed the spaces between the gabions and the slopes shall be
backfilled in stages with granular backfill material after placing the filter behind gabion
wall. After which the granular backfill material shall be compacted well by rodding and
other suitable means approved by the Project Manager without damaging the filter fabric.
The filling of mattresses shall be carried out by spreading, random stones on the first
layer and using selected stones for the top layer so as to present a dry stone-pitch surface.
503.4 Test and standards of acceptance
The materials shall be tested in accordance with these Specifications and shall meet the
prescribed criteria. The work shall conform to these Specifications and shall meet the
prescribed standards of acceptance.
201
503.5 Measurement & Payment
a. Measurement
The gabion walls shall be measured in Cu.m, completed and accepted.
The filter fabric and mattresses shall be measured in Sq.m.
b. Payment
The quantities determine for gabion walls as provided above shall be paid for at the
Contract unit rate which price shall be full compensation for all labour, materials, tools
and incidentals necessary for completion of the work including mesh, assembling, tying,
fixing, staking, tensioning, fill, compacting cutting and shaping the slopes and forming
the ground and preparing the base on which the wall was built.
The Pay Items and Pay Units shall be as follows:
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
503(1) Gabion wall and base preparation using Rubble Cubic meter
503(2) Filter fabric/Geotextile Square meter
504 WOVEN WIRE FENCE
504.1 Description
This work shall consists of construction of safety fences of the type indicated and
constructed in accordance with the Specification and with the dimensions, lines and
levels indicated in Drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager.
504.2 Materials
Unless otherwise specified the material used shall meet the following requirements.
a) Steel section for posts to CS 73 (Ceylon Standards)
b) Woven wire mesh for fences to SLS 407, 793 and 1148 (wire diameter minimum 3
mm)
c) Anti-corrosive paints and enamel paints for steel section
202
504.3 Construction Requirements
Prior to planting the fence posts in the required manner, the ground should be graded
where necessary, so as to provide a neat appearance of the fence line. All the post shall
be set vertically. The posts shall be embedded in concrete and the Contractor shall install
temporary supports as may be required to hold the posts in proper positions, until such
time as the concrete has set sufficiently to hold the posts. Unless otherwise specified a
minimum period of 7 days shall be allowed before such posts are subjected to any stress.
Bracing shall be provided to posts where specified or where required by the Project
Manager.
Woven wire mesh of the type and size required, shall be firmly attached to the fence, a
braced in the manner indicated in the Drawings or directed by the Project Manager. All
woven wire mesh shall be stretched out and shall be installed to the required elevations.
504.4 Test and standards of acceptance
The materials shall be tested in accordance with these Specifications and shall meet the
prescribed criteria. The work shall conform to these Specifications and shall meet the
prescribed standards of acceptance.
504.5 Measurement & Payment
a. Measurement
Unless otherwise specified, fence shall be measured by the length metres as accepted by
the Project Manager.
b. Payment
The unit rate of payment for each item of work shall be full compensation for all labour,
equipment, tools, materials, and incidentals necessary to complete the work including
painting as specified.
The Pay Items and Pay Units shall be as follows:
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
504(1) Woven wire fence (wire diameter minimum 3 mm) Linear meter
203
600 CONCRETE STRUCTURES
601 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES
601.1 Concrete Grades
Concrete Classes shall be replaced by concrete grades defined per BS 5328 as follows;
Table 601-1 – Concrete Grades
Grade Characteristic Strength
(MPa)
C15 15
C20 20
C25 25
C30 30
C40 40
C50 50
The maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be 20 mm for all grades except for grade
C15 for which 40 mm shall be permitted.
601.2 Minimum Cement Content and Water/Cement Ratio
The minimum cement content and water / cement ratio for different grades of concrete
shall be as follows:
Table 601-2 – Minimum Cement Content and Water / Cement Ratio
Type of
Concrete
Minimum
cement
content (kg /
m3)
Maximum
free
water/cement
ratio
Unreinforc
ed 275 0.65
Reinforced 300 0.60
Pre-
stressed 325 0.55
The cement content shall not exceed 550 kg/m3
204
601.3 Volume Proportioning of Concrete
Volume proportioning (Batching) shall not be permitted for structural concrete except for
grade 20 and under.
601.4 Workability of Concrete
The concrete shall be of suitable workability for full compaction to be obtained. The
slump shall be measured in accordance with BS 1881.
Table 601-3 – Workability of Concrete
Use of Concrete Nominal
Slump
Permitted
Deviation
Reinforced Concrete in slabs, beams,
walls, precast components and columns
75mm 士 25
Reinforced Concrete i slabs, beams,
walls, precast components and columns
containing congested reinforcement
125 mm 士 25
601.5 Chloride and Sulphate Content
The Chloride and Sulphate contents in concrete from all sources shall conform to values
shownin the Table below:
Table 601-4 – Chloride and Sulphate Contents in Concrete
601.6 Trial Mixes
Type or Use of cement
Maximum total
Chloride content
expressed
Chloride ions by
mass of cement
Maximum total acid
soluble sulphate
content expressed as
SO3 by mass of
cement
Pre-stressed concrete or
steam cured reinforced
concrete
0.1 % 4 %
Concrete made with Sulphate
resisting Portland cement to
BS 4027
0.2 % 4 %
All other 0.3 % 4 %
205
The Contractor shall prepare trial mixes having workability, strength, and surface finish
criteria, to satisfy the Project Manager regarding these qualities. The trial mixes shall be
made and compacted in the presence of the Project Manager; using the same type of plant
and equipment as will be used for the works. The concreting plant and means of transport
employed to make the trial mix and to transport them representative distances shall be
similar to the corresponding plant and transport to be used in the Works.
From each trial mix, test cubes shall be taken as follows. For each mix a set of six cubes
shall be made from each of three consecutive batches. Three from each set of six shall be
tested at an age of 28 days and three at an earlier age approved by the Project Manager.
The cubes shall be made, cured, stored, transported and tested in compression in
accordance with BS 1881. The tests shall be carried out in a laboratory approved by the
Project Manager.
From the same mix as that from which the test cubes are made, the workability of the
concrete shall be determined by the Slump Test in accordance with BS 1881 or other
method approved by the Project Manager. The remainder of the mix shall be cast in a
metal mould and compacted. After 24 hours the sides of the mould shall be struck and the
surface examined in order to satisfy the Project Manager that an acceptable surface can
be obtained with this mix
A trial mix for a particular grade shall be accepted when the average strength of the nine
cubes, tested at 28 days exceeds the specified characteristic strength by the current
margin minus 3.5 MPa. In addition the consistency shall be to the satisfaction of the
Project Manager.
The characteristic strength of the various classes of concrete shall be determined as soon
as the first 30 test results of each class become available.
The characteristic strength shall be calculated by the equation:
X0 = X̅ - kS
Where: Xo : characteristic strength,
X̅ : mean or average of the series of results
k : 1.64.
S : standard deviation given by the equation:
S = {Ʃ–(X- X̅)2 / (N - 1)}1/2
Where X : the individual result
N : the total number of results
When a proposed mix has been approved, no variations shall be made in the mix
206
proportions, or in the type, size, grading zone or source of any of the constituents without
the consent of the Project Manager who may require further trial mixes to be made before
any such variation is approved. Until the results of trial mixes for a particular grade have
been approved by the Project Manager, no concrete of the relevant grade shall be placed
in the works.
When the Contractor intends to purchase factory-made precast concrete units, trial mixes
may be dispensed with provided that evidence is given to satisfy the Project Manager that
the factory regularly produces concrete, which complies with the Specification. The
evidence shall include details of mix proportions, water-cement ratios, slump and
strengths obtained at 28 days.
601.7 Sampling and Testing
The Contractor shall take samples of the concrete for testing. The number frequency and
location shall be decided by the Project Manager.
Unless otherwise requested by the Project Manager, cube tests shall be made at the rate
of 1 set of cubes per 10m3 of concrete. The times of day at which samples are taken shall
be chosen at random. At least one sample shall be taken on each day that a particular
grade is used.
The procedure for sampling and making cubes and testing shall be carried out strictly in
the manner described in BS 1881. In addition, the Project Manager may order at his own
discretion, additional samples of concrete to be cured at the job site, in order to verify
actual strengths obtained.
For cubes tested at an age of 28 days the cube strength shall conform to the following
requirements:
(a) The average strength determined from any group of four consecutive test cubes shall
exceed the specified characteristic strength by at least 0.5 times the current margin
(b) Each individual test result shall be greater than 85% of the specified characteristic
strength.
If the average strength of any group of four consecutive test cubes fails to meet the first
requirement (a) then all concrete mixed in all batches from the first batch to the last batch
from which samples were taken to make the test cubes, together with all the intervening
batches shall be deemed not to comply with the strength requirements.
If only one cube fails to meet the second requirement (b) then that result may be
considered to represent only the particular batch of concrete from which that cube was
taken.
207
The Contractor shall take such remedial action as the Project Manager may order,
including the removal of the relevant concrete, and shall, before proceeding with the
concreting, submit for the Project Manager's approval details of the action proposed to
ensure that the concrete complies with the requirements of the Specification.
Acceptance criteria shall be that the average 28 days compressive strength of 3 cubes
exceeds the characteristic strength of the concrete and that the difference between the
greatest and least strength is not more than 20 percent of the average.
The 7 days test results shall generally be made use of as an indicator of the strength at 28
days and unless otherwise decided by the Project Manager, no decision regarding non
acceptance of the concrete shall be made using these results.
601.8 Materials
a. Portland Cement
Cement shall conform to the provisions of the following British Standards or the
corresponding Sri Lanka Standard:
BS 12 Ordinary Portland Cement (ordinary and rapid hardening)
BS– 146 Portland - blast furnace cement
BS 4027 Sulphate-resisting Portland cement
BS 1370 Low heat Portland cement
The Contractor shall provide suitable means of storing and protecting the cement against
dampness. Fully covered storage areas with floors protected from rising dampness shall
be provided. Bagged or bulk cement which has become partially set or which contains
lumps of caked cement shall be rejected. The use of cement reclaimed from discarded or
used bags will not be permitted.
b. Water
The water used in mixing or curing concrete shall be tested by methods described in BS
3148. All water shall be clean and free from salt, oil or acid, vegetable or other substance
injurious to the finished product. Sources of water shall be maintained at such a depth
and the water shall be withdrawn in such a manner as to exclude silt, mud, grass or other
foreign materials. Water from the sea or tidal rivers shall not be used.
Potable water supplied by the National Water Supply and Drainage Board (NWSDB)
shall normally be acceptable.
208
c. Admixtures
Admixtures shall not be used without the written approval of the Project Manager. The
Contractor shall submit technical data of any admixtures he proposes to use to the Project
Manager at least 28 days prior to the date of placing orders for such giving particulars of
the structure on which he intends to use such admixtures.
Admixtures containing Calcium Chloride in any form are not permitted.
d. Aggregate
Unless otherwise specified or agreed by the Project Manager aggregate shall comply with
the requirements of BS 882, (aggregates from natural sources for concrete, including
granolithic).
(i) Fine Aggregate
The grading of fine aggregate when determined by a test according to BS 882 shall be
within the limits of one of the grading zones given in the Table below:
The fine aggregate shall be described as fine aggregate of the grading zone into w–hich it
falls - e.g. BS 882, Grading Zone C, M, F or Overall.
Table 601-5 – Grading Limits for Fine Aggregate
Sieve
Size
Percentage by mass passing BS Sieve
Overall
limits
Additional limits for grading
C M F
10.00 mm 100 - - -
5.00 mm 89 to 100 - - -
2.36 mm 60 to 100 60 to 100 65 to 100 80 to 100
1.18 mm 30 to 100 30 to 90 45 to 100 70 to 100
600 μm 15 to 100 15 to 54 25 to 80 55 to 100
300 μm 5 to 7 to 40 5 to 48 5 to 70
150 μm 0 to 15 - - -
NOTE: Individual sands may comply with the requirements of more than one
grading. Alternatively, some sands may satisfy the overall limits but may not
fall within any one of the additional limits C, M or F. In this case and where
sands do not comply with the above table an agreed grading envelope may also
be used provided that the supplier can satisfy the Project Manager that such
materials can produce concrete of the required quality.
209
(ii) Coarse Aggregate
The grading of coarse aggregate, when determined by a test according to BS 882 shall be
within the limits of one of the grading given in Table below and the nominal maximum
size of aggregate shall be 20 mm for reinforced concrete and 40 mm for un-reinforced
concrete.
For the control of Alkali-Silica reaction non-reactive aggregates shall be used. Provided
they are not contaminated with opal, tridymite or cristobiline or contain more than 20%
(by weight) of chert, flint or chalcedony. The following types of aggregate are considered
to be non-reactive Dolerite, Dolomite, Feldspar, Gneiss, Granite, Limestone, Schist and
Tuff. On no occasion shall the amount of equivalent sodium oxide exceed 3.0 kg in any
cubic metre of concrete.
The Project Manager will permit hand broken stone to be used as coarse aggregate for
Grade C15 concrete.
Table 601-6 – Grading Limits for Coarse Aggregate
Sieve Size
(mm)
Percentage by mass passing BS
Sieve for nominal sizes Single-
sized aggregate
20 mm 5 mm
50.0 - -
37.5 100 -
20.0 85 to 100 -
14.0 0 to 70 -
10.0 0 to 25 100
5.0 0 to 5 45 to 100
2.36 - 0 to 30
All aggregates shall be stored in such a way that they shall be kept free from contact with
deleterious matter. Aggregates of different sizes shall be stored separately and in such a
way as to avoid segregation in each stockpile.
The Contractor shall provide copies of the results of routine control tests carried out by
the aggregate producer and obtain the Project Manager's approval prior to placing orders.
601.9 Equipment and Tools
a. General
Equipment and tools necessary for handling material and performing the work, and
satisfactory to the Project Manager as to design, capacity and mechanical condition, shall
210
be at the site of work before work is started.
If any equipment is not maintained in full working order or if the equipment as used by
the Contractor proves inadequate to obtain the results prescribed, such equipment shall be
improved or other satisfactory equipment substituted or added at the direction of the
Project Manager.
b. Mixers
(a) General
All concrete shall be mixed in batch mixers manufactured in accordance with BS
1305 or tested in accordance with BS 3963. It may be mixed at the site of
construction, at a central plant or in transit. Each mixer shall have attached to it in a
prominent place ’a manufacturer's plate showing the capacity of the drum in terms of
volume of mixed concrete and the speed of rotation of the mixing drum.
(b) Mixers at site of construction
Mixers at the site shall be approved drum-type capable of combining the aggregate,
cement and water into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass within the specified
mixing period and of discharging the mixture without segregation. The mixer shall be
equipped with a suitable charging hopper, water storage, and a water-measuring
device, accurate within 1%. Controls shall be so arranged that the water can be
applied only while the mixer is being charged.
The discharge lever shall lock automatically until the batch has been mixed the
required time after all materials are in the mixer. Suitable equipment for discharging
the concrete in the form shall be provided. The mixer shall be cleaned at suitable
intervals. The pick-up and throw over blades in the drum shall be replaced when they
have lost 10% of their depth.
601.10 Placing Concrete
a. General
Concrete shall be placed in such a manner as to avoid segregation and the displacement
of reinforcing bars and shall be spread in horizontal layers where practicable. Concrete
shall be placed where necessary inside forms by hand shovels and in no instance shall
vibrators be so manipulated to transport concrete inside formwork. Care shall be taken to
prevent mortar from spattering on forms and reinforcing steel and from drying ahead of
the final covering with concrete. Where spattering has occurred, the forms and steel shall
211
be cleaned with wire brushes or scrapers before concrete is placed around steel or in
forms. Troughs, pipes or short chutes used as aids in placing concrete shall be positioned
in such a manner that segregation of the concrete will not occur. All chutes, troughs, and
pipes shall be kept clean and free from coating of hardened concrete or mortar.
Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by vibration, unless otherwise agreed by the
Project Manager, during the operation of placing, and thoroughly worked around the
reinforcement, tendons or duct formers, around embedded fixtures and into corners of the
formwork to form a solid mass free of voids. When vibrators are used to compact the
concrete, vibration shall be applied continuously during the placing of each batch of
concrete until the expulsion of air has practically ceased and in a manner that does not
promote segregation of the ingredients.
Vibration shall not be applied by way of the reinforcement. Where vibrators of the
immersion type are used, contact with reinforcement and all inserts shall be avoided as
far as is practicable.
Concrete shall not be subject to disturbance between 4 hours and 24 hours after
compaction except with the agreement of the Project Manager. Wherever vibration has to
be applied externally, the design of formwork and disposition of vibrators shall ensure
efficient compaction and the avoidance of surface blemishes.
There shall be no excess water on the top surface on completion of compaction.
Concrete shall not be dropped freely over a vertical distance of more than 1.20 metres
Concrete shall be placed continuously throughout each section of the structure or
between joints if shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager. If, in an
emergency it is necessary to stop placing concrete before a section is completed,
bulkheads shall be placed as the Project Manager may direct and the resulting joint shall
be deemed a construction joint.
b. Concrete Columns
Concrete in columns or bents shall be placed in one continuous operation unless
otherwise permitted by the Project Manager.
c. Walls, Piers, etc
Where walls, columns, struts, posts and other such structural members allow horizontal
construction joints, concrete shall not be placed on top of other concrete which has not
been allowed to set for 12 hours or more.
Work shall not be discontinued within 450 mm of the top of any face, unless provision
212
has been made for a coping less than 450 mm thick, in which case, if permitted by the
Project Manager, the construction joint may be made at the underside of the coping.
d. Culverts
The slabs of box culverts shall be placed for their full depth in one layer and allowed to
set not less than 12 hours before any additional work is done on them. For culverts of
exceptional length under high embankment details of construction joints are shown on
the Drawings. The entire length of slabs between indicated construction joints shall be
placed for their full depth or layer and allowed to set for not less than 12 hours before
any additional work is done on these lengths.
Before concrete is placed in sidewalls, bottom slabs shall be c1eaned of all shavings,
sticks, sawdust and other extraneous material.
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager for approval his proposals for
pouring culvert walls before commencing culvert construction. Concrete shall not be
placed in layers more than one metre high relative to the concrete already placed.
Deposition shall proceed in a systematic manner.
e. Depositing Concrete Under Water
Concrete shall not be deposited in water except with the approval of the Project Manager
and with his immediate supervision and in this case the method of placing shall be by
tremie and as defined below.
Concrete deposited in water shall contain 10% by weight extra cement to that approved
by the Project Manager for the grade of concrete used. To prevent segregation, it shall be
carefully placed in a compact mass, in its final position, by means of a tremie tube or
pipe, or a bottom dump bucket and shall not be disturbed after being deposited. Special
care must be exercised to maintain still water at the point of deposit. Concrete shall not
be placed in running water. The method of depositing concrete shall be so regulated as to
produce approximately horizontal surfaces.
Concrete seals shall be placed in one continuous operation. When a tremie tube or pipe is
used it shall consist of a tube or pipe not less than 250 mm in diameter. All joints in the
tube shall be watertight. The means of supporting the tremie tube shall be such as to
permit free movement of the discharge end over the entire top of the concrete and to
permit it being lowered rapidly when necessary to choke off or retard the flow. The
tremie tube shall be filled by a method that will prevent washing out of the concrete. The
discharge end shall be completely submerged in concrete at all times and the tremie shall
be kept full.
When concrete is placed with a bottom dump bucket, the bucket shall have a capacity of
213
not less than one half cubic metre and the top of the bucket shall be open. The bottom
door shall open freely downward and outward when tripped. The bucket shall be
completely filled and slowly lowered to avoid backwash. It shall not be dumped until it
rests on the surface upon which the concrete is to be deposited and when empty be
withdrawn slowly until well above the concrete. The slump of the concrete used shall be
maintained between 100 and 200 mm.
Dewatering shall proceed only when the concrete seal is considered strong enough to
withstand any pressures to be exerted upon it. This time will be decided by the Project
Manager.
All laitance or other unsatisfactory material shall be removed from the exposed surface
by scraping, jetting, chipping or by other means, which will not injure the seal unduly.
f. Construction Joints
A concreting schedule shall be prepared for each completed structure and the Project
Manager shall approve the locations of construction joint on this concreting schedule.
These locations shall not be altered, unless in case of emergency, when construction
joints shall be positioned as directed by the Project Manager.
At horizontal construction joints, gauge strips 20 to 30 mm square shall be placed inside
the forms along all exposed surfaces to give the joints straight lines. Before placing fresh
concrete, the surfaces of all construction joints shall be hammered with a sharp hand tool
until the aggregate is exposed, cleaned and a small quantity of neat cement slurry added.
At the same time forms shall be checked to see that they are tight against the concrete
already in place. Concrete in substructures shall be placed in such manner that all
horizontal construction joints will be truly horizontal.
Where vertical construction joints are necessary, reinforcing bars shall extend across the
joint in such a manner as to make the structure monolithic. Special care shall be taken to
avoid construction joints through wing walls.
g. Precast Concrete Units
When the method of manufacture has been approved, no further changes shall be made
without the approval of the Project Manager
The Contractor shall inform the Project Manager in advance of the date of
commencement of manufacture and casting of each type of unit.
A copy of all 28-day cube test results relating to the work shall be sent to the Project
214
Manager as soon as they become available.
h. Concrete shall not be pumped or discharged via Aluminium alloy conduits or
chutes.
Concrete shall not be subject to disturbance between 4 hours and 24 hours after
compaction except that re-compaction of the upper layers of deep lifts to prevent or annul
settlement cracking may be carried out.
601.11 Curing
All concrete surfaces shall be kept wet for at least 7 days after placing. Newly exposed
concreted surface shall be covered with wet burlap immediately after final finishing of
the surface. This material shall remain in place for the full curing period or may be
removed and replaced with sand when the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent
marring. In both cases the materials shall be kept thoroughly wet for the entire curing
period. All other surfaces if not protected by forms shall be kept thoroughly wet, either
by sprinkling or by the use of wet burlap until the end of the curing period. If timber
forms are allowed to remain in place during the curing period, they shall be kept moist at
all times to prevent the opening of joints.
’The Contractor's proposals for the use of liquid membrane curing compound shall be
subject to the approval of the Project Manager.
601.12 Removal of Formwork and False work
a. Time of removal
The minimum period before striking forms shall be as shown in Table below subject to
mandatory Engineer's approval. The Project Manager's approval shall not relieve the
Contractor of responsibility for the safety of the work. Blocks and bracing shall be
removed at the same time as the forms and in no case shall any portion of the forms be
left in the concrete.
Table 601-7 – Minimum period before striking formwork
Vertical forms of walls, columns
beams and similar components
24
hours
Soffit forms to culvert top slab
(props left in)
8 days
Props to culvert top slab 21 days
Soffit formwork to beams (Props
left in)
8 days
215
Propos to beams 21 days
Forms used on exposed vertical faces shall remain in place for periods, which shall be
determined by the Project Manager.
False work and forms under slabs, beams, and arches shall remain in place for 21 days
after the day on which placing of concrete were completed. When high early strength
cement is used, forms for all structures may be removed after less than 14 days but only
with the written approval of the Project Manager who will decide the time for removal as
a result of tests. Formwork and false work for the whole of special structures shall remain
in place until such time as the Project Manager will decide after all concrete has been
poured.
b. Patching
As soon as the forms are removed, all wire or metal devices used for securing the
formwork which project from or appear on the surface of the finished concrete shall be
removed or cut back at least 25 mm from the finished surface of the concrete. All holes
and pockets so formed shall be filled with cement mortar mixed in the same proportions
as the fine aggregate to cement of the concrete mix used for that particular section of the
structure, after the surface to be patched has been thoroughly cleaned and wetted to
receive the patch
c. Cause for rejection
Excessive honeycombing shall be sufficient to cause rejection of portions of the structure
containing this honeycombing. The Contractor, on receipt of written orders from the
Project Manager, shall remove and rebuild such portions of the structure to Engineer’s
requirements.
601.13 Finishing Concrete
All concrete surfaces exposed in the completed work shall comply with the requirements
where the Drawings indicate otherwise directed by the Project Manager.
601.14 Tests and Standards of Acceptance
The materials shall be tested in accordance with these Specifications and shall meet the
prescribed criteria.
The work shall conform to these Specifications and shall meet the prescribed standards of
acceptance.
601.15 Measurement and Payment
216
a. Measurement
Concrete shall be measured by the number of cubic metres complete in place and
accepted. In computing quantities the dimensions used shall be those shown on the
Drawings or ordered in writing by the Project Manager but the measurement shall not
include any concrete used for the construction of temporary works. No deduction from
the measured quantity shall be made for holes, pockets, sockets and the like not
exceeding 0.15 cubic metres each in volume, reinforcement or individual fillets,
chamfers, splays, drips, rebates, recesses, grooves and the like of 100 mm total girth or
less when measured over the faces in contact with the formwork.
b. Payment
Concrete work measured as provided above for the grade or grades of concrete specified,
shall be paid for at the Contract unit price per cubic metre for concrete as detailed below.
The payment shall be full compensation for furnishing, testing, placing and curing all
materials, including labour, tools, equipment, etc., incidental thereto including the
provision and construction of drainage falls and systems and weep holes, the forming of
holes, pockets and sockets and the like not exceeding 0.15 cubic metres each in volume,
forming construction joints and unformed surfaces. Separate payment will not be made
for testing of concrete mixes the cost of which shall be included in the rate for concrete
works.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
601(1) Grade C 15 Concrete Cubic meter
601(2) Grade C 20 Concrete Cubic meter
601(3) Grade C 25 Concrete Cubic meter
602 STEEL REINFORCEMENT FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES
602.1 Description
This work shall consists of furnishing, fabricating and placing of reinforcement of the
specified grade and type in concrete structures in accordance with these Specifications
and in conformity with the details shown in the Drawings or as approved by the Project
Manager.
602.2 Materials
Steel reinforcement used shall meet the requirement of the followings:
a. Hot rolled MS bars to CS or SLS 26
217
b. Cold worked high yield steel bars to CS 375
c. Steel fabric to CS 95
d. Hot-rolled and cold-worked steel bars shall comply with BS-4449 except that no bar
shall contain a flash weld.
e. Hard-drawn mild steel wire shall comply with BS-4482.
g. Steel fabric reinforcement shall comply with BS-4483 and shall be delivered to Site
in flat mats or pre-bent.
602.3 Construction Requirements
a. Protection and Storage
Reinforcement shall be clean and free from loose rust and mill scale, dirt, oil, grease and
paint at the time of fixing in position and subsequent concreting; Reinforcement for
structures shall be handled and stored in a manner that will prevent deformation.
b. Cutting and Bending
Bars shall be cut and bent cold by applying a slow, even pressure with equipment and
methods approved by the Project Manager to the dimensions given in the Bar Bending
Schedules given in the relevant Drawings.
Bends and hooks shall conform to the requirements given in the Drawings or established
by the Project Manager.
The bars shall be cut and bent within the tolerances given in BS 4466. The Contractor
shall be responsible for the correct fit of the bars and achieving required cover as given
on the Drawings or established by the Project Manager.
Any bar that has already been bent shall not be re-bent at the location of the original bend
without the approval of the Project Manager.
c. Placing and Fixing of Reinforcement
All reinforcement bars shall be placed in positions shown in Drawings and shall be
firmly held in position, with the specified spacing, prior to concreting operations using
necessary wire ties at bar intersections, spacer bars, steel chairs of approved type or by
other approved means. Wire ties shall be black annealed M.S or G.I. wire, not less than
1.0 mm in diameter and shall be firmly tied and folded so that they do not project into
concrete cover region. The adequacy of supports and ties to secure the reinforcement
218
properly shall be subject to the approval of the Project Manager. Layers of bars shall be
separated by spacer bars, pre-cast mortar blocks or other approved devices. All horizontal
and vertical reinforcement shall be supported on motor bocks, of approved shape
conforming to cover requirements, with tie wires embedded in them, made out of 1: 1 ½
or 1:2 Cement sand mix. Supports which are in contact with the external face of the
concrete shall all be mortar blocks. The use of small stones or wooden blocks shall not be
permitted. As far as possible, bars of full length shall be used. In case this is not possible
splicing of bars shall be done as specified in the Drawings or as directed by the Project
Manager. (All splices shall have a lap length at least equal to the anchorage length
required to develop the stress in the smaller of the bars to be lapped). Laps and joints
shall be made only where shown on the Drawings or with the approval of the Project
Manager.
Where welding is specified or approved by the Project Manager, as an alternative, the
reinforcement shall be butt welded by the metal arc process using covered electrodes,
complying with standard Specifications for such work. Where screwed joints are
specified for reinforcement they shall be butt joints made by using screwed coupling
boxes of approved types capable of developing strength at least 10% more than that of
the bar which is to be jointed, and the joint as a whole shall be capable of developing the
same strength as the coupling. Before the Project Manager approves the welding of
reinforcement or screwed joints of reinforcement, the Contractor shall submit such
samples as the Project Manager may require for testing.
Substitution with different size of bars or with different type of steel will be permitted
only with the prior approval of the Project Manager
No concreting shall commence until the reinforcement have been inspected and approved
by the Project Manager.
Reinforcement after being placed in position shall be maintained in a clean condition
until completely embedded in concrete. Special care shall be exercised to prevent any
displacement of reinforcement in concrete already placed. All bars protruding from
concrete and to which bars are to be spliced and which are likely to be exposed for a
considerably long period shall be protected by the a thick coat of neat cement grout.
602.4 Tests and Standards of Acceptance
The materials shall be tested in accordance with these Specifications and shall meet the
prescribed criteria.
The work shall conform to these Specifications and shall meet the prescribed standards of
acceptance.
219
602.5 Measurement and Payment
a. Measurement
The quantity of reinforcement shall be computed by weight in kilogram for each types of
material used and accepted as shown in the Drawings, provided that the quantity shall not
include the reinforcement in any item of work the basis of payment for which includes
the reinforcement. Lengths shall include hooks at ends. Wastage over laps, coupling
welded joints, spacer bars and annealed steel wire for binding shall not be measured and
cost of these items shall be deemed to be included in the rate for reinforcement.
b. Payment
This works measured as provided above, will be paid for at the unit rate per kilogram of
reinforcement for each type and size of steel. The payment shall be full compensation for
furnishing and placing of steel and for all labour, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete the work prescribed in this section.
The Pay Items and Pay Units will be as follows:
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
602(1
) Tor Steel reinforcement Kilogram
603 RANDOM RUBBLE MASONRY
603.1 Description
This work shall consist of construction, in Random Rubble Masonry (RRM), of walls,
drains and other structures. Work shall be carried out in accordance with this
Specification and with the lines and dimensions shown in the Drawings, or as directed by
the Project Manager.
603.2 Materials
Stones used in Random Rubble Masonry shall be obtained from approved quarries, and
be approved by the Project Manager. They shall be hard, durable, fresh rock free from
fractures and other imperfections, and shall generally be of maximum dimension not
exceeding 300 mm.
Through stones shall be specially made approximately to square Cross-section, 150 x 150
220
mm minimum dimensions, and of minimum length 600 mm or the thickness of the wall
whichever is less. They may be pre-cast concrete units, if so specified.
Cement mortar used shall conform to requirements of Sub-section 802.2 of the
specification.
603.3 Construction Requirements
a. Random rubble masonry using cement mortar
All stones, chips and spalls used shall have clean surfaces to facilitate adherence of
mortar to them and shall be wetted before laying. Every stone shall be set flush in cement
mortar of 1:5 or any other approved mix proportions, and there shall be no dry work or
hollow spaces left. Smaller stones shall be used to roughly fit the spaces between the
larger stones, and chips and spalls shall be wedged in where necessary to prevent thick
beds of mortar. The stones in each course shall overlay the joints in the preceding course
as far as practicable.
A sufficient number of through stones shall be used in building walls. At least one
through stone shall be built into walls at intervals of 2 m horizontally and 600 mm
vertically. They shall run through the full thickness of the walls which are up to 600 mm
in thickness. In case of walls exceeding 600 mm in nominal thickness, more than one
through stone shall be used to run though the full thickness of the wall. In such cases the
overlaps shall not be less than 150 mm.
Where the faces of walls are to be plastered, their mortar joints shall be raked to depths
of 12 to 20 mm to form a key, and the plastering shall be done using cement mortar of
specified proportions and to the specified thicknesses. The faces which are not to be
plastered shall be provided with struck off mortar joints unless otherwise specified. In the
latter case selected stones shall be used with straight edges as far as practicable, to
provide close fitting mortar joints of uniform width not exceeding 20mm. The bushings
of the stones shall not project more than 25mm from the plane of the joints.
Where pointing of joints is specified it shall be carried out as given in the Drawings or as
directed.
Vertical construction joints in walls shall be avoided and at horizontal or sloping
construction joints, the mortar in the last course at the joint shall be omitted, for at least
half the nominal thickness, to be later placed with the succeeding course of masonry.
When placing rubble masonry on or against construction joins all laitance shall be
removed from exposed hardened mortar surfaces; and feather edges and hardened mortar
shall be removed from exposed stone surfaces.
221
When rubble masonry is placed against a fill or excavation, surface irregularities in such
surfaces shall be filled with stone chips, spalls or other free draining materials. Drains
and formed weep holes shall be constructed as shown win the Drawings or as directed by
the Project Manager.
All rubble masonry work shall be maintained in constantly wert condition for a period of
at least 3 days commencing from the time of final setting of the cement.
b. Dry Random Rubble Masonry
Larger stones shall be set in such a manner that they are interlocked with adjacent stones
and spalls, and chips shall be wedged into the resulting hollow spaces using a hammer
where necessary. Bushings of the stones shall not project more than 25mm from the face
of the walls. The stones in each course shall overlay the joints in the preceding course as
far as practicable. The faces of the wall shall be constructed with stones having straight
edges to provide close fitting edges. Through stones where specified shall be used as
indicated in subsection 603.3(a).
603.4 Tests and Standards of Acceptance
The materials shall be tested in accordance with these Specifications and shall meet the
prescribed criteria. The work shall conform to theses Specifications and shall meet the
prescribed standards of acceptance.
603.5 Measurement and Payment
a. Measurement
Dry RR masonry shall be measured in Cu.m of completed and accepted work.
RRM using cement mortar and Dry RR masonry shall be measured separately in Cu.m of
completed and accepted work.
Work of plastering shall be measured in Sq.m of completed and accepted work. No
separate measurement for pointing work.
b. Payment
The unit rate of payment for each item of work shall be full compensation for all
materials, labour, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
222
No separate payment will be made for necessary trimming of local voids in the excavated
or filled surface against which rubble masonry is placed.
The Pay Items and Pay Units shall be as follows;
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
603(1) RR Masonry using cement mortar Cubic meter
603(2) Dry RR Masonry Cubic meter
603(3) Plastering Square meter
604 FORMWORK FOR STRUCTURES
604.1 Description
This work shall consist of providing all temporary or permanent forms and moulds
required casting concrete, together with all temporary construction required for their
support which include props, staging, centering, scaffolding and temporary construction
including piles where necessary.
This work shall be carried out in accordance with these Specifications and with the
shape, dimensions and surface finish as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Project Manager.
604.2 Materials
All formwork shall be of timber, metal or any other material approved by the Project
Manager
Timber for forms shall generally be of approved quality, well-seasoned and of uniform
thickness, sound, free from warps, loose knots. Whist, wavy edges, saps and shakes or
other defects affecting the strength of formwork and appearance of the finished structure,
where so required the surface of the timber shall be suitably dressed
Metal sheets for forms shall be free from rust and dents with no surface blemishes that
will impair the concrete surface finished
Supports and scaffolding shall be of metal, sawn timber, round timber or of any other
material approved by the Project Manager.
223
604.3 Construction Requirements
a. False work
Temporary staging shall be provided by the Contractor to enable the constructional
operations to be performed in the required sequences and in a safe manner
The false work shall be properly designed and constructed, to provide the necessary
rigidity and to carry the loads which it will be required to support. Where necessary, it
shall also include safe walkways to enable the Project Manager to inspect the formwork,
reinforcement and concreting. Complete details of the arrangements proposed shall be
submitted to the Project Manager for his approval.
b. Construction of formwork
All formwork shall be so constructed that there shall be no loss of material from the fresh
concrete. Forms shall be mortar tight and shall be made sufficiently rigid by the use if
ties and bracing to prevent any displacement or sagging and shall be capable of
withstanding all incidentals loading during concreting.
Formwork shall be such that hardened concrete shall be in the position and of the shape,
dimensions and surface finish described in the Contract.
Where internal ties are permitted they or their removable parts shall be extracted without
damage to the concrete to a depth of at least 25 mm from the finished concrete surface
and resulting holes filled with mortar. No permanently embedded metal nuts shall have
less than 25 mm cover from the finished concrete surface.
Formwork shall be constructed so that the side shutters of members can be removed
without disturbing the soffit shutters, and if the Contractor wishes to leave some of the
props in place when the soffit shutters are removed. These props shall not be disturbed
during the striking. When specified the detailed arrangements of the props shall be
submitted in advance to the Project Manager, for his prior approval.
c. Formed surface and finish
Surface shall be finished smooth or rough as specified. Normally, exposed surfaces shall
be finished smooth. Where smooth finish is required, the forms shall be made of dressed
timber with or without form loner approved by the Project Manager or shall be of metal.
Where metal forms are used, all bolts and reverts shall be counter sunk necessary and
well ground to provide a smooth, plane surface. For surfaces that are not designated to be
finished smooth sawn timber without dressing (rough timber) may be used
224
d. Re-use of formwork
Where formwork has to be re-used the shape, strength, rigidity water tightness and
surface smoothness of the reused forms shall be maintained at all times. Any warped or
bulged timber shall be resized before being used; Formwork which is unsatisfactory in
any respect shall not be reused.
e. Preparation of formwork before concreting
Immediately before concreting, the forms shall be thoroughly cleaned either by water
jetting or by any other suitable method, temporary openings being provided for the
purpose. The inside surfaces of the forms shall then, if necessary, be coated with
approved materials such as mould oil to prevent adhesion of the concrete. This material
must not come into contact with the reinforcement.
f. Inspection by Engineer prior to placing concrete
No concrete shall be placed until the Project Manager has inspected and approved the
formwork, false work and reinforcement.
g. Removal of formwork
The Project Manager shall be informed in advance as to when the Contractor intends to
strike any formwork
The minimum period between concreting and the removal of forms shall be as follows:
Sides of beams, walls, columns - 01 day
Soffit of secondary slabs (Propos left in) - 04 days
Soffit of main slabs (Propos left in) - 08 days
Soffit of beams (Propos left in) - 08 days
Removal of props - Secondary slabs - 10 days
Removal of props – Beams and main slabs - 21 days
The periods in the above table are given as a guide and based on average weather
conditions and the ordinary Portland cement. They shall be increased in areas of
extremely cold weather unless otherwise directed by the Project Manager, and may be
changed, if other types of cement or additives are used, subject to the Project Manager’s
approval.
604.4 Measurement and Payment
a. Measurement
Where it is stipulated in the Contract that formwork will be paid for separately,
measurement for formwork shall be taken in sq.m of the area of concrete for each type of
finished surface in smooth or rough finish.
225
Where it is not specifically stated in the description of the items that formwork will be
paid for separately, the rate for pre-stressed and of reinforced cement concrete items shall
be deemed to include the cost of all formwork.
b. Payment
The rate for formwork, where this is provided as a separate item, shall include the cost of
all materials, labour, tools and plant hire required for construction and removal of forms
as described above and also for framing required for properly supporting the members for
at least the periods specified under 604.3 (g) unless otherwise specified.
The pay items and pay units will be as follows:
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
604(1) Formwork smooth finish Square meter
604(2) Formwork rough finish Square meter
605 HOT DIPPED GALVANIZEDMILD STEEL DOWELS
605.1 Description
The work shall consist of providing hot dipped galvanized mild steel dowels supplied,
fixed and grouted at fixed ends as per these Specifications and Drawings or as instructed
by the Project Manager.
605.2 Material
The dowels shall be of mild steel having mechanical and physical properties specified in
section 602.
The grouting shall be of Portland cement and shall confirm to Sub-section 802.1.
605.3 Construction Requirements
The fixing of dowels shall be done as shown in the Drawings. The dowels shall be
inserted into the holes (hole diameter 1.25 to 1.5 times of the dowel diameter) to the
depth specified in the drawing and grouted well.
Hot-dip galvanize for dowels in conformance with requirements of AS1214 (Australian
226
standard for hot dip Galvanized coatings on threaded fasteners) and AS1650 (Australian
standard for coupling assembly) to a minimum coating thickness of 85 μm.
605.4 Tests and Standards of Acceptance
The materials shall be tested in accordance with these Specifications and shall meet the
prescribed standards of acceptance.
605.5 Measurement and Payment
a. Measurement
The dowels will be measured for payment by the linear meter length provided in the
finished work and as accepted by the Project Manager. The length will be calculated as
marked on the Drawings.
b. Payment
This work measured as provided above will be paid for at the contract unit price for this
item. Such price and payment constitute full compensation for all material, galvanizing,
drilling, grouting, labour (inclusive of drilling), tools and equipment, scaffolding work,
platforms and incidentals, needed to complete all works. The complete work includes
work associated in the Drawings, Bills of Quantities or elsewhere in the specifications.
The pay item and Pay unit shall be as follows.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
605(1) Supply and installed (specify dia.) hot dipped
galvanized Mild steel dowels Linear meter
227
700 QUALITY CONTROL OF WORK
701 QUALITY CONTROL PLAN
The Contractor shall prepare a Quality Control Plan which shall detail quality control
procedures such as to demonstrate that the requirements of the Conditions of Contract in
respect of quality are met. The Quality Control Plan shall provide a formal framework for
the approval of the Works by the Project Manager.
In particular the Quality Control Plan shall include:
1. Quality control procedures in respect of the selection and control of materials,
distinguishing between approval testing and compliance testing;
2. Quality control procedures in respect of construction operations, identifying
procedures for production control and procedures for survey control;
3. Procedures for the Contractor and Engineer to approve construction works.
In preparing the Quality Control Plan the Contractor shall take into consideration the
requirements and obligations of the Project Manager in respect of checking and
inspection of the Works.
The Contractor shall appoint a Quality Control Manager who shall be responsible for
ensuring that the quality control procedures set out in the Quality Control Plan are
adhered to. The Quality Control Manager shall have independent control of all quality
control activities.
702 QUALITY CONTROL TESTS DURING CONSTRUCTION
The material supplied and work carried out shall conform to the relevant sections of these
Specifications covering each type of work. For ensuring quality of construction, the
materials and work shall be subjected to quality control tests prescribed in Table 702-1.
These tests shall be carried out as specified in Chapter 900. The testing frequencies given
in Table 702-1 are desirable minimum values and the Project Manager may direct the
Contractor to carry out tests as frequently as he may deem necessary to satisfy himself
that the materials and the work comply with the appropriate Specifications.
228
Table 702–1 – Quality Control Tests and their Frequencies
TYPE OF
MATERIAL TYPE OF TEST
QUANTITY OF
MATERIAL or part
thereof for which
minimum one test set to
be carried out
Cement
Acceptance testing of cement
such as
- Fineness
- Chemical composition
- Compressive strength
- Setting time
- Soundness
One test per source and
as required by the Project
Manager
Fine
aggregates
(Sand)
- Sieve analysis
- Water absorption
- Turbidity
As directed by the
Project Manager
Course
aggregates
- Sieve analysis
- Aggregate impact value
(AIV)
- Water absorption
- Flakiness Index
As directed by the
Project Manager
Concrete - Slump test
- Crushing strength test
As directed by the
Project Manager
Tor steel
reinforcem
ents
- Tensile strength As directed by the
Project Manager
Geo-textile
- Grab strength
- Sewn seam strength
- Tear strength
- Puncture strength
- Permittivity
- Apparent opening size
As directed by the
Project Manager
Grout
- Test for bleeding
- Flow cone efflux time test
- Crushing strength test
As directed by the
Project Manager
Fill/Backfil
l
- Sieve analysis
- Liquid limit
- Plastic limit
- Modified Proctor test
- Layer thickness at spreading
- Field moisture content
As directed by the
Project Manager
229
A fresh series of construction control tests shall be undertaken every time there are
changes in the sources of the materials or in the appearance of the materials as visually
assessed by the Project Manager.
Additional numbers and type of construction control tests shall be carried out if it is
considered necessary to do so by the Project Manager for monitoring the variability of
materials brought to work site or stockpiled by the Contractor.
703 MATERIAL TESTING
The physical properties and engineering characteristics of the materials mentioned in the
Specification shall be established through appropriate tests on representative samples
collected in such a manner and at such a frequency as specified and instructed by the
Project Manager. The tests shall be carried out in accordance with test methods
mentioned in the Specification after taking into account the appropriateness of the test
methods for particular applications under consideration.
- Degree of compaction
Shotcrete
Concrete
and
Grouting
- Crushing strength test As directed by the
Project Manager
Nails (Soil) - Tensile strength
- Galvanized thickness
As directed by the
Project Manager
High
tensile wire
mesh
- Tensile strength of wire
- Galvanized thickness
One test as per source
and as requested by the
Project Manager
230
800 MATERIAL DETAILS
801 AGGREGATE
801.1 Aggregate for Cement Concrete (Section 1001 and Others)
Aggregate for concrete shall consist of coarse aggregate (aggregate substantially retained
on the 5 mm sieve) and fine aggregate (aggregate substantially passing the 5 mm sieve).
Unless otherwise specified the coarse aggregate shall be crushed rock from an approval
quarry and the fine aggregate shall either be crusher fines or river sand.
Aggregate from marine sources will not be approved. The aggregate shall be free of salt
and organic matter. The permissible maximum salt content shall be as follows:
Table 801-1 – Permissible maximum salt content in aggregate
MATERIA
L
SODIUM
CHLORIDE
SOLUBLE
SULPHATES
Fine
Aggregate 0.10 % 0.25 %
Coarse
Aggregate 0.05 % 0.25 %
The aggregate both coarse and fine shall be hard durable and clean and shall be from
weathered, soft, laminated or elongated pieces, deleterious matter, dust and clay.
The Aggregate Impact Value (AIV) of the coarse aggregate determined as given in
Section 901 shall not be greater than 45.
The flakiness index of the coarse aggregate when determined by the sieve method
described in BS-812 shall not exceed 35%.
Where crusher fines are used as fine aggregate, they shall be derived from rock meeting
the requirements of coarse aggregate given above.
The preferred grading for concrete aggregate, fine aggregate and combined aggregate are
given in Table 801-2, 801-3 and 802-4 respectively. The aggregate grading shall be
determined as given in Section 901.
231
Table 801-2– Preferred Grading for Coarse Aggregate for Concrete
SIEV
E
SIZE
(mm)
PERCENTAGE PASSING
Nominal size of graded
aggregate (mm)
Nominal size of single sized
aggregate (mm)
37.5
to 5
20.0
to 5
14
to 5 37.5 20.0 14.0
75.0 100 - - - - -
63.0 - - - 100 - -
37.5 95-
100 100 - 85-100 100 -
20.0 40-72 96-
100 100 0-30
87-
100 100
14.0 - - 95-
100 - -
88-
100
10.0 12-42 35-62 67-
88 0-6 0-30 0-58
5.0 0-5 0-13 0-16 - 0-6 0-13
2.36 - - - - 0 -
Table 801-3– Preferred Grading for Fine Aggregate for Concrete
SIEVE SIZE PERCENTAGE PASSING
mm μm Zone
1
Zone
2
Zone
3
10 100 100 100
5 91-
100
91-
100
91-
100
2.3
6
60-95 75-
100
85-
100
1.1
8
30-70 55-90 75-
100
600 15-34 35-59 60-79
300 5-20 8-30 12-40
150 0-10 0-10 0-10
232
Table 801-4– Preferred Grading for all-in Aggregate for Concrete
SIEVE SIZE PERCENTAGE PASSING
mm Μ
m
37.5 mm
Nominal
size
19.0 mm
Nominal
size
75 100 -
37.
5
95-100 100
20 48-82 92-100
5 25-50 35-55
600 8-30 10-35
150 0-6 0-6
802 CEMENT
Cement used shall normally be Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) complying with the
requirements of SLS 107 or blended hydraulic cement to SLS 1247. The cement shall
conform to the requirements given therein, in respect of the following:-
a) Fineness
b) Chemical composition
c) Compressive strength
d) Setting time
e) Soundness
Tests in respect of the above shall be carried out as specified in Section 903.
Unless or otherwise permitted by the Project Manager, only one brand of the approved
brands of cement shall be used on one project.
Cement shall be brought to Site in quantity not exceeding three months requirements.
Each consignment of cement delivered to Site shall be accompanied by a certificate of
233
testing as per BS or SLS. Any extra test instructed by the Project Manager whose result
proves the material to be out of specification shall be carried out at no extra cost. If for
any reason the period of storage of consignment of cement exceeds three months, a
representative sample of the cement shall be retested to confirm its suitability before use
at no extra cost.
The Contractor shall provide suitable means of storing and protecting the cement against
dampness, Cement which, for any reason has become partially set or which contains
lumps of caked cement shall be rejected.
No additives for cement shall be used unless agreed by the Project Manager.
802.1 Cement Grout
Cement grout for grouting dowels shall consist of Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) and
water mixed in the proportions necessary for the intended purpose.
Cement used for grouting soil nails shall be Type – A, Portland cement complying with
(BS196 or BS197). Grout material should be non-expansive and non-shrinkage material.
Therefore, admixture has to be added to avoid shrinkage effect of cement. The Contractor
should be obtained prior approval for the admixture before use site at site from the
Project Manager.
The grout shall be mixed until a uniform consistency is obtained and shall normally be
used within 45 minutes of mixing.
802.2 Cement Mortar
Cement mortar shall normally consist of Ordinary Portland Cement, sand and water in
the proportions specified.
Mortar shall mix with thoroughly, either by hand or mechanically until its colour and
consistency are uniform. It shall be mixed in small quantities only as and when required
and shall normally be used within 45 minutes of mixing. Mortar which had been mixed
for more than 1 hour and shows signs of hardening shall be discarded.
The constituent materials shall normally be volume proportioned as accurately as
practicable making allowance for bulking of sand and also of the cement. Water shall be
added in stages until the required consistency is reached.
803 CONCRETE ADMIXTURE
Concrete admixture as retarders, accelerators or as plasticizers shall be used with the
prior approval of the Project Manager only and they shall be used strictly in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
234
In the use of additives particular attention should be paid to the accurate proportioning of
the additive and its homogeneous introduction in the mix.
804 SOILS
a. Filling Material
Soils used as filling materials shall be naturally occurring soils and shall not include
highly plastic clay, silt, peat or other organic soils or any soil that is contaminated with
top soil vegetable and other deleterious matter. The material used for the top 500 mm of
filling shall conform to the requirements of Type I material, and the material for lower
layers of filling shall conform to the requirements of type II material as given below.
Table 804-1:Material Characteristics for Filling - Type I and Type II
PROPERTY
TEST
METH
OD
SPECIFICATION
LIMIT
FILLING
TYPE I
FILLING
TYPE II
Liquid Limit (LL) %
AASH
TO
T89
≤ 50 ≤ 55
Plasticity Index (PI) %
AASH
TO
T90
≤ 25 ≤ 25
Maximum y Density (MDD)
(Modified proctor Test) kg/m3
AASH
TO
T180
≥ 1,600
≥ 1,500
805 GEOTEXTILES / GEOFABRIC
805.1 Referenced Documents
These Specifications:
Section 903.1 Particle size Analysis of soils
Section 903.3 Determining the plastic limit and plasticity index of soils
Section 903.4 Moisture – Density Relations of soils using a 4.5kg Rammer
and 450mm Drop
235
ASTM standards:
D 123-00a, Standard terminology Relating to textiles
D276, Test Methods for Identification of fibers in textiles
D4354-99(04), Practice for Sampling of Geo synthetics for testing
D4355-05, Test method for Deterioration of Geotextiles from exposure to
Ultraviolet light and water (Xenon-Arc Type Apparatus)
D4439 -04 Terminology for Geo synthetics
D4491-99a (04), Test Method for water permeability of Geotextiles by
permittivity.
D 4533-04 Test method for trapezoid tearing strength of Geotextiles
D4632-91(2003), Test method for grab breaking load and elongation of Geotextiles
D4751-04, Test Method for determining apparent opening size of geotextiles
D4759-2, practice for determining specification conformance of geo synthetics
D4833-00 Test Method for index puncture resistance of geotextiles, Geo membranes
and related products
D4873- 02, Guide for identification, storage and handling of geotextiles
D 5261-92(03), Test method for measuring mass per unit area of geotextiles
D 6140-00(05), Test method for determining the asphalt retention of paving fabrics
236
805.2 Physical Requirements
(a) Fibers utilized in the manufacture of geotextiles and the threads used in joining
geotextiles by sewing. Shall consist of long chain synthetic polymers, composed of at
least 95 percent by weight of polyolefin or polyesters. They shall be formed into a stable
network such that the filaments or yarns, including salvages, retain their dimensional
stability relative to each other.
Subsurface drainage, separation stabilization and permanent erosion control
applications, geotextiles conform to the physical requirements of sub section 805.6.
All values of properties, with the exception of Apparent Opening Size (AOS), in
these specifications represent Minimum Average Roll Values (MARV) in the
weakest principal direction (i.e., average test results of any in a lot sampled for
conformance or quality assurance testing shall meet or exceed the minimum values
provided here in). Values for AOS represent maximum average roll values (MARV).
805.3 Certification
(A) The contractor shall provide to the Project Manager, a certificate stating the name of
the manufacture, product name, and style number, chemical composition of the
filaments or yarns, and other pertinent information to describe the geo-textile fully.
Contractor shall obtain the supplies of geotextiles from a manufacturer who shall be
responsible for establishing and maintaining a quality control program to assure
compliance with the requirements of the specifications. Documentation describing
the quality control program shall be made available upon request from such
manufactures.
Such manufacture’s shall certificate shall state that the furnished geo-textile meets
MARV requirements of the specification as evaluated under the manufacturer’s
quality control program. A person having legal authority to bind the manufacturer,
shall attest to the certificate.
Either misrepresentation of materials or mislabeling shall be a reason to reject those
geotextile products of the manufacturer.
237
805.4 Sampling, Testing and Acceptance
(a) Geotextile materials shall be subject to sampling and testing to verify conformance
with these Specifications. Sampling shall be in accordance with the most current
ASTM standards D 4354, using the section titled, “procedure for sampling for
purchaser’s specification conformance testing”. In the absence of purchaser’s testing,
verification may be based on manufacturer’s certifications as a result of testing by the
manufacturer of quality assurance samples obtained using the procedure for sampling
for Manufacturer’s Quality Assurance (MQA) testing. A lot size shall be considered
to be the shipment quantity of the given product, or a truckload of the given product,
whichever is smaller.
(b) For the indicated application, testing shall be performed in accordance with the
methods referenced in these specifications. The number of specimens to test per
sample is specified by each test method. Geotextile product acceptance shall be based
on ASTM D 4759.Product acceptance is determined by comparing the average test
results of all specimens within a given sample to the specimen MARV. Reference
shall be made to ASTM D 4759 for more details regarding geotextile procedures f
(c) or acceptance.
805.5 Shipment and Storage
(a) Labeling, shipment and storage of geotextile shall follow ASTM D 4873. Product
label shall clearly show the manufacture or supplier name, style name and roll
number. Each shipping document shall include a notation certifying that the material
is in accordance with the certificate of the manufacturer.
(b) Each roll of geotextiles shall be wrapped with a material that will protect the
geotextile, including the ends of the roll, from damage due to shipment, water
sunlight and contaminants. The protective wrapping shall be maintained during
periods of shipment and storage subsequently.
During periods of storage, the geotextile rolls shall be elevated off the ground and
adequately covered to protect them from the following: site construction damage,
precipitation, extended ultraviolet radiation including sunlight, chemicals that are
strong acids or strong bases, flames including welding sparks, temperatures in excess
of 71 0C (160 0F) and any other environmental condition that may damage the
geotextile physical property values.
238
805.6 Geotextile Property requirements for Subsurface Drainage and
Horizontal Drains
Physical Characteristic – Should be Continuous filament, nonwoven needle punched.
Polymer – 100% Polypropylene, UV stabilized.
No Code No. Description Property Value
1.0 BS EN ISO
10319:2008
Geo-synthetics.
Wide-width tensile
test.
Tensile Strength
Retention
Exceeds 70%
Strength retention
after 3 months out
door weathering
Tensile Strength (avg) Exceeds 10 kN/m
2.0 BS EN ISO
11058:2010
Geo-textiles and
geo-textile-related
products.
Determination of
water permeability
characteristics
normal to the
plane, without
load.
Vertical Water Flow
50mm Head
Less Than 100
1/m2/s
(mm/s)
3.0 BS EN ISO
12956:2010
Geo-textiles and
geo-textile-related
products.
Determination of
the characteristic
opening size.
Effective Opening size
(O90)
Less Than 0.10
mm
4.0 BS EN ISO
12958:2010
Geo-textiles and
geo-textile-related
products.
Determination of
water flow capacity
in their plane
20 kPa Exceeds 5.0 1/m.h
200 kPa Exceeds 2.0 1/m.h
5.0
BS EN ISO
9863-
1:2005
Geo-synthetics.
Determination of
thickness at
specified pressures.
Thickness 2 kPa Exceeds 1.5 mm
239
Single layers.
6.0
ASTM D
4491 –
99a(2009)
Standard Test
Methods for Water
Permeability of
Geo-textile b
Permittivity
Permittivity Less Than 2.5 s -1
7.–0 ASTM D
4751 - 04
Standard Test
Methods for
Determining g
Apparent Opening
Size of a Geo-
textile
Apparent Opening Size
(O90)
Less Than 0.25
mm
240
900 TESTS FOR QUALITY CONTROL OF MATERIAL AND WORKS
901 AGGREGATES AND SOIL
Table 901-1–Quality Control Tests for Aggregates and Soil
Clau
se
No
Quality Control Test Reference Standards
901.1 Sieve Analysis
BS EN 932-1-1997 or ASTM
C 136-96a or AASHTO T27-
99
901.2
Clay, silt and dust
fraction (fraction passing
the 0.075 mm sieve)
BS 812:103.2 (2000) or ASTM
C 117-95 or AASHTO T11-97
901.3 Aggregate Impact Value
(AIV) BS EN 1097-2:1998
901.6 Flakiness index BS 812: Part 105.1:2000
Elongation BS 812: Part 105.2: 2000
901.7 Specific Gravity of
Coarse Aggregate
BS 812: Part 2:1975 or ASTM
C 127-88 (1993) or AASHTO
T85 – 91 (2000)
901.8 Specific Gravity of Fine
Aggregate
BS EN 1097: 5: 1999 or ASTM
C 128-97 or BS 812: 2000 or
AASHTO T84 – 00
902 CEMENT AND CONCRETE
902.1 Cement
Table 902-1–Quality Control Tests for Cement
Clau
se No Quality Control Test Reference Standards
902.1 (a) Standard Consistency
SLS 107: 2008 or ASTM C 187-04
or BS EN 196-3: 2005 or
AASHTO T129-01
902.1 (b) Setting Times
SLS 107: 2008 or ASTM C 191-
04b or BS EN 196-3: 2008 or
AASHTO T131-01
902.1 (c) Fineness
SLS 107: 2008 or ASTM C 204-00
or BS EN 196-6: 1992 or
AASHTO T152-01
902.1 (d) Compressive Strength
SLS 107: 2008 or ASTM C
109/C109M-05 or BS EN 196-1:
2005 or AASHTO T106-02
241
902.1 (e) Soundness Test BS 4550: Part3: Sec 3.7 or
BS EN 196-3: 2005
902.2 Concrete
Table 902-2–Quality Control Tests for Concrete
Clau
se
No
Quality Control Test Reference Standards
902.2 (a) Casting of Concrete
Cubes
BS 1881: Part 108: 83, BS EN
12390-1:2000 or ASTM
C31/C31M-03a in field or ASTM
C192C/192M-05 in laboratory
902.2 (b) Testing of Concrete
Cubes BS EN 12390-3: 2002
902.2 (g) Slump Test
ASTM C143/C143M-05a or
BS EN 12504-1-2000 or AASHTO
T119-99
903 SOILS
Table 903-1–Quality Control Tests for Soils
Clau
se
No
Quality Control Test Reference Standards
903.1 Sieve Analysis Test
BS 1377-Part 2: 1990 or ASTM
D422-63 (72) or AASHTO T88-
00
903.2 Liquid Limit BS 1377-Part 2: 1990 or ASTM
D 4318-05 or AASHTO T89-02
903.3 Plastic Limit BS 1377-Part 2: 1990 or ASTM D
4318-05 or AASHTO T90-00
903.4 Modified Proctor
Compaction
BS 1377-Part 4: 1990 or ASTM
D 1557-02 or AASHTO T180-
01
903.6 Field Moisture ASTM D 2218-98
903.7 Field Density
BS 1377-Part 9: 1990 or ASTM
D 1556-90 or AASHTO T191-
02
242
1000 SOIL NAILING, HORIZONTAL DRAINS AND MONITORING
1001 SOIL NAILING
1001.1 Description
This work shall consist of soil nailing, construction of nail heads, laying of protective net,
hydro seeding and other associate works. The work shall be carried out in accordance
with this Specification and in conformity with the Drawings or as directed by the Project
Manager.
Unless otherwise approved by Engineer, the Contractor performing the soil nailing works
described in this Specification shall have experience in soil nailing of a minimum of 5
years. The Contractor’s on-site supervisors shall have a minimum of 3 years’ experience
in installing soil nails with Contractor’s organization.
Full-time supervision by a qualified Engineer or technician shall be accorded to all soil
nailing works especially all the inspection checks and quality control tests.
1001.2 Materials
The materials used for soil nailing shall meet the requirements of the following, unless
otherwise specified.
a) Reinforcement for Soil Nailing
Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, reinforcement bars (re-bars) for soil nails shall be
deformed Y25 or Y32 bars (SLS-375-2009 – Ribbed Steel Bars for the Reinforcement of
Concrete with minimum yield strength of 460 MPa), threaded and fully hot-dip
galvanized in conformance with requirements of AS1214 (Australian standard for hot dip
Galvanized coatings on threaded fasteners) and AS1650 (Australian standard for
coupling assembly), with minimum coat thickness of 85 microns or 610 mg per meter
square surface. Nuts shall be of Grade 4 steel and comply with BS4190:2001. The nail
bars or re-bars shall be threaded at the exposed end for 300 mm length of nail and
coupling ends, if required, for a sufficient length (minimum 150 mm long) to facilitate
fixing of galvanized washer, overlap locking washers, nuts, MS bearing plates (Grade
43A to BS4360) and nuts at the exposed end and fixing of galvanized coupler at the other
end, if required. All steel components for soil nails including re-bar, MS bearing plates,
washers, nuts, couplers, etc., shall be hot-dip galvanized in conformance with
requirements of AS1214 (Australian standard for hot dip Galvanized coatings on
threaded fasteners) and AS1650 (Australian standard for coupling assembly) with
243
minimum coat thickness of 85μm or 610 mg per square metre. The holes in MS bearing
plate shall be drilled perpendicular to the face of MS plate and the centre of the hole shall
be at a position of within 2mm from the centroid of the MS plate. The total annular
clearance between the galvanized rebar diameter and the hole diameter shall not exceed
1mm. All components of nail head including nuts, thread, washer and MS plate shall be
galvanized. The tightened nut shall be tested to ensure it can take a tension load of at
least 1.5 times the design working load of the soil nail or minimum 150 kN without
failure.
Only soil nails of more than 12m long shall have re-bars spliced or coupled. The tensile
strength of the bar coupler shall be capable of developing at least 95% of the tensile
strength of the rebar, as tested and certified by the manufacturer. Test certificates from a
reputable or accredited laboratory, approved by the Project Manager, to show compliance
with the specification shall be submitted to the Project Manager for verification and
approval before commencement of works.
b) Cement Grout
Cement used for grouting shall conform to requirements of Sub-section 802.1 of the
Specifications and shall be Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) complying with (BS196 or
BS197). Only fresh cement, free of lumps and less than three months old shall be used.
Grout shall consist of cement, water and approved grout fluidifier specified by ASTM
C937. Water cement ratio shall be 0.40 to 0.45, and unless otherwise stated in the design
drawing, minimum cube strength of 7 day strength and 28 day strength shall be 20 MPa
and 30 MPa respectively (BS 1881). Sand shall not be used for drill holes of less than
200mm diameter unless otherwise approved by the Project Manager in writing. Water
shall be from approved public water supply. Grout material should be a non-expansive
and non-shrinkage material. Suitable admixtures shall be used to improve flow-ability
and to control bleeding or shrinkage problems. Admixtures shall comply with the
requirements of BS 5075: Part 1 and BS 5075: Part 3 and shall only be used with the
prior approval of the Project Manager. Grout shall be thoroughly mixed by a suitable
high speed colloidal mixer (> 1000 rpm) until a homogeneous grout, free from un-
dispersed cement and lumps and bleeding is obtained. The grout, after mixing for a few
minutes, shall be transferred through a 5 mm sieve into a storage tank attached with a
paddle agitator to prevent sedimentation, to remove lumps.
Unless otherwise requested by the Project Manager, cube tests shall be made at the rate
of 1 set of cubes per 10number of nails. The times of day at which samples are taken
shall be chosen at random. At least one sample shall be taken on each day.
If any of the above results falls below the acceptable limits, at least one or 1% of grouted
working nails shall be subject to a pull-out test (Sub section 1001) at the Contractor’s
own cost. The Contractor shall carry out flow cone and bleeding tests before grouting to
ensure the grout mix and admixture comply with the specified requirements.
244
c) Centralizers
Centralizers shall be non-corrodible and tightly fixed to the rebar at spacings as shown on
the Drawing to ensure an even annulus of grout around the rebar. The centralizers shall
be firm and as small as possible (not more than 50 % of the nail section), so that the
blockage of grout flow is minimum. Centralizers shall be sized to position the rebar
within 25mm of the centre of the drill holes and to allow tremie pipe (about 30 mm
diameter) insertion to the bottom of the drill hole. The centralizers shall have to be
produced by a reputable manufacturer or specialist using welded on galvanized steel
strips or PP (Polypro Pylene) or PVC (Poly Vinyl Chloride) and comply with following
properties:
- Tensile strength (BS 2782: Part 3, method 320C) > 30 MPa
- Hardness (BS 2782: Part 3, method 365B) > 65
- Brittleness temperature (ASTM D746-79) < 5 degree C
- Environmental Stress Cracking Resistance (ASTM D1693-70): 200 hrs (no cracking).
Test certificates from a reputable or accredited laboratory, approved by the Project
Manager, showing the centralizers have complied with the specification shall be
submitted to the Project Manager for verification and approval. Test requested by the
Project Manager for selected samples shall be carried out by the Contractor, on his own
cost, to ensure quality of the material.
Suitability of the method of assembly and fixing of the centralizers, grout pipes, etc.,
shall be determined by carrying out trials at site until no damages and no distortion of
centralizers and grout pipes are observed during inserting and withdrawing of the soil
nails. In addition, pull-out checks as specified in Sub section 1001shall also be carried
out during the installation of working soil nails.
d) Tor steel
Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, reinforcement bars (rebars) for pillows, beams, and
other structures.
e) Cement
Cement used shall conform to requirements of Section 802 of the Specifications and to
the provisions of the following British Standards or the corresponding Sri Lanka
Standard:
BS 12 Ordinary Portland Cement (ordinary and rapid hardening)
BS 146 Portland - blast furnace cement
BS 4027 Sulphate-resisting Portland cement
BS 1370 Low heat Portland cement
245
The Contractor shall provide suitable means of storing and protecting the cement against
dampness. Fully covered storage areas with floors protected from rising dampness shall
be provided. Bagged or bulk cement which has become partially set or which contains
lumps of caked cement shall be rejected. The use of cement reclaimed from discarded or
used bags will not be permitted.
f) High-tensile Steel Wire Mesh
High-tensile Steel Wire Mesh shall have to satisfy the following properties.
Table 1001-1 - High-tensile Steel Wire Mesh properties
Property Requirements
1 Tensile strength of mesh Min 150 kN/m
2 Tensile strength of wire Min 1750 MPa
3 Diameter of steel wire/strand Min 3 mm
4 Mesh/Net width (opening size) Max 65 mm
5 Bearing resistance of mesh against punching Min 175 kN
6 Bearing resistance of mesh against shearing Min 80 kN
7 Bearing resistance of mesh against slope
parallel tensile stress Min 25 kN
8 Corrosion protection HD Galvanized/
Galvanized with
PVC or Zinc
aluminum alloy
coated
9 Coating 150 g/m2
The Contractor should get prior approval for the method for fixing of flexible
reinforcement mesh. The contractor must submit the technical datasheet of the High-
tensile Steel Wire Mesh from the manufacturer along with the bid. Also it is mandatory
to submit Material Test Certificate (MTC) of the manufacturer during the supply of
material.
Test requested by the Project Manager for selected samples shall be carried out by the
Contractor, on his own cost, to ensure quality of the material. (As per Table 702.1)
246
g) Connection Clips
Hot-dip galvanized connection clips of minimum 4 mm diameter high tensile steel wire
with minimum tensile strength of 1750 MPa shall be used to connect two wire mesh
sheets.
Test requested by the Project Manager for selected samples shall be carried out by the
Contractor, on his own cost, to ensure quality of the material.
h) Coir Mesh
Coir net is a meshed fabric of strand made of coir fiber. The required mesh size is
approximately 15 x12 mm and the required diameter of strand is approximately 4 ~ 5
mm. The requirement of coir net is explained below:
Table 1001-2 – Coir Mesh Properties
Base Material
*Tensile
Strength
(kN/m)
Unit
Weight
(g/m2)
Strand
Thickn
ess
(mm)
Eye Size
(mm)
Machine Spun
Coir fibre with
inner cotton
thread
6~30 300~1200 4～5 15x12
*Tensile Strength: Strength of the 1 m long wire
Test requested by the Project Manager for selected samples shall be carried out by the
Contractor, on his own cost, to ensure quality of the material.
i) Dowels
The dowels shall be of mild steel having mechanical and physical properties specified in
Sub section 605 and shall be fully hot-dip galvanized in conformance with requirements
of AS1214 (Australian standard for hot dip Galvanized coatings on threaded fasteners)
and AS1650 (Australian standard for coupling assembly) with minimum coating
thickness of 85 microns or 610 gm per meter square surface.
1001.3 Materials Handling and Storage
Cement shall be stored properly to prevent moisture degradation and partial hydration.
Cement that has been caked and lumpy shall be rejected and discarded. Re-bars shall be
stored on firm supports to prevent the steel from contacting the ground. Damage to the
247
rebar as a result of abrasion, cuts, nicks, welds and weld splatter shall be cause for
rejection. Re-bars shall be protected from dirt, rust and other deleterious substances prior
to installation. Heavy corrosion or pitting of re-bars shall be cause for rejection.
Anchorage end of re-bars to which bearing plate and nuts will be attached, shall be
protected by some protective wrap during handling, installation, grouting and guniting.
1001.4 Method Statement
a. General
The Contractor shall inspect the site, study soil investigation results and design details
shown in the drawings before preparation and submission of the method statement to the
Project Manager (at least 7 days) before the commencement of works, for prior written
approval. The method statement shall include specific working details including layout of
drilling rig, tools, etc., working platform preparation, temporary support for collapsible
drill holes, drilling, assembling of re-bars, inserting of rebar, grouting, bearing plate
fixing, wire mesh and coir mesh fixing and pull-out test, etc., shall prescribe how to
execute the works in working details to comply with the specification, and also contain
among other things the details of sequence of works, specific type of machines and
necessary staging to be deployed for drilling and grouting, estimated daily work output
rate, necessary quality control tests/measurements/ observations plus their respective
frequency and acceptance criteria.
et or achieved. Specific operators/ supervisors (name, ID and CV, etc), full details of
specific type of re-bars plus their protection system, centralizers, spacers, grout mix
details and admixtures and any other materials to be used, etc., including catalogues, test
certificates and photos of the equipment and materials to be used plus the proposed
machines layout for drilling, grouting and pull-out test shall be shown on drawings and
shall also be included in the method statement. The proposals in the method statement
shall meet the requirements shown on the Project Manager’s drawings and this
specification hereafter.
b. Trial/preliminary soil nail
The Contractor shall be fully responsible of providing all necessary and suitable
resources and materials to complete all the soil nails strictly according to this
Specification. The Contractor shall install the trial or preliminary soils nails and carry out
the verification pull-out test (Sub section 1001.6) at locations selected by the Project
Manager before commencement of installation of working soil nails. Number of pull-out
tests should be 2 % of the total number of working soil nails subject to a minimum of
two.
1001.5 Construction Requirement
a. Setting out
Setting out shall be as shown in the Drawing or as directed by the Project Manager.
Immediately before drilling or installation of soil nail, the nail head position shall be
248
marked with suitable identifiable pegs or markers on the surface of slope/wall for
necessary inspection and checking by the Project Manager. The positions of soil nails
shall be checked to ensure any buried utilities, surface boulders, trees and other
structures, etc., are not affected. Engineer’s approval is necessary if the positions of soil
nails have to be shifted.
b. Position
The maximum allowable deviation for drill hole entry point shall not exceed 75mm in
any direction unless otherwise approved by the Project Manager in writing.
c. Alignment of nail
The drilling machine shall be attached with suitable alignment control devise set to attain
the finished nail direction or inclination shown on the Drawing and the maximum
permitted deviation of alignment shall not exceed 1 in 20. Deviation from straightness
shall not exceed 20 mm in any 3 m length of drill hole unless otherwise approved by the
Project Manager in writing.
d. Nails out of position or alignment
The contractor shall demonstrate to the Project Manager that the position and alignment
of soil nails is within the tolerance limits specified. Any nail found out of the tolerable
position or alignment shall be rejected and the Project Manager shall order to add
additional nails at the Contractor’s own costs.
e. Submittals
The Contractor shall engage a qualified supervisor to prepare and keep records for each
soil nail installation and to submit one signed copy to the Project Manager not later than
noon of the next working day after the soil nails have been installed. The record for each
soil nail shall include soil nail reference number, date/time of commencement and
completion of drilling and grouting, names of supervisor and operators, plus the
necessary drilling and grouting details, etc. Before commencement of works, format of
soil nail installation records (drilling, inserting of rebar, grouting & nail head
construction) and an assembled sample of galvanized soil nail with MS plate, washers,
nuts, wire mesh, coupler, centralizers shall be submitted for inspection, approval and
display at site office. Details about the reputable suppliers/manufacturers of centralizers,
couplers, galvanizer, MS bearing plates, washers, nuts and wire mesh, etc., plus
catalogue/test certificates shall also be submitted for reference and approval of the
Project Manager.
Drilling Records for each nail shall include:
Soil nail reference number & design working capacity
Date, time & time duration of drilling
249
Type & model of the drilling machine
Method of temporary support of drill holes
Soil nail details: size, length, rebar size, rebar protection method, design capacity
Type & size of drill rods & drilling shoe
Description of drill penetration rate
Description of strata of materials/drilling debris returns, such as color, type, size,
wetness/dryness, change of wetness of cuttings (dry/dusty, moist or wet, water
drops), etc. Irregular/special observations such as underground voids encountered,
hole collapse, groundwater encountered, zones of no air return, obstructions, etc.,
if any should also be recorded. Photos showing the drilling rig, tools & different
types of drilling debris, etc., shall be captured and included.
Observed exceptions & peculiarities such as drill hole collapse, wet soil/water
table, etc.
Checking on straightness, cleaning & alignment
Total drilled length
Time of start & completion of drilling; time of interruptions, if any.
Inserting of Rebar Records
Conditions of centralizers & coupler in pull-out checks;
Grouting Records for each nail shall include:
Type & model of colloidal mixer & paddle mixer
Type & model of pump
Grout mix design details (W/C ratio, type of admixture & dosage, etc.)
Results of bleeding, flow cone efflux time and strength tests
Time of start & completion of grouting
Type of nail protection
Volume of calculated gross volume of drill hole, actual volume of grout
consumed & volume of top-up after grout settlement
Observed exceptions (loss of grout details, machine breakdown, etc.)
Photos showing typical grouting operation
Nail Head Construction Records for each nail shall include:
Description of soil conditions around the nail head
Time of start & completion of pillow construction
Photos showing assembled nail head including concrete pillow with rebars, nuts,
washer, wedge washer and MS plate plus tightening by suitable wench, etc.
Format and details of record and layout of nail shall be approved by the Project Manager.
Other important submittals are method statement (Sub-section 1001.4), test certificates
(Sub-section 1001.2), pullout test reports (Sub-section 1001.6), quality control tests as
250
specified, as-built drawings (showing nail layout plan, nail reference number, length, date
completed, etc.) and project completion report, which shall include the following
chapters/sections:
1. Table of contents
2. Introduction
3. Design/construction drawings, as-built drawings and finalized BOQ
4. Method Statement
5. Works programme
6. Drilling & Grouting records
7. Quality control tests results for drilling, grouting, guniting, etc., as specified.
8. Catalogues test certificates for rebar, centralizers, coupler, wire mesh, MS bearing
plate and connection clips etc.
9. Pull-out test results, including test layout, drawings, photos, calibration records &
certificates
10. Typical photos showing drilling layout, drill rod, head, drilling operation, etc
11. Typical photos showing grouting layout, colloidal mixer, paddle mixer, pump,
etc.
12. Typical photos showing how the rebar is fixed with centralizers and results of
pull-out checks inserting, etc.
13. Typical photos showing nail head construction, wire mesh fixing
14. Important corresponding letters/instructions or documents related to design
changes/approvals, etc.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit a draft copy of the specified Project Completion
Report to the Project Manager for approval and acceptance before sending 5 copies of the
report to the Project Manager for record purposes. All important documents such as as-
built drawings, approved method statement, approved works programme, all test results,
etc, shall be checked and endorsed by the supervising Resident Engineer.
1001.5.1 Drilling
The main technical requirements for drilling include proper drilling techniques using
proper drilling machines and tools to ensure drill holes are straight, of consistent size and
clean plus completion within 2 hours. Drilling shall be carried out in accordance to
Section 10.2, BS 8081 (1989) with suitable drill bits to suit various possible subsoil
conditions. Unless otherwise approved by the Project Manager in writing, the Contractor
shall deploy a suitable duplex or Odex dry pneumatic rotary percussion drilling machine
and tools plus skilled operator and qualified supervisor that have adequate capacity and
experience to produce the drill hole through all soils/rocks/hard obstructions according to
the size, length and accuracy as shown in the Drawings and within 2 hours as specified in
this specification. Augering or wash boring method shall not be allowed unless otherwise
approved by the Project Manager in writing.
251
Suitable drill bit of not less than 125 mm diameter or as shown in the drawings or as
directed by Engineer shall be used. Suitable drilling methods using duplex or Odex
system or approved equivalent shall be used in grounds likely to collapse, such as water
bearing sandy/gravelly strata. Drill holes shall be flushed clean by compressed air on
completion of drilling and the opening protected or sealed to prevent the entry of water or
any foreign matter. A drilling record for each soil nail shall be kept by approved qualified
technician as specified in Sub-section 1001.5.
Unless otherwise approved by the Project Manager, drilling for the whole design nail
length shall be carried out uninterrupted and completed with necessary hole cleansing
within two hours. To ensure reliable and effective cleansing of the drill holes, an
additional drilled length of about 0.6 m to the design length shall be provided so that
cleansing of cuttings and debris towards the bottom of the drill holes by the compressed
air through the drill rods can be effectively and eventually carried out. A high intensity
light shall be used to inspect the drill hole for cleanliness just before the insertion of rebar
and grouting. All drill rods shall be at least of N size and can be properly jointed without
leakage. Inclination of drill rod shall be checked with geological compasses. Alignment
of drill hole shall not deviate more than 20 mm in 3 m in any direction. At least 1 % of
the drilled holes shall be selected for straightness test by inserting 100mm diameter tube
to the designed length. Drilled holes that cannot pass the test shall be re-drilled and the
suitability of the drilling machine shall be reassessed.
Within 12 hours of the completion of grouting, no drilling shall be carried out at a place
within 10 m radius of any freshly grouted soil nails including soil nails for pull-out tests.
Adequate temporary or permanent site drainage or temporary tarpaulin shall be provided
to prevent infiltration from surface run-off into the slope where soil nailing is carried out.
In order to avoid causing nuisances to the environment, the Contractor shall provide
appropriate measures approved by the Project Manager to control and minimize the
spreading of dust, fumes, water, debris, noise, etc., during drilling according to the local
bylaw requirements.
Drilling for each soil nail shall be recorded as specified in Sub-section 1001.5 for
Engineer’s reference, and selection basis of soil nails for pull-out tests or design review.
1001.5.2 Inserting Reinforcement
Important technical requirement for inserting rebar is to ensure the rebar is centrally
placed within the drill hole with the help of centralizers without eccentricity problem.
The galvanized rebar fixed with centralizers at a spacing not more than 1 m or as shown
in the design Drawing or as specified by the Project Manager, shall be checked before
inserting into the drill hole. The rebar shall be carried/handled and inserted by
252
experienced workers at spacing of supports not greater than 3 m without jerking.
After inserting about 75 % of the total design length into the drill hole, the rebar shall be
withdrawn to check the conditions of the centralizers and contamination of rebar. Such
pull-out check shall be carried out on at least 1 % of the nails especially for those drill
holes that have been left for more than 2 hours after completion of drilling. If collapse of
drill hole is suspected, re-drilling and flushing have to be carried out as directed by
Engineer. Damaged centralizers shall be replaced immediately by new type of
centralizers approved by the Project Manager.
To facilitate inserting of the rebar, especially for long & heavy ones, temporary
PVC/steel pipe with smooth internal surface may need to be used.
1001.5.3 Grouting
All soil nails shall be installed and grouted as soon as possible after drilling (preferable
within 2 hours after drilling). In any case, each drill hole shall not be left unsupported
without grouting for more than 12 hours after drilling. All drill holes shall be checked for
cleanliness prior to inserting the rebar and immediate grouting if the drill holes are left
unsupported for more than 2 hours unless otherwise approved by the Project Manager.
Grouting shall be carried out in accordance with Section 10.4, BS8081 (1989). Grout mix
shall be prepared and tested according to Sub-section 1001.2. Layout of machine plus the
capacity, etc, shall be as shown in method statement and approved by the Project
Manager in writing before mobilization. Grout shall be pumped or injected from the
lowest point of the drill hole into its final position in drill hole through a grouting tube of
about 25mm diameter by tremie method under gravity or low pressure (< 5 bars) as soon
as possible/immediately after the completion of hole drilling and not more than 30
minutes after mixing. Unless otherwise approved by the Project Manager in writing,
grouting shall be carried out within two hours after drilling and cleansing of drill hole are
completed. Grouting shall be carried out promptly and continuously in one operation
without interruption to avoid any disturbance caused by sedimentation within the grout
and to reduce air bubble entrapment. Full operation shall continue until injected grout of
the same composition and consistency as that of the mixed emerges from the drill hole
outlet for at least one minute, i.e. continuous pumping of grout until fresh
uncontaminated grout is observed flowing out from the drill hole for at least one minute.
In case substantial grout is observed or suspected to have lost due to fractured rocks,
cavities, etc, the designer shall be informed for necessary design review. Failure to
comply with these requirements may result in either the works being rejected or re-
cleansing plus proof pullout test at the Contractor’s own costs.
All grouting works shall be recorded by an approved qualified technician as required and
specified in Sub-section 1001.5. The Contractor shall calculate the volume of drill holes,
discounting the volume of soil nail rebar and assembly inserted in the drill hole.
Trial grouting mixture shall be carried out first before commencement of works to ensure
the quality of grout mixture specified in Sub-section 1001.2 can be met.
253
1001.5.4 Nail Head Construction with Pillow
Nail head consist with two parts as concrete pillow and steel plate fixed to the pillow by a
nut, as shown in Drawings.
Excavation for soil nail head shall be done to dimensions showing in the Drawings or as
instructed by the Project Manager. All necessary accessories as shown in the Drawings to
be installed and in-situ construction with concrete C30/20 shall be carried out as shown
in the Drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager.
Nail head with steel plate shall be in a plane normal to the nail axis clamped down with
galvanized nut and washers/wedge washer to the clamping down forces of 5kN (min) or
as shown in the design Drawings, using a calibrated torque wrench. Nail head
construction shall only be carried out after the grout and the mortar have reached at least
7-days strength (> 20 MPa). The galvanized thread of the rebar and the nuts shall be
coated with approved zinc-rich paint before tightening.
Measures to protect the newly constructed nail head against erosion such as cover the
nail head with tarpaulin, etc., shall be carried out until the slope is properly protected (by
guniting, etc.)
Where instructed by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall uncover a maximum of 3
selected soil nail heads from the batch of soil nail head cast on any one day for
examination to ensure compliance of specifications. If defective workmanship is found in
any one of the 3 selected and examined nail heads, all the nail heads cast in that day shall
be recast to the Project Manager’s satisfaction.
1001.5.5 Coir Mesh
Pockets shall be made in coir mesh and fertilizers, soil and seeds/plants approved by the
Project Manager, shall be filled into those pockets. The Contractor shall include the coir
mesh laying process in method statement for the Project Manager’s approval.
1001.5.6 High–Tensile Steel Wire Mesh
High–tensile steel wire mesh shall be installed immediately after laying of the coir mesh,
as shown in the Drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager. Laying of wire mesh
can be done from top to bottom. Bearing plates shall be tightened to the nails after laying
the wire mesh. The Contractor shall include the wire mesh and bearing plates fixing
procedure in method statement for the Project Manager’s approval.
254
1001.5.7 Boundary Beam
Excavation for boundary beam shall be done to dimensions showing in the Drawings or
as instructed by the Project Manager. In-situ construction with concrete C30 shall be
carried out as shown in the Drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager.
1001.5.8 Grid Beam
Excavation for beam shall be done to dimensions showing in the Drawings or as
instructed by the Project Manager. All necessary accessories as shown in the Drawings to
be installed and in-situ shotcrete concrete C30/20 shall be carried out using wet mix as
instructed by the Project Manager.
Steel plate connected to the nail shall be in a plane normal to the nail axis and clamped
down with galvanized nut and washers/wedge washer to the clamping down forces of
5kN (min) or as shown in the design Drawings, using a calibrated torque wrench. Beam
construction shall only be carried out after the grout and the mortar have reached at least
7-days strength (> 20 MPa). The galvanized thread of the rebar and the nuts shall be
coated with approved zinc-rich paint before tightening.
Measures to protect the newly constructed beams against erosion such as cover the beams
with tarpaulin, etc., shall be carried out until the slope is properly protected.
Where instructed by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall uncover selected beams to
ensure compliance of specifications. If defective workmanship is found in selected and
examined beams, all the nail beams cast in that day shall be recast to the Project
Manager’s satisfaction.
1001.5.8 Shotcreting
The surface of the slopes can be shot-creted after soil nail installation to protect the
surfaces from weathering and erosion instead of hydro-seeding or planting. The
shotcrete shall be reinforced with galvanized wire mesh 50mmX50mm made of diameter
not less than 2mm.
Slope should be prepared appropriately prior to shot-creating by removing loose or
shattered rock, rock debris, soil or other loose material from the surface. Immediately
prior to shotcreting, the surface to be coated shall be cleaned by an approved method
such as brooming. The surface shall be left damp, but all free water shall be removed by
an approved method.
Beams connecting the nail heads shall be provided with reinforcement specified in the
drawings and shall be concreted with the same mix. The mesh shall be securely fastened
with nails, staples or other types of surface anchors and to the installed soil nail plates
and supported with approved spacers so that the mesh is located centrally within the
255
shotcrete coating. Fiber or needle reinforced concrete is not an acceptable alternative to
steel reinforcing fabric. A cover of minimum 30mm of shotcrete shall be provided to the
mesh at all edges. Laps in the mesh shall not be less than 200mm.
The shotcrete shall have a minimum cement content of 380 kg/m3 as discharged from the
nozzle and shall have a minimum compressive strength of 30 MPa at 28 days when tested
by means of 75mm diameter cores taken from test panels and from in place shotcrete.
Special additives or combination of additives as required for the process may be used
subject to their approval by the Project Manager.
Shotcrete shall only be applied by nozzle only using wet mix, men experienced and
skilled in the work and in the presence of the Project Manager’s representative.
Application shall be built up making several passes of the nozzle over the workings area.
The nozzle shall be held so that the stream of material shall impinge as nearly as possible
perpendicular to the surface being coated and the velocity of discharge from the nozzle,
the distance of the nozzle from the surface and the amount of water in the mix shall be
regulated so as to produce a dense coating with minimum rebound of the material and no
sagging. Rebound material shall be removed by air jet or other suitable means from the
surface as work proceeds and disposed of.
Construction joints shall be kept to a minimum. The joint edge shall not taper more than
45o and shall be cleaned and wetted by air-water jet before continuing application.
Adjoining areas not required to be shotcreted shall be protected from splash and spray
rebound. Splash or rebound material on these adjoining surfaces shall be removed by air-
water jet or other suitable means as work proceeds.
Prior to applying any shotcrete the Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager for his
approval details of his proposed procedure, plant, materials and mix proportions.
Curing shall commence within one hour of the application of shotcrete and may be by
water or membrane. In water curing, the surface of the shotcrete shall be kept
continuously wet for at least seven days. Membrane curing shall consist of the
application of an approved colorless curing compound to the surface of the shotcrete.
Short and long horizontal drains shall be installed in shotcreting area prior to shotcreting
as per the Drawings or as instructed by the Project Manager accordance with the Section
1002 of the Specification unless otherwise instructed by the Project Manager.
1001.6 Test and Standards of Acceptance
Galvanize thickness of the soil nail bars and other accessories, shall be tested in
accordance with these Specifications. Contractor should submit a Manufacturer
Certificate for the galvanizing work.
256
The materials related to nail head construction shall be tested in accordance with these
Specifications and shall meet the prescribed criteria. The work shall conform to these
Specifications and shall meet the prescribed criteria.
a. Pull-Out Test
Pull out test shall be carried out as specified in the “Hong Kong Geo Guide 07” and at
the presence of Engineer’s representative.
Pull out test should be carried out at each site prior to the start of the permanent soil
nailing work as follows.
Pullout tests are done to verify design assumptions about the bond strength at the
interface between the ground and the cement grout sleeve. The test also gives an
indication of the contractor’s workmanship, the appropriateness of the construction
method under the specific ground and groundwater conditions and potential construction
difficulties. As far as practicable, pullout tests should be carried out at locations where
the pullout resistance is likely to be low or where conditions are most uncertain. Pullout
tests should be carried out prior to the construction of working soil nails so that the
information gathered from the tests can be reviewed for making design changes as
needed.
The test soil nails should be installed using the same procedures as the working soil nails
except that only the bottom part of the soil nail is grouted. The length of the cement grout
sleeve of test soil nail should not be less than 2 m. A smaller bond length may not be
adequately representative. A long bond length requires a large pullout load. In that case
pullout load may exceed the tensile capacity of the bars. Additional information such as
the type of material encountered and the presence of groundwater during drilling should
be recorded.
Soil nails for pullout tests require partial grouting to obtain a specified bond length for
testing. Grouting should be carried out slowly and carefully to prevent over-grouting.
Packers are usually used to seal off the grouted section. Only packers that can effectively
seal off the grouted section should be used. The packers should, as far as practicable, not
contribute to the bond strength of the grouted section. If there is any resistance it should
be estimated.
When setting up the pullout test apparatus, the steel bearing plate to be used for the test
should not be allowed to bear down onto the steel bar as this will deflect the bar, thereby
giving incorrect readings during the test.
The number of pullout tests should be 2 % of the total number of working soil nails
subject to a minimum of two. Test nails should be filled up by cement grout upon
completion of the test.
257
b. Grout
Cube test strength results (according to BS 1881 and test cube size should be 50 mm)
shall be provided prior to commencement of work to demonstrate that the mix meets the
design minimum strength. Cube strength shall be obtained from six grout cubes (after
seven days and twenty eight days respectively – three cubes for each test). Seven days
cube strength should be tested in order to confirm 28 days cube strength of 30 MPa.
Number of test samples shall be decided by the Project Manager. Bleeding test (<0.5 %
by volume 3 hours after mixing or 2 % (maximum) when measured at 20 degree C in a
covered glass cylinder of 100 mm diameter and with a grout depth of 100mm. In
addition, the water shall be re-absorbed within 24 hours. Free expansion shall not exceed
10 % (ASTM C940-98, Flow cone efflux test time <15 seconds, ASTM C939-02).
For cubes tested at an age of 28 days the cube strength shall conform to the following
requirements:
(a) The average strength determined from any group of four consecutive test cubes shall
exceed the specified characteristic strength by at least 0.5 times the current margin
(b) Each individual test result shall be greater than 85% of the specified characteristic
strength.
If the average strength of any group of four consecutive test cubes fails to meet the first
requirement (a) then all grout mixed in all batches from the first batch to the last batch
from which samples were taken to make the test cubes, together with all the intervening
batches shall be deemed not to comply with the strength requirements.
If only one cube fails to meet the second requirement (b) then that result may be
considered to represent only the particular batch of grout from which that cube was
taken.
The Contractor shall take such remedial action as the Project Manager may order,
including the removal of the relevant cement grout, and shall, before proceeding with the
grouting, submit details of the action proposed to ensure that the cement grout complies
with the requirements of the Specificat’ion for the Project Manager's approval.
Acceptance criteria shall be that the average 28 days compressive strength of 3 cubes
exceeds the characteristic strength of the cement grout and that the difference between
the greatest and least strength is not more than 20 percent of the average.
The 7 days test results shall generally be made use of as an indicator of the strength at 28
days and unless otherwise decided by the Project Manager, no decision regarding non
acceptance of the concrete shall be made using these results.
258
c. Shotcrete
Test cube strength results (of 75 mm dia. core) shall be provided prior to commencement
of work to demonstrate that the mix meets the design minimum strength. Cube strength
shall be obtained from six shotcrete cores (after seven days and twenty eight days
respectively – three cubes for each test). Seven days cube strength should be tested in
order to confirm 28 days cube strength of 30 MPa. Number of test samples shall be
decided by the Project Manager.
For cubes tested at an age of 28 days the cube strength shall conform to the following
requirements:
(a) The average strength determined from any group of four consecutive test cubes shall
exceed the specified characteristic strength by at least 0.5 times the current margin
(b) Each individual test result shall be greater than 85% of the specified characteristic
strength.
If the average strength of any group of four consecutive test cubes fails to meet the first
requirement (a) then all shotcrete mixed in all batches from the first batch to the last
batch from which samples were taken to make the test cores, together with all the
intervening batches shall be deemed not to comply with the strength requirements.
If only one cube strength fails to meet the second requirement (b) then that result may be
considered to represent only the particular batch of shotcrete from which that cube was
taken.
The Contractor shall take such remedial action as the Project Manager may order,
including the removal of the relevant shotcrete, and shall, before proceeding with the
shotcreting, submit details of the action proposed to ensure that the shotcrete complies
with the requirements of the Specification for the Project Manager's approval.
Acceptance criteria shall be that the average 28 days compressive strength of 3 cubes
exceeds the characteristic strength of the shotcrete and that the difference between the
greatest and least strength is not more than 20 percent of the average.
The 7 days test results shall generally be made use of as an indicator of the strength at 28
days and unless otherwise decided by the Project Manager, no decision regarding non
acceptance of the concrete shall be made using these results.
1001.7 Measurement and Payment
a. Measurement
Temporary works, such as temporary platform preparation prior to soil nailing shall be
paid as a Lump sum item as indicated in the Bills of Quantities. Payment shall be made
as;
259
60% of the lump sum under this item shall be certified upon the establishment of
temporary platform for soil nailing works. 30% of the amount upon progress of soil
nailing works as approved by the Project Manager and the remaining 10% shall be paid
when the temporary platform has been totally removed and site has been cleaned by the
Contractor.
Soil nailing work: the measurement shall include for drillings, nail bar and grouting, and
quantity shall be measured by the linear meter along the nail starting from bottom face of
the nail head (commencing ground level) to the tip of the nail.
Soil nail heads including pillow shall be measured in numbers including excavation, form
work, reinforcement bars, fixing of MS bearing plate, nut and washers inside the head
and insitu concrete C30/20.
High tensile wire mesh shall be measured in Sq.m including plate, nut and washers to be
used to fix wire mesh to the nail head and connection clips to be used at connections of
wire meshes. No payment will be given for lapping of the high tensile wire mesh.
Coir mesh shall be measured in Sq.m. No payment of lapping of the coir mesh.
Preparation of pockets including soil, fertilizers and planting or seeding shall be
measured and paid under Section 802.
Concrete and tor steel required for boundary beam shall be measured in linear meter. No
separate payment for excavation and dowels will be paid and cost shall be included in
beam rate.
Shotcrete concrete and tor steel required for beams in grid beam structure shall be
measured in linear metres. No separate payment for excavation and dowels will be paid
and cost shall be included in beam rate.
Shotcrete face shall be measured in square meters including net and dowels. Area of the
nail heads connecting beams shall be deducted from the total shotcreting area.
Nail heads connecting beams in shotcrete face shall be measured in linear metres
including nail heads, reinforcements, dowels and shotcreting.
Pull-Out tests shall be measured in numbers and two numbers of tests are required for
test nails prior to the commencement of work for design verification and Pull-Out tests
should be performed for 2% of the total number of working soil nails subject to a
minimum of two and those shall be measured separately.
b. Payment
The quantities determine for soil nails as provided above shall be paid for at the Contract
260
unit rate which price shall be full compensation for all labour, materials, tools and
incidentals necessary for completion of the work including drilling, drilling through
incidental boulders, fabrication and installation of all accessories for soil nails and
grouting.
The quantities determine for nail heads including pillow as provided above shall be paid
for at the Contract unit rate which price shall be full compensation for all labour,
materials, tools and incidentals necessary for completion of the work including
preparation of slope, formwork, reinforcement, concreting required for pillow
construction and fabrication and installation of all accessories of the nail head.
The quantities determine for boundary beams as provided above shall be paid for at the
Contract unit rate which price shall be full compensation for all labour, materials, tools
and incidentals necessary for completion of the work including preparation of slope,
formwork, reinforcement, concreting required for boundary beam construction and
fabrication and installation of all accessories of the boundary beams along with dowels.
The quantities determine for grid beams as provided above shall be paid for at the
Contract unit rate which price shall be full compensation for all labour, materials, tools
and incidentals necessary for completion of the work including preparation of slope,
formwork, reinforcement, shotcrete concreting required for grid beam construction and
fabrication and installation of all accessories of the grid beams along with dowels. No
separate payment shall be made for the overlapping area of the beams at connections.
The quantities determine for shotcrete as provided above shall be paid for at the Contract
unit rate which price shall be full compensation for all labour, materials, tools and
incidentals necessary for completion of the work including preparation of slope,
shotcreting, net and construction and fabrication and installation of all accessories of the
shotcrete face along with dowels.
The quantities determine for nail heads connecting beams as provided above shall be paid
for at the Contract unit rate which price shall be full compensation for all labour,
materials, tools and incidentals necessary for completion of the work including
preparation of slope, reinforcements, nail heads, shotcreting and construction, fabrication
and installation of all accessories of the connecting beams along with dowels. No
separate payment shall be made for the overlapping area of the beams at connections.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
1001(1) Temporary working platform for soil nailing works Lump Sum
1001(2)a 32mm dia. soil nails (more than 12m length) inserted
into 125mm dia. bore hole with grouting and coupling
Linear meter
1001(2)b 32mm dia. soil nails (less than or equal to 12m length)
inserted into 125mm dia. bore hole with grouting
Linear meter
261
1001(4) High tensile protective mesh including connecting
clips, MS bearing plate, nut and washers
Square meter
1001(5) Coir mesh Square meter
1001(7)
250x250mm Concrete C30 Grid beam (boundary)
connecting the ends of the completed grid beams at
the top boundary including Excavation, FW, RF and
dowels
Linear meter
1001(10) Pullout Test as instructed by the Project Manager Numbers
1002 HORIZONTAL DRAINS
1002.1 Description
This work shall consist of drilling and installation of horizontal drains and other associate
works. The work shall be carried out in accordance with this Specification and in
conformity with the Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager.
1002.2 Materials
The materials used for the horizontal drains shall meet the requirements of the following,
unless otherwise specified.
a) PVC pipes (Type 1000)
b) Geo-textile shall be having physical and filtration properties specified in Section 805.
1002.3 Construction Requirements
Horizontal drains of PVC pipes (Type 1000) shall be perforated on the upper half and
wrapped with an approved type of geotextile. Inner end of the PVC pipe shall be closed
with an end cap. Diameter and length of the pipe shall be as specified in Drawings or as
instructed by the Project Manager.
If continuous lengths of specified lengths are not available in the market, Engineer’s
instructions should be obtained for jointing two pipes.
1002.4 Measurement and Payment
a. Measurement
For horizontal drains; drillings, PVC perforated pipe (Type 1000), end cap and filter
fabric (Geo-textile) shall be measured by the linear meter.
262
b. Payment
The quantities determine for horizontal drains as provided above shall be paid for at the
Contract unit rate which price shall be full compensation for all labour, materials, tools
and incidentals necessary for completion of the work including drilling, geotextile
rapping, fabrication and installation of horizontal drains.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
1002(1)
Perforated PVC pipe of 75 mm Dia. (Type 1000)
Horizontal Drains with 5mm thick groove and geotextile
wrapping. Rate shall include for drilling and associated
work and disposal of drilled material away from the site
as directed by the Project Manager.
Linear meter
1003 MONITORING
1003.1 Description
This work shall consist of installing maintaining and monitoring of Monitoring
Equipment as specified in Appendix B. The work shall be carried out in accordance with
this Specification and in conformity with the Drawings or as directed by the Project
Manager.
1003.2 Measurement and Payment
a. Measurement
Instrumentation shall be measured as a Provisional Sum item for the cost of providing,
installation of the Monitoring Equipment.
Monitoring & testing shall be measured as a Lump Sum item for the cost of maintaining
and monitoring of the Monitoring Equipment.
b. Payment
Payment shall be made as a Lump Sum and shall be payable when the Contractor has
completed the work satisfactory as per the Appendix B.
Pay
Item Description Pay Unit
1003(1) Instrumentation as per Appendix B Provisional
Sum
1003(2) Monitoring & testing as per Appendix B Lump Sum
263
APPENDIXA
FACILITIES FOR THE PROJECT MANAGER
1. General
The Contractor shall provide, maintain and service:
- Offices,
- Accommodation,
- Vehicles
Including contents, access roads and hard standing for the use of the Employer and
Engineer. Offices, accommodation should be rented and the rent should cover the
whole period of the Project.
All vehicles given to the Employer are on the hired basis.
2 2. Deadline and Payment of the Supply
(a) Offices
The Employer’s and Engineer’s office shall be available and ready for use within 28
days from the receipt of Letter of Acceptance by Contractor.
Payment for the Employer’s and Engineer’s office will be made when all the office
(including furniture and equipment) are completed and handed over to the Employer
and the Project Manager. In the event of the Contractor failing, within the specified
time, to rent the office satisfactory to the Project Manager, the Project Manager will
provide suitable offices for his use and the cost involved shall be deducted from
payments due to the Contractor in accordance Conditions of Contract.
(b) Accommodation
The Employer’s and Engineer’s accommodation shall be available and ready for use
within 28 days from the receipt of Letter of Acceptance by Contractor. After the 28
days, the actual requirement shall follow the Project Manager’s assignment.
In the event of the Contractor failing, within the specified time, to rent the
accommodation satisfactory to the Project Manager, the Project Manager will provide
suitable accommodation for his use and the cost involved shall be deducted from
payments due to the Contractor in accordance with the Conditions of Contract.
264
2.1.1 (c) Vehicles
Vehicles shall be provided within 28 days from the receipt of Letter of Acceptance by
Contractor.
All vehicles will be on hired basis and payments will be made monthly.
In the event of the Contractor failing, within the specified time, to supply the vehicles
satisfactory to the Employer, the Employer will provide suitable vehicles for his use
and the cost involved shall be deducted from payments due to the Contractor in
accordance with the Conditions of Contract.
3 3. Office for the Employer and Engineer
3.1 3.1 General
(a) The Contractor shall furnish and service office made available for the Employer and the
Project Manager. The office shall be regularly cleaned for so long as it is in use and
suitable arrangements be made for the disposal of any waste arising from use of such
offices. The office shall be equipped with air conditioners.
3.1.1 (b) All equipment supplied by the Contractor shall be of a quality and precision
appropriate to its proposed use and shall be delivered in a serviceable condition. The
Contractor shall maintain all such equipment in serviceable condition and replace, if
necessary, any that becomes unserviceable.
3.1.2 (c) Generally, the Contractor shall provide electricity and water services from the
mains supply and provide necessary pumps to supply water from sumps (or wells) to
storage tanks. In the event of the mains electricity supply failing, electricity shall be
supplied from a stand - by generator with automatic change - over switch and adequate
ground connection, installed and operated by the Contractor. Generators to supply
adequate power shall be operated where mains electricity supply is not practicable.
3.2 3.2 Maintenance of Offices
3.2.1 (a) The Contractor shall maintain in good decorative and working order the
buildings and the contents thereof. The maintenance of these facilities shall include daily
cleaning, the provision of cleaning consumables and toilet materials, garbage collection
and disposal, and the maintenance of the gardens and surrounding ground all to the
satisfaction of the Project Manager.
265
3.2.2 (b) The Contractor shall supply and keep replenished at all times all consumable
items such as tea, coffee, milk, sugar, insecticides, first aid supplies, potable water,
laboratory supplies and so forth.
3.2.3 (c) The Contractor shall maintain in good condition and service regularly and repair
or replace as required all items of furniture and equipment provided by him, and shall
provide facilities on a 24 hours per day basis.
3.2.4 (d) The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of all domestic telephone calls
but shall not be responsible for the cost of any overseas calls made from the telephone
provided.
(c) The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of all electricity and water supplied.
(d) The Contractor shall provide watchmen for security purposes to the approval of the
Project Manager.
4 Office for the Project Manager and Employer
5 There shall be two separate offices, one for the Project Manager and one for the
Employer.
6 The facility for the Project Manager shall have the following minimum provisions;
Room Number of
Rooms
Minimum Room size (m
x m)
Asbestos materials shall not be used for roofs and ceilings
Engineer’s Staff 3 5x4
Conference Room 1 5x10
Administration/CAD/Copy
Rooms 2 5x5
Toilets 2 5x4 (for men),
5x3 (for women)
Kitchen/ Pantry 1 4x2
Store Room 1 5x2
Drivers’ Room 1 5x3
Minimum room floor total
Area (excl. passageways and
250 sq.m
266
halls)
Covered Parking for
Vehicles
4
7 The facility for the Employer shall have the following minimum provisions;
Room Number of
Rooms
Minimum Room size (m
x m)
Asbestos materials shall not be used for roofs and ceilings
Employer’s Staff 2 5x4
Administration/CAD/Copy
Rooms 1 5x5
Toilets 2 5x4 (for men),
5x3 (for women)
Kitchen/ Pantry 1 4x2
Store Room 1 5x2
Drivers’ Room 1 5x3
Minimum room floor total
Area (excl. passageways and
halls)
100 sq.m
Covered Parking for
Vehicles
2
7.1 Furniture and Office Equipment for the Employer’s and Engineer’s Staff
The furniture and equipment to be supplied and installed in the offices shall be new,
and of acceptable quality. The furniture may be steel, aluminium, wood or a
combination of these. The Contractor should forward details of the items that the
Project Manager and the Employer intends to purchase and obtain prior approval from
the Project Manager.
Upon completion of the Contract, all non-consumable items provided will become the
property of the Employer.
The Contractor shall provide, install, maintain and provide consumables for the
furniture and equipment purchased, until completion and to the satisfaction of the
Project Manager.
267
Accommodation for the Employer and the Project Manager
7.2 General
The Contractor shall provide rented accommodation for the Employer and the
Engineer to the approval of the Project Manager.
The accommodations shall be equipped with air conditioners, security grilles and
mosquito netting, and shall be fully furnished and equipped with new items by the
Contractor as requested by the Employer and the Project Manager to the satisfaction of
the Project Manager.
Each house shall be provided with one telephone line.
Each house shall be provided with hot and cold water in the kitchen and the
bathrooms.
Each Bathroom shall be equipped with a pedestal type wash basin, pedestal type water
closet (of approved colour ), shower tray, stainless steel taps, shower fittings,(for hot &
cold Water) hand bidet, towel rack, soap tray etc.
(b) The Contractor shall furnish and service accommodation made available for the
Employer and the Project Manager. The accommodation shall be regularly cleaned for
so long as it is in use and suitable arrangements be made for the disposal of any waste
arising from use of such accommodation.
7.2.1 (b) All equipment and furniture supplied by the Contractor shall be of a quality and
precision appropriate to its proposed use and shall be delivered in a serviceable
condition. The Contractor shall maintain all such equipment and furniture in serviceable
condition and replace, if necessary, any that becomes unserviceable.
7.2.2 (c) Generally, the Contractor shall provide electricity and water services from the
mains supply and provide necessary pumps to supply water from sumps (or wells) to
storage tanks. In the event of the mains electricity supply failing, electricity shall be
supplied from a stand - by generator with automatic change - over switch and adequate
ground connection, installed and operated by the Contractor. Generators to supply
adequatepower shall be operated where mains electricity supply is not practicable.
6.2 Maintenance of Accommodation
7.2.3 (a) The Contractor shall maintain in good decorative and working order the
buildings and the contents thereof. The maintenance of these facilities shall include daily
cleaning, the provision of cleaning consumables and toilet materials, garbage collection
and disposal, and the maintenance of the gardens and surrounding ground all to the
satisfaction of the Project Manager.
268
7.2.4 (b) The Contractor shall supply and keep replenished at all times all consumable
items such as first aid supplies, potable waterand so forth.
7.2.5 (c) The Contractor shall maintain in good condition and service regularly and repair
or replace as required all items of furniture and equipment provided by him, and shall
provide facilities on a 24 hours per day basis.
7.2.6 (d) The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of all domestic telephone calls
but shall not be responsible for the cost of any overseas calls made from the telephone
provided.
(e) The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of all electricity and water supplied.
(f) The Contractor shall provide watchmen for security purposes to the approval of the
Project Manager.
The following Table A1.1 and A1.2 indicates the minimum floor requirements of the
Accommodation and provision can be made as 2 to 3 stories including parking
facilities.
Table A1.1:Minimum floor requirements for the Project Manager’s Accommodation
Description Number of Rooms Minimum Room
size ( m2)
Living/ Dining Room (air conditioned)
01 40
Bedroom (air conditioned)
04 15
Attached Toilets/ Bathroom
04 5
Visitors Toilets/Bathroom 01 5
Kitchen
01 15
Pantry 01 12
Servants Accommodation
01 10
Servants Toilet 01 4.5
Minimum room floor total Area (excl.
passageways and halls)
150
Covered Parking for Vehicles 03
269
7.3
Table A1.2:Minimum floor requirements for the Employer’s Accommodation
Description Number of Rooms Minimum Room
size ( m2)
Living/ Dining Room (air conditioned)
01 40
Bedroom (air conditioned)
02 15
Attached Toilets/ Bathroom
02 5
Visitors Toilets/Bathroom 01 5
Kitchen
01 15
Pantry 01 12
Servants Accommodation
01 10
Servants Toilet 01 4.5
Minimum room floor total Area (excl.
passageways and halls)
100
Covered Parking for Vehicles 02
7.4 Furniture, Equipment and Fittings for the Accommodation of the Employer’s
and Engineer’s Site Staff
The furniture and equipment to be supplied and installed in the accommodation shall
be new, and of acceptable quality. The furniture may be steel, aluminium, wood or a
combination of these. The Contractor should forward details of the items that the
Project Manager and the Employer intends to purchase and obtain prior approval from
the Project Manager.
Upon completion of the Contract, all non-consumable items provided will become the
property of the Employer.
The Contractor shall provide, install, maintain and provide consumables for the
furniture and equipment purchased, until completion and to the satisfaction of the
Project Manager.
270
7.5 Hotel Accommodation
Where the Contractor fails to provide the required accommodation to the Project
Manager and the Employer within the time specified or subsequently agreed by the
Project Manager, the Contractor shall provide, at no cost to the Employer, suitable
hotel accommodation as approved by the Project Manager’s staff intended to occupy
the accommodation until such time as the accommodation is ready for occupation.
The Contractor shall provide hotel accommodation, including meals but excluding
alcoholic beverages, to the satisfaction of the Project Manager during the Contractor’s
mobilisation period until the Project Manager’s and Employer’s accommodation
specified in the Contract is approved for occupation by the Project Manager. Such
accommodation shall include provision for immediate dependants of the Project
Manager’s staff.
Hotel accommodation provided after the time the Employer’s and Engineer’s
accommodation is due to be ready for occupation will not be reimbursable.
6. Vehicles for the Employer
The Contractor shall provide and maintain an air conditioned “Double Cab” Pick-Up, 4-
wheel drive, with a diesel engine of at least 3.0 litre capacity in sound condition
,registered in Sri Lanka and manufactured within the last three years, for the use of
Employer, for the period from Commencement Date to the date of Taking over
Certificate. The cumulative usage of the vehicle will not exceed 3000 km per month.
Payment will be made in Vehicle Month for which the vehicle is provided and
maintained. The Contractor shall provide an alternative vehicle with same conditionin the
event of the vehicle is not available for use by reason of being under repair, broken
down, being serviced, or for any other reason.
The Contractor shall provide driver, fuel, repair service etc& he will Pay all the taxes,
comprehensively insure for within the period for the above vehicle is supplied. The
Contractor shall provide a driver for vehicle supplied to the Employer, who although
in the employ of the Contractor, shall be responsible to the Employer and shall be
getting his working instructions from the user of the vehicle authorized by the
Employer.
271
APPENDIX B
INSTRUMENTATION
1.0 Installation of Land slide Monitoring Equipment
All instruments shall be installed within 14 days after awarding the
contract at locations decided by the Project Manager.
1.1Number of Equipment
Following instruments will have to be installed at the sliding masses (Table 1).The type of
equipment, exact locations of equipment, depth, length of the apparatus and their
specifications shall be decided under the instruction of the Consultant.
Table 1: Number of monitoring instruments to be installed at the site
Type of
Equipment
Number of Equipment
Inclinometer 05
Automatic Water Level Gauge
(Piezometer) 05
Automatic Rain
Gauge
Proposed rain gauges in
surrounding areas can be
utilized.
1.2 Installation of Inclinometer
After the drilling completed, in clinometers with water level gauge shall be installed in to
boreholes. Method of installation is presented in Figure 3 and procedure of the setting out
work (refer figure 1&2) shall be instructed by the Project Manager at the site.
Figure 2: Probe
272
Figure 1: Inclinometer (Instrument view)
Figure 2: Inclinometer installation
1.3 Installation of Water Level Gauge (Piezometers)
After the drilling works completed, perforated PVC pipe and water level gauge shall be
installed to the boreholes. Internal diameter of PVC pipe shall be50mm with the minimum
thickness of 4mm.
Method of installation is presented in Figure 3and procedure of the setting out work (refer
Figure 4) shall be instructed by the Project Manager.
273
Figure 3: Groundwater level gauge (Design view)
Water Level
Gauge
Data Receiver
274
Figure 4: Groundwater level gauge and data receiver (Instrument view)
1.4 MONITORING
1.4.1PERIOD AND FREQUENCY OF MONITORING
Period of monitoring work is the maintenance period according to the Contract. However,
the monitoring work will be initiated by the Contractor with the supervision of the Project
Manager right after the installation of instruments is completed. The work will be
undertaken by the Road Development Authority (RDA) after the maintenance period. The
data shall be collected from the monitoring equipment once a month during dry seasons
and twice a month during rainy seasons.
1.4.2COLLECTIONOFDATA
Data collection shall be conducted using a data receiver (refer Figure 4) to be lent by the
Consultant. Collected data shall be downloaded into a personal computer by PC card that
is attached to the control unit. The Consultant shall instruct the relevant party
regarding the procedure of the monitoring.
1.4.3ARRANGEMENTOFTHECOLLECTEDDATA
The Contractor shall arrange the data collected into tables and graphs wi th the use of
specific software (Data Saver).
1.4.4 MAINTENANCEOFTHEEQUIPMENT
The monitoring devices shall be regularly cleaned and checked for continuous and smooth
functioning of data recording by the Contractor.
275
Design Drawings
SUPPLY & FIXING HIGH TENSILE WIRE MESH AND RELATED
ACCESORIES IN THE UNSTABLE SLOPE SEGMENTS BETWEEN CULVERT
NO 75/5 TO 76/4 ON PERADENIYA - BADULLA - CHENKALADI ROAD (A005)
ROAD - CRIP/WORKS/RDA/NCB/328
The following drawings included in the Bidding Document are listed below:
1. NBRO/LRRMD/CRIP/31/12292-11(HAK)-13/R-2
276
F. ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN
Location - Culvert Nos. 75/5 to 76/4 on Peradeniya-Badulla- Chenkalady Road
(A005)
Environmental Management Plan (EMP) for Rectification of Slope
This Environmental Management Plan (EMP) is the summarized matrix of all possible
impacts that may occur during the rectification of landslide area.
The EMP should form part of the Bid Documents and shall be considered alongside the
specifications. Thereby the prescriptions detailed in the EMP are mandatory in nature and
also contractually binding. The EMP will also equally applicable to sub-contractors
including nominated sub-contractors if any. The Contractor will be responsible for the
compliance with the requirements of the EMP. With the assistance of the “Engineer” the
Road Development Authority (RDA) will monitor the compliance of EMP by the
Contractor.
In addition to national laws and regulations, the project should comply with World Bank
Operational Policies, which are the policies of the International Donor Agency (IDA) of
this project. Specifically World Bank projects shall not finance the extraction of resources
from or use of sites within protected areas defined under FFPO or declared forest reserves
under the FO (as per OP 4.04-Natural Habitats Compliance requirements) regardless of
approvals obtained from the respective GOSL agencies.
The bidders are advised to carefully consider the EMP requirements stated under item 2.0
“Construction phase” when preparing the bid and pricing the items of work. The
prescriptions and clauses detailed in the EMP are integral component of the specifications
for relevant item of work unless separate items are included in the Bill of Quantities. Thus
separate payments will not be made in respect of compliance with the EMP. In case the
Contractor or his sub-contractor/s fails to implement the EMP recommendations after
informing in writing, the Project Manager will take whatever actions it is deemed
necessary to ensure that the EMP is properly implemented. If the contractor or his sub-
contractor/s still fails to comply with EMP requirement, the “Engineer” may levy a
penalty based on the level of non-compliance, cost incurred to rectify the damages caused
by such negligence and/ or recover the cost from contractor’s payments.
A draft Environmental Method Statement (EMS) based on the requirements of the EMAP
and in line with the construction plan should be prepared within 30 days from the date of
commencement and final EMS should be submitted within 02 months and approval should
be obtained from the Project Manager. The remedial actions and methodology proposed
by the Contractor shall be acceptable by the Project Manager and in accordance with
EMAP. The EMS shall be amended during the construction period if needed in agreement
with Engineer and Employer.
277
The Contractor through an appointed dedicated / qualified Officer shall implement the
requirements of the EMP. The officer is responsible for,
(a) maintaining up to date records on actions taken by the Contractor with regard to
implementation of EMP recommendations.
(b) timely submission of reports, information and data to the Project Management Unit
(PMU).
(c) participating in the meetings conveyed by the Project Manager and
(d) any other assistance requested by the Project Manager.
278
Activities Protection and preventive measures Locations/
Project phase
Mitigation
cost
Institutional
Responsibility
Implement Supervision
1.0 Advance Works
1.1 Design for structures
(a) RDA should obtain prior consent from relevant authorities such as
Department of Wildlife Conservation, ID. Forest Department etc., for
implementation of proposed plan and any proposed construction works
on/at areas belong to these institutions. RDA should obtain prior consent
from relevant public if any land use of people is likely to be interfered
temporarily or permanently by the proposed drainage improvement work.
Design stage
Design stage
- RDA
(b) All designs should be considered to allow overland flow and sheet flow
from the pavement or cross drainage without any blocking
All designs should be considered to allow overland flow and cross
waterways without any blockage
For drainage designs should be considered for smooth flow without any
blocking
For silt traps designs should be considered for trapping of silt in proper
manner
For catch pits appropriate designs should be considered in order to drain
out rain water without blocking / flooding
Designed drainage facilities must be capable of disposing of the runoff
generated in a given water catchment without inundating the surrounding
land (adjacent properties and utilities or land uses).
Design cost RDA
1.2 Design of slope protection / land-slide management structures
(a) Design must ensure structural integrity and safety of structures to address
issues such as physical trauma associated with failure of structures and
address potential reduction of stabilization of the nearby land due to slope
protection activities. Incorporate as appropriate the following during
planning, siting and design phases:
Design stage
Design cost RDA
279
Inclusion of buffer strips or physical separations around project sites
Incorporation of siting and safety engineering criteria to prevent failures
due natural and/or man-made risks (such as wind, flooding, landslides,
etc.)
Application of locally regulated building codes to ensure structural
integrity
Certification of designing and constructing infrastructure, the applicability
and appropriateness of structural criteria
1.3 EMP
(a) EMP should be included as a Special Condition in the Bid Document; and
EMP should be attached to contract to form part of the contract
requirement
Prior to
bidding
To be
provided as
a provisional
sum and/or
as part of the
engineering
cost
RDA,
2.0 Construction Phase
2.1 Earthwork and Soil Conservation
2.1.1 Site Clearance and Land Development
Prevention of removal of trees as far as possible.
During removing, attention should be paid to maintain minimum
disturbances to soil cover and also care should be taken not to damage
adjoining trees.
Degraded state land identified for forestry activities will be improved to
compensate for the trees removed as 1:2 at least
Water spraying should be done at a regular interval to avoid dust
generation due to site clearance
Trees to be
removed-
Applicable
throughout the
construction
areas. A the
land belongs to
a private owner
the removed
trees need be
handed over to
the relevant
owner. Consent
Engineering
cost
RDA, FD
280
for removal of
trees needs to be
obtained from
the owner
before removal.
Identified trees
for removal
should be
marked for
easy
identification.
2.1.2 Disposal of Debris and Spoil
(a) All debris and residual spoil material including any left earth shall be
disposed only at locations approved by the Project Manager for such
purpose and subjected to the clauses 2.1.1.b and 2.1.1.c.
All material that is reusable or recyclable shall be used for such purposes
either by the contractor or through dealers.
Disposal sites
to be identified
by the
contractor and
approved by
Engineer and
the Local
Authority. If
the land owner
reqests
excavated soil
to be dispose
to his owen
land ,
aprroval needs
to be obtained
from the DS
and
Pradeshiya
sabha.
Engineering
cost
contractor
RDA,
(b) The contractor shall obtain the approval from the relevant Local
Authority such as Prdeshiya Sabha, Municipal Council and other
government agencies (as required) for disposal and spoil at the specified
location, as directed by the Project Manager
Private land that will be selected for disposal should also require written
consent from the land owner
(c) The debris and spoil shall be disposed in such a manner that;
(i) waterways and drainage paths are not blocked
(ii) the disposed material should not be washed away by runoff and
(iii) should not be a nuisance to the public
(d) The debris and residual spoil material including any left earth shall be
used, to refill the burrow areas as directed by the Project Manager,
All burrow sites
(licensed sites)
281
subjected to laying of topsoil as per EMP clause 2.1.2.
identified by
contractor and
approved by
engineer.
To be
identified
(e) Excavated earth materials and all debris materials shall be disposed
immediately without allowing to stockpile at identified locations for
debris disposal, recommended by the Project Manager. During
transportation, dispose materials should be covered with tarpaulin.
Applicable
throughout the
project sites
Engineer.
To be identified
(f) If approved by the Project Manager, contractor can dispose the debris and
spoil as a filling material provided that the contractor can ensure that such
material is used for legally acceptable purposes with disposed in an
environmentally acceptable manner.
In identified
filling sites
subjected to the
approval of
engineer
2.1.2 Conservation and reuse of top soil
(a) Top soil of the agricultural areas and any other productive areas where it
has to be removed for the purpose of this project shall be stripped to a
specified depth of 150mm and stored in stockpiles of height not
exceeding 2m, if directed by the Project Manager. If the contractor is in
any doubt on whether to conserve the topsoil or not for any given area he
shall obtain the direction from the Project Manager in writing
Within the
project sites
where topsoil
from productive
land to be
removed
Engineering
cost
Contractor
RDA,
(b) Removed top soil could be used as a productive soil when
replanting/establishing vegetation
Site(s)
identified for
re-plantation
program
Suitable
locations to be
identified for
replanting.
282
(c) Stockpiled topsoil must be returned to cover the areas including cut
slopes where the topsoil has been removed due to project activities.
Residual topsoil must be distributed on adjoining/proximate barren areas
as identified by the Project Manager in a layer of thickness of 75mm –
150mm.
Within the
project sites
where slope
stabilization is
carried out
and/or on
barren land
A004 road
near 194km.
(d) Topsoil thus stockpiled for reuse shall not be surcharged or overburdened.
As far as possible multiple handling of topsoil stockpiles should be kept
to a minimum.
Locations
where topsoil is
stockpiled for
reuse
( locations to
be identified)
-
2.1.3 Protection of Ground Cover and Vegetation
(a) Construction vehicle, machinery and equipment shall be used and
stationed only in the areas of work and in any other area designated/
approved by the Project Manager. Entry and exit of construction vehicles
and machinery should be restricted to particular points as directed by the
Project Manager
Within the
project areas
- Contractor RDA,
(b) Contractor should provide necessary instructions to drivers, operators and
other construction workers not to destroy ground vegetation cover
unnecessarily
Within the
project areas
2.1.4 Burrowing of Earth
(a) Earth available from construction site excavation works as per design,
may be used as embankment materials, subject to approval of the Project
Manager
All excavation
areas and
embankments
- Contractor RDA
283
(b) Contractor shall comply with the environmental requirements/guidelines
issued by the CEA and the respective local authorities with respect of
locating burrow areas and with regard to all operations related to
excavation and transportation of earth from such sites.
Contractor can also find suitable soil materials from currently operated
licensed burrow pits in the surrounding area, subject to approval of the
Project Manager
No burrow-sites be used (current approved) or newly established within
areas protected under FFPO and FO
All burrow sites
identified and
used by the
contractor
Borrow
sites to be
identified
(c) Burrow areas shall not be opened without having a valid mining license
from the GSMB. The location, depth of excavation and the extent of the
pit or open cut area shall be as approved by the Project Manager.
(d) All burrow pits/areas should be rehabilitated at the end of their use by the
contractor in accordance with the requirements/guidelines issued by the
CEA and the respective local authority.
Engineering
cost
(e) Establishment of burrow pits/areas and its operational activities shall not
cause any adverse impact to the near-by properties. Also shall not be a
danger of health hazard to the people.
All excavation
areas, slopes and
burrow sites
Borrow sites to be
identified
-
(f) Contractor shall take all steps necessary to ensure the stability of slopes
including those related to temporary works and burrow pits.
Engineering
cost
2.1.5 Prevention of soil erosion
(a) Debris material shall be disposed in such a manner that waterways,
drainage paths would not get blocked.
Drainage paths associated with the infrastructure should be improved /
erected to drain rain water properly.
Silt traps will be constructed to avoid siltation into water ways where
necessary.
Applicable
throughout
project sites
Locations of
culverts, leader
ways (directly
connected to
Engineering
cost
Contractor RDA
284
To avoid siltation, drainage paths should not be directed to streams, other
water bodies and sea directly and they should be separated from streams /
other water bodies / sea
streams / water
bodies), toe walls &
silt traps to be
erected.
Special
attention to
stream
(b) Barricades such as humps will be erected at excavated areas for culverts,
silttraps, toe walls, filling and lifting with roper sign boards, as some
work in these sections will have to be stopped during heavy rains due to
heavy erosion. To prevent soil erosion in these excavated areas, proper
earth drain system should be introduced.
Applicable
throughout
project sites
(c) Embankment slopes, slopes of cuts, etc. shall not be unduly exposed to
erosive forces. These exposed slopes shall be graded and covered by
grass or other suitable materials per the specifications.
All fills, back fills and slopes should be compacted immediately to reach
the specified degree of compaction and establishment of proper mulch.
(d) Work that lead to heavy erosion shall be avoided during the raining
season. If such activities need to be continued during rainy season prior
approval must be obtained from the Project Manager by submitting a
proposal on actions that will be undertaken by the contractor to prevent
erosion.
-
(e) The work, permanent or temporary shall consist of measures as per
design or as directed by the Project Manager to control soil erosion,
sedimentation and water pollution to the satisfaction of the Project
Manager. Typical measures include the use of berms, dikes sediment
basins, fiber mats, mulches, grasses, slope drains and other devices. All
sedimentation and pollution control works and maintenance thereof are
deemed, as incidental to the earthwork or other items of work and no
separate payment will be made for their implementation.
Engineering
cost
2.1.6 Contamination of soil by fuel and lubrications
(a) Vehicle/machinery and equipment servicing and maintenance work shall
be carried out only in designated locations/ service stations approved by
Servicing yards
to be used for
Engineering Contractor RDA,
285
the Project Manager vehicle
servicing
cost
(b) Approval from CEA in the form of an Environmental Protection Licenses
(EPL) should be secured by the contractor if he intends to prepare his
own vehicle servicing yard
RDA,
CEA
(c) Waste oil, other petroleum products and untreated wastewater shall not be
discharged on ground so that to avoid soil pollution. Adequate measures
shall be taken against pollution of soil by spillage of petroleum/oil
products from storage tanks and containers. All waste petroleum products
shall be disposed of in accordance with the guidelines issued by the CEA
or the Project Manager.
Servicing yards
to be used for
vehicle
servicing and
locations where
vehicles will be
temporarily
stationed
(d) Sites used for vehicle and plant service and maintenance shall be restored
back to its initial status. Site restoration will be considered as incidental to
work.
New servicing
yards
developed by
the contractor
for the project
RDA,
2.1.7 Disposal of harmful construction wastes
(a) Contractor prior to the commencement of work shall provide list of
harmful, hazardous and risky chemicals/ material that will be used in the
project work to the Project Manager. Contractor shall also provide the list
of places where such chemicals/materials or their containers or other
harmful materials have been dumped as waste at the end of the project.
Locations
identified to
store chemicals
and waste
disposal
- Contractor RDA,
(b) All disposal sites should be approved by the Project Manager and
approved by CEA and relevant local authority.
RDA
(c) The contractor shall clean up any area including water-bodies
affected/contaminated (if any) as directed by the Project Manager at his
own cost.
All affected
water bodies
close to
material storage
and waste
disposal sites
286
2.1.8. Quarry operations
(a) Utilizing the existing quarry sites available in the project influential area
as much as possible which are approved by GSMB with valid EPL and
Industrial Mining Licences;
If new quarries are to be opened, prior approval should be obtained from
GSMB, CEA and local authorities such as Pradeshiya Sabha.
Selected quarry sites should have proper safety measures such as
warnings, safety nets etc., and third party insurance cover to protect
external parties that may be affected due to blasting.
Quarry sites should not be established within protected sites identified
under the FFPO and FO
All, quarry sites
which will be
used during
construction
phase.
Engineering
cost
Contractor RDA,
CEA,
GSMB,
local
authorities
(b) It is recommended not to seek material from quarries that have ongoing
disputes with community.
-
(c) The maintenance and rehabilitation of the access roads in the event of
damage by the contractors operations shall be a responsibility of the
contractor.
Engineering
cost
2.2 Storage and handling of construction material
2.2.1 Emission of dust
(a) Storage locations of sand, metal, soil should be located away from
settlements and other sensitive receptors and covered (with artificial
barriers or natural vegetation).
Measures given under clauses 2.5.1 (c), (d), (e) should be considered
within material storage site to minimize dust during handling of material.
All access roads within the storage site should be sprinkled with water for
dust suspension.
At all material
storage
locations (stock
piles of sand,
gravel and
metal)
Engineering
cost
Contractor RDA,
2.2.2 Storage of fuel, oil and chemicals (avoid fumes and offensive odor)
(a) All cement, bitumen (barrels), oil and other chemicals should be stored
and handled on an impervious surface (concrete slab) above ground level.
Storage facility of cement, bitumen (barrels), oil and other chemicals
should be an enclosed structure ensuring that no storm water flows in to
the structure.
At all material
storage
locations
(cement,
bitumen, fuel,
Engineering
cost
Contractor RDA,
287
A ridge should be placed around the storage facility to avoid runoff
getting in to the structure.
Adequate ventilation should be kept to avoid accumulation of fumes and
offensive odor that could be harmful to material handlers.
Measures given under clause 2.9 should be considered to avoid any
accidents and risks to worker population and public.
oil and other
chemicals used
for construction
activities)
2.2.3 Transportation of material
(a) The contractor should avoid over loaded trucks to transport material to
construction sites. During transportation, materials should be covered
with tarpaulin. Avoid peak hours in roads with moderate to high traffic’;
the contractor shall minimize possible public nuisance due to dust, traffic
congestion, air pollution, etc., due to such haulage; If local roads are used,
select routes based on the truck load; divide the load to prevent damages
to local roads and bridges; observe speed limits and maintain vehicles in
the good condition; transport material under cover; avoid peak hours in
roads with moderate to high traffic.
If there are damages to local roads and other utilities due to hauling in
roads which were not identified during design stage, Contractor shall
attends to repair all damaged infrastructure/ roads, if needed through
relevant authorities
Within the
project
locations and
the vicinity
- Contractor RDA,
2.3 Water – Protection of Water Sources and Quality
2.3.1. Loss of minor water sources and disruption to water users
(a) Contractor should make employees aware on water conservation and
waste minimization in the construction process.
Project sites
and worker
camps
- Contractor RDA,
(b) Arrange adequate supply of water for the project purpose throughout the
construction period. Not obtain water for project purposes, including for
labor camps, from public or community water supply schemes without a
prior approval from the relevant authority.
Not extract water from ground water or surface water bodies without the
permission from engineer & relevant authority. Obtain the permission for
Engineering
cost
288
extracting water prior to the commencing of the project, from the relevant
authority.
(c) Contractor shall protect sources of water (potable or otherwise) such as
water sources used by the community so that continued use these water
sources will not be disrupted by the work. In case the closer of such
sources is required on temporary basis contractor shall provide alternative
arrangement for supply. Alternative sources such as wells thus provided
should be within acceptable distance to the original sources and
accessible to the affected community.
Wells and other
public water
sources
locations within
the project sites
(d) Contractor shall not divert, close or block existing canals and streams in a
manner that adversely affect downstream intakes. If diversion or closure
or blocking of canals and streams is required for the execution of work,
contractor must obtain the Project Managers approval in writing.
Contractor shall also obtain the approval from the National Water Supply
and Drainage Board (NWS&DB) or local authority or Divisional
Secretary depending on the operating agency of the intake/water supply.
Contractor shall restore the drainage path back to its original status once
the need for such diversion or closure or blockage ceased to exist. During
the affected period contractor shall supply water to the affected
community.
Waterways
located in the
surrounding
areas of road
sections or the
contractor’s
work sites.
(e) In case the contractors activities going to adversely affect the quantity or
quality of water, the contractor shall serve notice to the relevant
authorities and downstream users of water sufficiently in advance.
Project sites
(f) Apply best management practices to control contamination of run-off
water during maintenance & operation of equipment.
Maintain adequate distance between stockpiles & water bodies to control
effects to natural drainage paths.
construction
sites, material
and soil storage
areas, and
equipment and
machinery
service areas
-
2.3.2 Siltation into water bodies
289
(a) Contractor shall take measures to prevent siltation of water bodies as a
result of construction work including, construction of temporary /
permanent devices to prevent water pollution due to siltation and increase
of turbidity. These shall include the measures against erosion as per EMP
2.1.6.
All water
bodies located
around the
project areas
Engineering
cost
Contractor RDA,
(b) Construction materials containing small / fine particles shall be stored in
places not subjected to flooding and in such a manner that these materials
will not be washed away by runoff.
(c) Temporary soil dumps should be placed at least 200m away from all
water bodies
(d) If temporary soil piles are left at the site for a long time those piles should
be covered with thick polythene sheets
(e) All fills, back fills and slopes should be compacted immediately to reach
the specified degree of compaction and establishment of proper mulch
2.3.3 Alteration of drainage paths
(a) Contractor shall not close or block existing canals and streams
permanently. If diversion or closure or blocking of canals and streams is
required for the execution of work (e.g. for construction of bypass),
contractor must first obtain the Project Managers approval in writing.
Contractor shall carry out an investigation and report to the Project
Manager, if an investigation is requested by the Project Manager.
Contractor shall also obtain the approval from the relevant agencies such
as ID/ /Divisional Secretary prior to such action is taken. Contractors
shall restore the drainage path back to its original status once the need for
such diversion or closure or blockage is no longer required.
All drainage
paths impacted
by the project
activities
Engineering
cost
Contractor RDA
(b) The debris and spoil shall be disposed in such a manner that waterways
and drainage paths are not blocked.
(c) Avoid/ minimize construction works near/ at such drainage locations
during heavy rain seasons such as monsoon rain periods.
2.3.4. Contamination of water from construction wastes
(a) The work shall be carried out in such a manner that pollution of natural
water courses rivers, lagoons, sea and other minor stream paths located
At all water
courses located
Engineering Contractor RDA,
290
within construction areas or downstream. Measures as given in 2.1.6.,
2.1.7, 2.1.8, 2.3.2 and 2.3.6 clauses shall be taken to prevent the
wastewater produced in construction from entering directly into streams,
water bodies or the irrigation systems.
adjacent
construction
sites and
downstream
cost
(b) Avoid / minimize construction works near / at such drainage locations
during heavy rainy seasons
At all water
courses located
adjacent
construction
sites
-
(c) The discharge standards promulgated under the National Environmental
Act shall be strictly adhered to. All waste arising from the project is to be
disposed in a manner that is acceptable to the Project Manager and as per
the guidelines/instructions issued by the CEA.
At all water
courses located
adjacent
construction
sites and
downstream.
Engineering
cost
2.3.5. Contamination from fuel and lubricants
(a) All vehicle and plant maintenance and servicing stations shall be located
and operated as per the conditions and /or guidelines stipulated under the
EPL issued by CEA. In general these should be located at least 200m
away from water bodies and wastewater shall not be disposed without
meeting the disposal standards of the CEA. Wastewater from vehicle and
plant maintenance and servicing stations shall be cleared of oil and grease
and other contaminants to meet the relevant standards before discharging
to the environment.
Vehicle and
plant
maintenance
and servicing
centers
Engineering
cost
Contractor RDA,
(b) Vehicle, machinery and equipment maintenance and re-filling shall be
done as required in EMP clause 2.1.6. to prevent water pollution as well
Yards,
servicing
centers
2.3.6. Locating, sanitation and waste disposal in construction camps
(a) Locations selected for labor camps should be approved by engineer and
comply with guidelines/ recommendations issued by the CEA/Local
Authority. Construction of laborer camps shall not be located within
200m from waterways or near to a site or premises of religious, cultural
At all labor
camps
Engineering
cost
Contractor RDA,
291
or archeological importance and school.
(b) Labor camps shall be provided with adequate and appropriate facilities
for disposal of sewerage and solid waste. The sewage systems shall be
properly designed, built and operated so that no pollution to ground or
adjacent water bodies/watercourses takes place. Garbage bins shall be
provided the camps and regularly emptied. Garbage should be disposed
off in a hygienic manner, to the satisfaction of the relevant norms.
Compliance with the relevant regulations and guidelines issued by the
CEA/LA shall be strictly adhered to.
(c) Contractor shall ensure that all camps are kept clean and hygienic.
Necessary measures shall be taken to prevent breeding of vectors
(d) Contractor shall report any outbreak of infectious disease of importance
in a labor camp to the Project Manager and the Medical Officer of Health
(MOH) or to the Public Health Inspector (PHI) of the area immediately.
Contractor shall carry out all instructions issued by the authorities, if any.
-
(e) Contractor shall adhere to the CEA recommendations on disposal of
wastewater. Wastewater shall not be discharged to ground or waterways
in a manner that will cause unacceptable surface or ground water
pollution.
-
(f) All relevant provisions of the Factories Act and any other
relevant regulations aimed at safety and health of workers
shall be adhered to.
-
(g) Contractor should remove all labor camps fully after its need is over,
empty septic tanks, remove all garbage, debris and clean and restore the
area back to its former condition.
A consent letter from the land owner should be obtained that certifies the
decommissioning has taken place to the level acceptable to the land
owner
Engineering
cost
2.3.7. Wastage of water and waste minimization
(a) The contractor will minimize wastage of water in the construction
process/operations by reusing water as much as possible, utilizing only
Within project
sites and labor
- Contractor RDA,
292
the required amount of water for the construction works etc… camps
(b) The contractor shall educate and made employees aware on water
conservation, waste minimization and safe disposal of waste following
guidelines given by CEA and LA.
2.3.8. Extraction of water
(a) The contractor is responsible for arranging adequate supply of water for
the project purpose throughout the construction period. Contractor shall
not obtain water for his purposes including for labour camps from public
or community water supplies without approval from the relevant
authority.
Such extraction (if approved) should be under direct supervision of the
Project Manager
Within project
sites and labor
camps
Engineering
cost
Contractor RDA,
(b) Extraction of water by the contractor for the project purposes shall
comply with the guidelines and instructions issued by relevant authority.
The Contractor shall not extract water from groundwater or from surface
water-bodies without permission from the Project Manager.
-
(c) Construction over and close to rivers, minor streams and lagoon shall be
undertaken in dry season.
All drainage
and irrigation
activities
(d) The Contractor may use the natural sources of water subject to the
provision that any claim arising out of conflicts with other users of the
said natural sources of water shall be made good entirely by the
contractor
At all natural
water sources
used for
construction
works
2.4. Flood Prevention
2.4.1. Blockage of drainage paths and drains
(a) Contractor’s activities shall not lead to flooding conditions as a result of
blocked drainage paths and drains. The contractor shall take all measures
necessary or as directed by the Project Manager to keep all drainage paths
and drains clear of blockage at all times.
All construction
work sites
Engineering
cost
Contractor RDA,
(b) If flooding or stagnation of water is caused by contractor’s activities,
293
contractors shall provide suitable means to (a) prevent loss of access to
any land or property and (b) prevent damage to land and property.
Contractor shall compensate for any loss of income or damage as a result.
2.4.2 Work in Flood Prone Areas
(a) Contractor’s activities shall not lead to aggravate floods in flood prone
areas when working in flood prone areas.
All construction
work sites and
their impacts
areas
- Contractor RDA,
(b) When working in flood prone areas during rainy season the contractor
shall avoid storing materials, chemicals and other items of work in areas
where those can be washed away by the floods.
2.5 Air Pollution
2.5.1. Generation of Dust
(a) The contractor shall effectively manage the dust generating activities such
as topsoil removal, handling and transporting sand, rubble, bitumen, and
cement during periods of high winds or during more stable conditions
with winds directed towards adjacent residences and other facilities.
Within the
construction
area where
earth work will
take place,
storage
locations of
sand, rubble,
bitumen,
cement and all
sub roads used
for material
transportation,
paying special
attention to
sensitive
locations.
Engineering
cost
Contractor RDA,
(b) All stockpiles shall be located sufficiently away from sensitive receptors.
(c) All vehicles delivering materials shall be covered to avoid spillage and
dust emission.
(d) The Contractor should avoid, where possible and take suitable action to
prevent dirt and mud being carried to the roadway (particularly following
wet weather).
(e) The contractor should enforce vehicle speed limits to minimize dust
generation.
(f) The Contractor shall employ a water truck to sprinkle water for dust
suppression on all exposed areas as required (note: the use of waste water
/ waste oil for dust suppression is prohibited)
(g) All cleared areas shall be rehabilitated progressively.
(h) All earthwork shall be protected in a manner acceptable to the minimize
generation of dust.
294
(i) All existing roads used by vehicles of the contractor, or any of his sub-
contractor or supplies of materials or plant and similar roads which are
part of the works shall be kept clean and clear of all dust/mud or other
extraneous materials dropped by such vehicles or their tyres.
(j) Clearance shall be affected immediately by manual sweeping and
removal of debris, or, if so directed by the Project Manager, by
mechanical sweeping and clearing equipment. Additionally, if so directed
by the Project Manager, the road surface will be hosed or sprinkled water
using appropriate equipment.
(k) Plants, machinery and equipment shall be handled (including
dismantling) so as to minimize generation of dust.
(l) The contractor shall take every precaution to reduce the level of dust
emission from the hot mix plants and the batching plants up to the
satisfaction of the Project Manager in accordance with the relevant
emission norms.
2.5.2 Emission from Hot-Mix Plants and Batching Plants
(a) The hot mix plants and batching plants shall be sited in accordance with
CEA guidelines. It is recommended that hot mix plants and batching
plants to be located sufficiently away from sensitive receptors such as
vulnerable habitats, religious and cultural sites, residential areas, schools
and industrial areas
Locations at
which hot mix
plant/s and
concrete
batching plant/s
to be located
- Contractor RDA
(b) The exhaust gases shall comply with the requirements of the relevant
current emission control legislation. All operations at plants shall be
undertaken in accordance with all current rules and regulations protecting
the environment as well as the conditions given in the EPL.
(c) The hot mix plant be sited in accordance with CEA guidelines and
operated with an EPL. The hot mix plants shall be fitted with the
requirements of the relevant current emission control legislation.
Road side mixing should be avoided
2.5.3. Odor and offensive smells
(a) Contractor shall take all precautions such as storing all chemicals used for
construction works in properly closed containers with good ventilations to
Within
construction
Engineering Contractor RDA,
295
prevent odor and offensive smell emanating from chemicals and
processes applied in construction works or from labor camps. In a
situation when/where odor or offensive smell does occur contractor shall
take immediate action to rectify the situation. Contractor is responsible
for any compensation involved with any health issue arisen out of bad
odor and offensive smells.
and work sites
including all
sites used for
store all
chemicals and
places where
chemical
reactions take
place.
cost
(b) The waste disposal and sewerage treatment system for the labor camps
shall be properly designed, built and operated so that no odor is
generated. Compliance with the regulations on health and safety as well
as CEA and LA guidelines shall be strictly adhered to.
At all labor
camps
2.5.4. Emission from construction Vehicles, Equipment and Machinery
(a) The emission standards promulgated under the National Environment Act
shall be strictly adhered to.
All plants,
machinery and
vehicles used
for construction
- Contractor RDA
(b) All vehicles, equipment and machinery used for construction shall be
regularly serviced and well maintained to ensure that emission levels
comply with the relevant standards.
Engineering
cost
(c) Contractor should obtain the certificate issued by the Vehicular Emission
Test (VET) for all construction vehicles, plants and other machineries and
it should be renewed annually
2.5.5. Air Pollution from Crusher
(a) Crusher plants should operate under an EPL and shall confirm to relevant
dust emission levels as stated in the EPL. Only the quarries approved by
GSMB and holding current EPL shall be used for material extraction.
Location of
crusher plants
- Contractor RDA,
(b) Crushing plants shall be sited sufficiently away from sensitive receptors
such as houses, place of worships and outdoor recreation areas (locations
given under item 2.4.1) or as required by the Project Manager.
296
(c) Sprinkling of water (through a sprinkler system) for dust suppression. Engineering
cost
2.6 Noise Pollution and Vibration
2.6.1 Noise from Vehicles, Plants and Equipment.
(a) All machinery and equipment should be well maintained and fitted with
noise reduction devices in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
All machinery
and vehicles
used for
construction
works
Engineering
cost
Contractor RDA,
(b) In construction sites within 150 m of the nearest habitation, noisy
construction work such as crushing, concrete mixing and batching,
mechanical compaction, etc., will be stopped between 20.00 hours
to 06.00 hours. No construction shall take place within 100m
around hospitals between 20.00 hours to 06.00 hours. Near noise
sensitive sites, such as schools noisy equipment shall not be used
during noise sensitive times of the day.
Within the
construction
sites and their
vicinity
-
(c) All vehicles and equipment used in construction shall be fitted with
exhaust silences. During routine servicing operations, the effectiveness
of exhaust silencers shall be checked and if found to be defective shall be
replaced. Notwithstanding any other conditions of contract, noise level
from any item of plant(s) must comply with the relevant legislation for
levels of sound emission. Non-compliant plant shall be removed from
site.
Engineering
cost
(d) Noise limits for construction equipment used in this project (measured at
one meter from the edge of the equipment in free field) such as
compactors, rollers, front loaders, concrete mixers, cranes (moveable),
vibrators, and saws shall not exceed 75 dB(A).
All equipment,
machinery and
vehicles used
for construction
works
-
(e) Maintenance of vehicles, equipment and machinery shall be regular and
proper, to the satisfaction of the Project Manager, to keep noise from
these at a minimum.
Engineering
cost
297
(f) Workers in vicinity of strong noise, and workers working with or in
crushing, compaction, batching or concrete mixing operations shall be
provided with protective gear.
Within the
construction
sites and their
vicinity
2.6.2 Vibration
(a) Contractor shall take appropriate action to ensure that construction works
do not result in damage to adjacent properties due to vibration.
Within the
construction
sites and their
vicinity
- Contractor RDA,
(b) Prior to commencement of excavation, blasting activity, the Contractor
shall undertake a condition survey of existing structures within the zone
of influence, as agreed with the relevant government agencies and the
Project Manager.
(c) Contractor shall carry out monitoring at the nearest vibration sensitive
receptor during blasting or when other equipment causing vibration are
used.
(d) The contractor shall modify the method of construction until compliance
with the criteria, if vibration levels exceed the relevant vibration criteria.
(e) Contractor shall pay due consideration on vibration impacts of blasting on
adjoining structures. Explosive loads shall be determined so that
excessive vibration can be avoided and blasts shall be controlled blasting
in nature. Notwithstanding to these provisions contractor is liable for any
damage caused by blasting work.
2.6.3 Noise from Blasting or Pre splitting Operations
(a) Blasting shall be carried out during fixed hours (preferably during mid-
day), as permitted by the Project Manager. The timing should be made
known to all the people within 500 m (200 m for pre-splitting) from the
blasting site in all directions. People, except those who actually light the
fuse shall be excluded from the area of 200 m (50 m for pre-splitting)
from the blasting site in all directions at least 10m minutes before the
blasting.
Use chemical blasting where rocks have to be removed for landslide
mitigation measures
At quarry sites
and landslide
mitigation sites
- Contractor RDA
2.7 Impacts to Flora
298
2.7.1 Loss or Damage to Trees and Vegetation
(a) All works shall be carried out in a manner that the destruction to
the flora and their habitats is minimized. Trees and vegetation shall
be felled / removed only if that impinges directly on the permanent
works or necessary temporary works. In all such cases contractor
shall take prior approval from the Project Manager.
All project sites
- Contractor RDA,
FD,
(b) Contractor shall make every effort to avoid removal and/or
destruction of trees of religious, cultural and aesthetic significance.
If such action is unavoidable the Project Manager shall be
informed in advance and carry out public consultation and report
on the same should be submitted to the Project Manager.
(c) Contractor shall adhere to the guidelines and recommendations made by
the Central Environmental Authority, if any with regard to felling of trees
and removal of vegetation.
(d) Removed trees must be handed over to the Timber Corporation.
(e) The contractor shall plant over 5 year old root-balled native trees suitable
for the location as identified by the Project Manager.
The planting should take place in public land suitable for the purpose
The contractor shall build hardy structures around the trees for protection.
The contractor shall be responsible for ensuring the well-being of the
trees/plants until the end of the contract
Indicative
number of trees
/ plants and
indicative
number of
planting
structures
necessary are to
be identified by
the contractor.
Planting should
take place as
soon as the
plant removal
takes place
Engineering
cost
2.7.2 Chance finds of important Flora
299
(a) During construction, if a rare/threatened/endangered flora species is
found, it shall be immediately informed to the PMU by the contractor
through the Project Manager. All activities that could destroy such flora
and/or its habitat shall be stopped with immediate effect. Such activities
shall be started only after obtaining the Project Manager’s approval.
Contractor shall carry out all activities and plans that the Project Manager
instructed him to undertake to conserve such flora and/or its habitat.
All project sites
- Contractor RDA,
2.8. Impact on Fauna
2.8.1. Loss, Damage or Disruption to Fauna
(a) All works shall be carried out in such a manner that the destruction or
disruption to the fauna and their habitats is minimum.
All project sites
- Contractor RDA,
FD,
DWLC
(b) Construction workers shall be instructed to protect fauna including wild
animals and aquatic life as well as their habitats. Hunting, poaching and
unauthorized fishing by project workers is not allowed.
(d) Siting of all hot mix plants, crushing plants, workshops, depots and
temporary worker camps and storing of toxic and hazardous materials at
approved locations, and recycling and dumping of solid waste matter at
locations approved by local authorities, maintenance of vehicles and
equipment in good operable condition, ensuring no leakage of oil or fuel
and the fitting of proper exhaust baffles. Any solid waste should not be
dumped into natural habitats.
Locations
selected for
erecting the
asphalt, crusher
and concrete
batching plants
and workshops
Engineering
cost
2.8.2 Chance found important Fauna
(a) During construction, if a rare/threatened/endangered fauna species is
found, it shall be immediately informed to the PMU by the contractor. All
activities that could destroy such fauna and/or its habitat shall be stopped
with immediate effect. Such activities shall be started only after obtaining
the Project Manager’s approval. Contractor shall carry out all activities
and plans that the Project Manager instructed him to undertake to
conserve such fauna and/or its habitat.
All project sites
- Contractor RDA, FD,
DWLC
300
2.9 Disruption to people
2.9.1 Loss of Access
(a) At all times, the Contractor shall provide safe and convenient passage for
vehicles, pedestrians and livestock. Work that affects the use of existing
accesses shall not be undertaken without providing adequate provisions to
the prior satisfaction of the Project Manager.
All project sites
Engineerin
g cost
Contractor RDA,
(b) The works shall not interfere unnecessarily or improperly and ensure
convenience of public at all times -
(c) On completion of the works, all temporary obstructions to access shall be
cleared away, all rubbish and piles of debris that obstruct access be
cleared to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
Engineerin
g cost
(d) Providing advance information to the public about the planned
construction works and activities causing disruption to access and the
temporary arrangements made to give relief to public in order to avoid
any inconveniences due to the construction activities.
2.9.3 Traffic Control and Safety
(a) The Contractor shall take all necessary measures for the safety of traffic
during construction and provide, erect and maintain such barricades,
including signs, markings, flags, lights and flagmen as may be required
by the Project Manager for the information and protection of traffic
approaching or passing through the section of the highway under
improvement. The provision of traffic safety measures shall be
considered incidental to work and follow The Institute for Construction
Training and Development (ICTAD) guidelines and instructions given by
the Police, if any.
Road-side
construction
sites
Engineering
cost
Contractor RDA,
(b) Informing the public through newspapers/ announcements/ radio/ TV etc.
about the construction activities in order to avoid any inconveniences due
to the construction activities.
Project
influence area
2.10 Accidents and Risks
2.10.1 Public and Worker safety
301
(a) All reasonable precautions will be taken to prevent danger of the workers
and the public from accidents such as fire, explosions, blasts, falling
rocks, falling to excavated pits, chemical sprays, unsafe power supply
lines etc.
Construction
areas, material
storage and
worker camps
Engineering
cost
Contractor RDA,
(b) The Contractor shall comply with requirements for the safety of the
workmen as per the international labor organization (ILO) convention
No. 62 and Safety and Health regulations of the Factory Ordinance of Sri
Lanka to the extent that those are applicable to this contract. The
contractor shall supply all necessary safety appliances such as safety
goggles, helmets, masks, boots, etc., to the workers and staff. The
contractor has to comply with all regulations regarding safe scaffolding,
ladders, working platforms, gangway, excavations, trenches and safe
means of entry and egress.
2.10.2 Prevention of Risks of Electrocution
(a)
All electrical wiring and supply related work should confirm to British
Standards (BS) or relevant Sri Lankan Standards. Adequate precautions
will be taken to prevent danger of electrocuting from electrical equipment
and power supply lines including distribution boards, transformers, etc.
Measures such as danger signboards, danger/red lights, fencing and lights
will be provided to protect the public and workers. All electric power
driven machines to be used in the construction shall be free from defect,
be properly maintained and kept in good working order, be regularly
inspected and as per BS provisions and to the satisfaction of the Project
Manager.
Construction
areas, material
storage and
worker camps
Engineering
cost
Contractor RDA,
2.10.3 Risk at Hazardous Activity
(a) All workers employed in hazardous activities shall be provided with
necessary protective gear. These activities include mixing asphalt
material, cement, lime mortars, concrete etc., welding work, work at
crushing plants, blasting work, operators of machinery and equipment
such as power saws, etc.
Construction
areas, material
storage and
worker camps
Engineering
cost
Contractor RDA,
302
(b) The use of any toxic chemical shall be strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. The Project Manager shall be notified of
toxic chemicals that are planned to be used in all contract related
activities. A register of all toxic chemicals delivered to the site shall be
kept and maintained up to date by the Contractor. The register shall
include the trade name, physical properties and characteristics, chemical
ingredients, health and safety hazard information, safe handling and
storage procedures, and emergency and first aid procedures for the
product.
2.10.4 Lead Pollution
(a) No paint containing lead or lead products will be used except in the form
of paste or readymade paint. Facemasks shall be supplied to workers who
are working in spray painting or scraping lead paints.
Workshops,
yards where
spray painting
is done
- Contractor RDA,
2.10.5 Handling of Explosives
(a) Except as provided in the contract or ordered or authorized by the Project
Manager, the Contractor shall not use explosives. Where the use of
explosives is so provided or ordered or authorized, the Contractor shall
comply with the requirements of the following Sub-Clauses of this Clause
besides the law of the land as applicable.
All locations
where blasting
activities will
commence
- Contractor
RDA,
(b) The Contractor shall at all times take every possible precaution and shall
comply with relevant laws and regulations relating to the importation,
handling, transportation, storage and use of explosives. Contractor shall
obtain Ministry of Defense & Urban Development (MoDUD) approval
for importing and handling explosives and keep the Local Police
informed of the same.
Engineering
cost
RDA,
MoDUD
2.11 Health and Safety
2.11.1 Prevention of Vector based Diseases
(a) Contractor shall take necessary actions to prevent breeding of mosquitoes
at places of work, labor camps, plus office and store buildings. Stagnation
At worker
camps, stores,
Engineering Contractor RDA,
303
of water in all areas including gutters, used and empty cans, containers,
tyres, etc shall be prevented. Approved chemicals to destroy mosquitoes
and larvae should be regularly applied.
All burrow sites should be rehabilitated at the end of their use by the
contractor in accordance with the requirements/guidelines issued by the
Central Environmental authority and relevant local authorities
yards cost
(b) Contractor shall keep all places of work, labor camps, plus office and
store buildings clean devoid of garbage to prevent breeding of rats and
other vectors such as flies.
2.11.2 Workers Health and Safety
(a) Contractor shall comply with the provisions in Health and Safety
regulations under the Factory Ordinance with regard to provision of
health and safety measures and amenities at work place(s).
Within
construction
sites,
workshops and
worker camps
- Contractor RDA,
2.11.3 First Aid
(a) At every workplace, first aid kit shall be provided as per the regulations.
At every workplace an ambulance room containing the prescribed
equipment and nursing staff shall be provided.
Within
construction
sites, quarry,
crusher,
concrete
batching plants,
workshops and
worker camps
Engineering
cost
Contractor RDA,
2.11.4 Potable Water
(a) In every workplace and labor camps portable water shall be available
throughout the day in sufficient quantities.
Within
construction
sites, quarry,
crusher,
concrete
batching plants,
workshops and
worker camps
Engineering
cost
Contractor RDA,
304
2.11.5 Hygiene
(a) The contractor shall provide and maintain necessary (temporary)
living accommodation and ancillary facilities for labour to standards
and scale approved by the Project Manager.
Worker camps
and temporary
sheds at work
sites
Engineering
cost
Contractor RDA,
(b) At every workplace and labor camps sufficient number of bathing
facilities, latrines and urinals shall be provided in accordance with the
Health and Safety regulations and/or as directed by the Project Manager.
These bathroom and toilet facilities shall be suitably located within the
workplace/buildings. Latrines shall be cleaned at least three times daily in
the morning, midday and evening and kept in a strict sanitary condition.
If women are employed, separate latrines and urinals, screened from
those for men and marked in the vernacular shall be provided. There
shall be adequate supply of water, within and close to latrines and urinals.
(c) The sewage system for the camp must be properly designed, built and
operated so that no health hazard occurs and no pollution to the air,
ground or adjacent watercourses takes place.
(d) Garbage bins must be provided in the camp, work sites and regularly
emptied and the garbage disposed off in a hygienic manner. Construction
camps shall have a clean hygienic environment and adequate health care
shall be provided for the work force.
(e) Unless otherwise arranged for by the Local Authority, the contractor shall
arrange proper disposal of sludge from septic tanks. The contractor shall
obtain approval for such disposal from the Public Health Inspector of the
area.
2.12 Protection of Archaeological, Cultural and Religious Places and Properties
2.12.1 Prevention of damage to Cultural and Religious Places and Properties
(a) During construction activities the contractor should take all necessary and
adequate care to minimize impacts on cultural properties which includes
cultural sites and remains, places of worship.
Workers should not be allowed to trespass in to such areas.
Near physical
cultural
resources
- Contractor RDA,
305
2.12.2 Chance finds of Archaeological property
(a) All fossils, coins, articles of value of antiquity and structures and other
remains or things of geological or archaeological interest etc. discovered
on the site and/or during construction work shall be the property of the
Government of Sri Lanka, and shall be dealt with as per provisions of
Antiquities Ordinance of 1940 (Revised in 1956 & 1998)
In all project
sites
- Contractor RDA,
Department of
Archeology
(b) The contractor shall take reasonable precaution to prevent his
workmen or any other persons from removing and damaging
any such article or thing and shall, immediately upon
discovery thereof and before removal acquaint the Project
Manager of such discovery and carry out the Project
Manager’s instructions for dealing with the same, awaiting
which all work shall be stopped within 100m in all directions
from the site of discovery.
Engineeri
ng cost
(c) If directed by the Project Managers the Contractor shall obtain
advice and assistance from the Department of Archaeological
of Sri Lanka on conservation measures to be taken with
regard to the artefacts prior to recommencement of work in
the area.
2.13 Environmental Enhancement
2.13.1 Landscaping
(a) Landscape plantation, re-vegetation of road embankments and other
slopes, edge treatment of water bodies shall be taken up as per either
detailed design or typical design guidelines given as part of the Bid
Documents. The contactor also shall remove all debris, piles of unwanted
earth, spoil material, away from the roadsides and from other work places
and disposed at locations designated or acceptable to the Project Manager
or as per Clause 2.1.1.
All project sites
and associated
sites
Engineering
cost
Contractor RDA,
306
(b) On completion of the works, the temporary structures shall be cleared
away in full, all rubbish burnt, waste dumps and septic tank shall be filled
and closed and roadsides, workplaces and labor camps, cleared and
cleaned.
2.13.2 Utilities and Roadside Amenities
(a) Contractor shall take care not to damage/destroy or affect the functional
purposes of utilities such as water, electricity, telephone posts. The
arrangements the contractor made with those service providers shall be
informed to the Project Manager in writing (advance work). Contractor
shall assist the service providers in whatever possible manner to minimize
disruption to such services.
At all locations
where
electricity,
telecommunicat
ion
and water
supply lines
need to be
shifted
- Contractor RDA,
(b) In case of an inadvertent damage cause to a utility, the contractor shall
immediately inform the service provider and help to restore the service
without delay.
All project sites
2.13.3 Safety signage
(a) Safety signage for slope/landslide protection structures will be provided
as appropriate
Sites where
slope/landslide
protection takes
place
Engineering
cost
Contractor RDA,
2.14 Handling Environmental Issues during Construction
(a) For large contracts, the Contractor will appoint a suitably qualified
Environmental Officer following the award of the contract. The
Environmental Officer will be the primary point of contact for assistance
with all environmental issues during the pre-construction and
construction phases. He/ She shall be responsible for ensuring the
implementation of EMP.
Relevant
construction
sites during the
construction
period
Engineering
cost
Contractor RDA,
(b) The Contractor shall appoint a person responsible for community liaison
and to handle public complaints regarding environmental/ social related
307
matters. All public complaints will be entered into the Complaints
Register. The Environmental Officer will promptly investigate and review
environmental complaints and implement the appropriate corrective
actions to arrest or mitigate the cause of the complaints. A register of all
complaints is to be passed to the Project Manager within 24 hrs they are
received, with the action taken by the Environmental Officer on
complains thereof.
(c) Contractor shall develop suitable method to receive complaints. The
complaint register shall be placed at a convenient place, easily accessible
by the public.
(d) Contractor shall prepare detailed Environmental Method Statement
(EMS) clearly stating the approach, actions and manner in which the
EMP is implemented. It is required from the contractor to prepare the
EMS for each work site, if work will be carried out at more than one site
at once and time plan for implementation. The EMS shall be updated
regularly and submit for Engineers review.
3.0 Operational stage
3.1 Stagnation of water at culverts, drainage and irrigation structures during heavy rains due to
siltation and blocking of openings with debris.
(a) Regular clearing/ cleaning and maintenance of all culverts, drainage and
irrigation structures to reduce the chances of failures and blocking due to
debris.
At all hydraulic
structures
supported by
the project
Maintenanc
e cost
RDA,
3.2 Encochement of ROW
(a) Continuous monitoring and strict regulations should be followed to avoid
the encroachment.
In all project
sites
Maintenanc
e cost
RDA,
308
Monitoring Plan
Parameters
/Indicator
Verifiable Indicators Verification
Methods
Location Schedule Responsible
Implementation and
Monitoring Agency
Awareness and
orientation
training
Training programs for skill
development, occupational
safety and environmental
protection
Training records,
feedback from
participants
At construction
area
Beginning of
construction and
during construction
RDA,
Compliance to
occupational
health and safety
matters
Health and safety regulations,
first aid and medical
arrangements, number and type
of safety equipment such as
mask, helmet, glove, safety belt,
accidental insurance
Spot checks at work
sites, photos, accident
records, interviews
At key
construction
sites
Throughout
construction period
RDA,
Vegetation
clearance
Actual number of trees felled
during construction works
Record, counting,
observation,
inspection and
interview with local
people
At construction
sites
Before construction
work, construction
period
RDA
Measures to
protect
environment from
air & noise
pollution
Dust level and noise level at
work sites, major settlements
and sensitive spots like health
centers and schools
Visual observation
and discussion with
residents and workers
At construction
sites
Every three months
during construction
RDA,
309
Parameters
/Indicator
Verifiable Indicators Verification
Methods
Location Schedule Responsible
Implementation and
Monitoring Agency
Measures to
protect water
bodies from
pollution
Visual observation, observation
of open defecation and waste
disposal around water sources
near construction sites, camp
sites, and laboratory test results
Site inspections and
laboratory sections if
necessary.
Rivers and
water sources
used
particularly
drinking water
Every three months
during construction
RDA,
Adequate
technical and
environmental
supervision
Adequate number of technicians
regularly at site with ability to
implement the EMP
Number and type of
technicians available
at site, discussion
At construction
sites
During construction RDA,
Compensatory
plantation
Number of trees planted Records, field
observation
Planted area During project
implementation
RDA,
310
PART 3 – Conditions of Contract and
Contract Forms
311
Section VII - General Conditions of Contract
These General Conditions of Contract (GCC), read in conjunction with the Particular
Conditions of Contract(PCC) and other documents listed therein, should be a complete
document expressing fairly the rights and obligations of both parties.
These General Conditions of Contract have been developed on the basis of considerable
international experience in the drafting and management of contracts, bearing in mind a
trend in the construction industry towards simpler, more straightforward language.
The Condition of Contract comprises General Condition of Contract of “World Bank
Standard Bidding Document for Procurement of Small Works, published in April 2008
and revised in November 2010.
312
Table of Contents
Clause Page
A General ........................................................................................................................314
1. Definitions........................................................................................................... 316
2. Interpretation ....................................................................................................... 317
3. Language and Law .............................................................................................. 317
4. Project Manager’s Decision ................................................................................ 317
5. Delegation ........................................................................................................... 317
6. Communication ................................................................................................... 317
7. Subcontracting .................................................................................................... 317
8. Other Contractors ................................................................................................ 317
9. Personnel and Equipment ................................................................................... 318
10. Employer’s and Contractor’s Risk ...................................................................... 318
11. Employer’s Risk.................................................................................................. 318
12. Contractor’s Risk ................................................................................................ 319
13. Insurance ............................................................................................................. 319
14. Site Data .............................................................................................................. 319
15. Contractor to Construct the Works ..................................................................... 319
16. The Works to Be Completed by the Intended Completion Date ........................ 319
17. Approval by the Project Manager ....................................................................... 320
18. Safety ................................................................................................................. 320
19. Discoveries .......................................................................................................... 320
20. Possession of the Site .......................................................................................... 320
21. Access to the Site ................................................................................................ 320
22. Instructions, Inspections and Audits ................................................................... 321
23. Appointment of the Adjudicator ......................................................................... 321
24. Procedure for Disputes ........................................................................................ 321
B Time Control ..............................................................................................................322
25. Programme .......................................................................................................... 322
26. Extension of the Intended Completion Date ....................................................... 322
27. Acceleration ........................................................................................................ 323
28. Delays Ordered by the Project Manager ............................................................. 323
29. Management Meetings ........................................................................................ 323
30. Early Warning ..................................................................................................... 323
313
C Quality Control ..........................................................................................................324
31. Identifying Defects.......................................................................................... 324
32. Tests ................................................................................................................ 324
33. Correction of Defects ...................................................................................... 324
34. Uncorrected Defects........................................................................................ 324
D Cost Control ...............................................................................................................324
35. Contract Price.................................................................................................. 324
36. Changes in the Contract Price ......................................................................... 325
37. Variations ........................................................................................................ 325
38. Cash Flow Forecasts ....................................................................................... 326
39. Payment Certificates ....................................................................................... 326
40. Payments ......................................................................................................... 326
41. Compensation Events...................................................................................... 327
42. Tax ................................................................................................................. 328
43. Currencies ....................................................................................................... 328
44. Price Adjustment ............................................................................................. 329
45. Retention ......................................................................................................... 329
46. Liquidated Damages ....................................................................................... 329
47. Bonus .............................................................................................................. 330
48. Advance Payment ........................................................................................... 330
49. Securities ......................................................................................................... 330
50. Day works ....................................................................................................... 331
51. Cost of Repairs ................................................................................................ 331
E Finishing the Contract ...............................................................................................331
52. Completion ...................................................................................................... 331
53. Taking Over .................................................................................................... 331
54. Final Account .................................................................................................. 331
55. Operation and Maintenance Manuals ............................................................. 331
56. Termination ..................................................................................................... 332
57. Fraud and Corruption ...................................................................................... 332
58. Payment upon Termination ............................................................................. 334
59. Property .......................................................................................................... 334
60. Release from Performance .............................................................................. 334
61. Suspension of Bank Loan or Credit ................................................................ 334
314
Section VII - General Conditions of Contract
A. General
1. Definitions 1.1 Boldface type is used to identify defined terms.
(a) The Accepted Contract Amount means the amount
accepted in the Letter of Acceptance for the execution
and completion of the Works and the remedying of any
defects.
(b) The Activity Schedule is a schedule of the activities
comprising the construction, installation, testing, and
commissioning of the Works in a lump sum contract. It
includes a lump sum price for each activity, which is used
for valuations and for assessing the effects of Variations
and Compensation Events.
(c) The Adjudicator is the person appointed jointly by the
Employer and the Contractor to resolve disputes in the
first instance, as provided for in GCC 23.
(d) Bank means the financing institution named in the PCC.
(e) Bill of Quantities means the priced and completed Bill of
Quantities forming part of the Bid.
(f) Compensation Events are those defined in GCC Clause
41 hereunder.
(g) The Completion Date is the date of completion of the
Works as certified by the Project Manager, in accordance
with GCC Sub-Clause 52.1.
(h) The Contract is the Contract between the Employer and
the Contractor to execute, complete, and maintain the
Works. It consists of the documents listed in GCC Sub-
Clause 2.3 below.
(i) The Contractor is the party whose Bid to carry out the
Works has been accepted by the Employer.
(j) The Contractor’s Bid is the completed bidding document
submitted by the Contractor to the Employer.
(k) The Contract Price is the Accepted Contract Amount
stated in the Letter of Acceptance and thereafter as
adjusted in accordance with the Contract.
315
(l) Days are calendar days; months are calendar months.
(m) Day works are varied work inputs subject to payment on
a time basis for the Contractor’s employees and
Equipment, in addition to payments for associated
Materials and Plant.
(n) A Defect is any part of the Works not completed in
accordance with the Contract.
(o) The Defects Liability Certificate is the certificate issued
by Project Manager upon correction of defects by the
Contractor.
(p) The Defects Liability Period is the period named in the
PCC pursuant to Sub-Clause 33.1 and calculated from
the Completion Date.
(q) Adjudicator means the single person appointed under
Clause 23.
(r) Drawings means the drawings of the Works, as included
in the Contract, and any additional and modified
drawings issued by (or on behalf of) the Employer in
accordance with the Contract, include calculations and
other information provided or approved by the Project
Manager for the execution of the Contract.
(s) The Employer is the party who employs the Contractor to
carry out the Works, as specified in the PCC.
(t) Equipment is the Contractor’s machinery and vehicles
brought temporarily to the Site to construct the Works.
(u) “In writing” or “written” means hand-written, type-
written, printed or electronically made, and resulting in a
permanent record;
(v) The Initial Contract Price is the Contract Price listed in
the Employer’s Letter of Acceptance.
(w) The Intended Completion Date is the date on which it is
intended that the Contractor shall complete the Works.
The Intended Completion Date is specified in the PCC.
The Intended Completion Date may be revised only by
the Project Manager by issuing an extension of time or an
acceleration order.
(x) Materials are all supplies, including consumables, used
by the Contractor for incorporation in the Works.
(y) Plant is any integral part of the Works that shall have a
mechanical, electrical, chemical, or biological function.
(z) The Project Manager (may be referred to as Engineer
316
also) is the person named in the PCC (or any other
competent person appointed by the Employer and
notified to the Contractor, to act in replacement of the
Project Manager) who is responsible for supervising the
execution of the Works and administering the Contract.
(aa) PCC means Particular Conditions of Contract
(bb) The Site is the area defined as such in the PCC.
(cc) Site Investigation Reports are those that were included in
the bidding documents and are factual and interpretative
reports about the surface and subsurface conditions at the
Site.
(dd) Specification means the Specification of the Works
included in the Contract and any modification or addition
made or approved by the Project Manager.
(ee) The Start Date is given in the PCC. It is the latest date
when the Contractor shall commence execution of the
Works. It does not necessarily coincide with any of the
Site Possession Dates.
(ff) A Subcontractor is a person or corporate body who has a
Contract with the Contractor to carry out a part of the
work in the Contract, which includes work on the Site.
(gg) Temporary Works are works designed, constructed,
installed, and removed by the Contractor that are needed
for construction or installation of the Works.
(hh) A Variation is an instruction given by the Project
Manager which varies the Works.
(ii) The Works are what the Contract requires the Contractor
to construct, install, and turn over to the Employer, as
defined in the PCC.
2. Interpretation 2.1 In interpreting these GCC, words indicating one gender include
all genders. Words indicating the singular also include the plural
and words indicating the plural also include the singular.
Headings have no significance. Words have their normal
meaning under the language of the Contract unless specifically
defined. The Project Manager shall provide instructions
clarifying queries about these GCC.
2.2 If sectional completion is specified in the PCC, references in the
GCC to the Works, the Completion Date, and the Intended
Completion Date apply to any Section of the Works (other than
references to the Completion Date and Intended Completion Date
for the whole of the Works).
2.3 The documents forming the Contract shall be interpreted in the
317
following order of priority:
(a) Agreement,
(b) Letter of Acceptance,
(c) Contractor’s Bid,
(d) Particular Conditions of Contract,
(e) General Conditions of Contract,
(f) Specifications,
(g) Drawings,
(h) Bill of Quantities, and
(i) any other document listed in the PCC as forming part of
the Contract.
3. Language
and Law
3.1 The language of the Contract and the law governing the Contract
are stated in the PCC.
4. Project
Manager’s
Decisions
4.1 Except where otherwise specifically stated, the Project Manager
shall decide contractual matters between the Employer and the
Contractor in the role representing the Employer.
5. Delegation 5.1 Otherwise specified in the PCC, the Project Manager may
delegate any of his duties and responsibilities to other people,
except to the Adjudicator, after notifying the Contractor, and
may revoke any delegation after notifying the Contractor.
6. Communica-
tions
6.1 Communications between parties that are referred to in the
Conditions shall be effective only when in writing. A notice
shall be effective only when it is delivered.
7. Subcontracting 7.1 The Contractor may subcontract with the approval of the Project
Manager, but may not assign the Contract without the approval
of the Employer in writing. Subcontracting shall not alter the
Contractor’s obligations.
8. Other
Contractors
8.1 The Contractor shall cooperate and share the Site with other
contractors, public authorities, utilities, and the Employer
between the dates given in the Schedule of Other Contractors, as
referred to in the PCC. The Contractor shall also provide
facilities and services for them as described in the Schedule. The
Employer may modify the Schedule of Other Contractors, and
shall notify the Contractor of any such modification.
318
9. Personnel and
Equipment
9.1 The Contractor shall employ the key personnel and use the
equipment identified in its Bid, to carry out the Works or other
personnel and equipment approved by the Project Manager. The
Project Manager shall approve any proposed replacement of key
personnel and equipment only if their relevant qualifications or
characteristics are substantially equal to or better than those
proposed in the Bid.
9.2 If the Project Manager asks the Contractor to remove a person
who is a member of the Contractor’s staff or work force, stating
the reasons, the Contractor shall ensure that the person leaves the
Site within seven days and has no further connection with the
work in the Contract.
10. Employer’s and
Contractor’s
Risks
10.1 The Employer carries the risks which this Contract states are
Employer’s risks, and the Contractor carries the risks which this
Contract states are Contractor’s risks.
11. Employer’s
Risks
11.1 From the Start Date until the Defects Liability Certificate has
been issued, the following are Employer’s risks:
(a) The risk of personal injury, death, or loss of or damage to
property (excluding the Works, Plant, Materials, and
Equipment), which are due to
(i) use or occupation of the Site by the Works or for the
purpose of the Works, which is the unavoidable result
of the Works or
(ii) negligence, breach of statutory duty, or interference
with any legal right by the Employer or by any person
employed by or contracted to him except the
Contractor.
(b) The risk of damage to the Works, Plant, Materials, and
Equipment to the extent that it is due to a fault of the
Employer or in the Employer’s design, or due to war or
radioactive contamination directly affecting the country
where the Works are to be executed.
11.2 From the Completion Date until the Defects Liability Certificate
has been issued, the risk of loss of or damage to the Works,
Plant, and Materials is an Employer’s risk except loss or damage
due to
(a) a Defect which existed on the Completion Date,
(b) an event occurring before the Completion Date, which was
not itself an Employer’s risk, or
(c) the activities of the Contractor on the Site after the
319
Completion Date.
12. Contractor’s
Risks 12.1 From the Starting Date until the Defects Liability Certificate has
been issued, the risks of personal injury, death, and loss of or
damage to property (including, without limitation, the Works,
Plant, Materials, and Equipment) which are not Employer’s risks
are Contractor’s risks.
13. Insurance 13.1 The Contractor shall provide, in the joint names of the Employer
and the Contractor, insurance cover from the Start Date to the
end of the Defects Liability Period, in the amounts and
deductibles stated in the PCC for the following events which
are due to the Contractor’s risks:
(a) loss of or damage to the Works, Plant, and Materials;
(b) loss of or damage to Equipment;
(c) loss of or damage to property (except the Works, Plant,
Materials, and Equipment) in connection with the Contract;
and
(d) personal injury or death.
13.2 Policies and certificates for insurance shall be delivered by the
Contractor to the Project Manager for the Project Manager’s
approval before the Start Date. All such insurance shall provide
for compensation to be payable in the types and proportions of
currencies required to rectify the loss or damage incurred.
13.3 If the Contractor does not provide any of the policies and
certificates required, the Employer may effect the insurance
which the Contractor should have provided and recover the
premiums the Employer has paid from payments otherwise due
to the Contractor or, if no payment is due, the payment of the
premiums shall be a debt due.
13.4 Alterations to the terms of an insurance shall not be made
without the approval of the Project Manager.
13.5 Both parties shall comply with any conditions of the insurance
policies.
14. Site Data
14.1 The Contractor shall be deemed to have examined any Site Data
referred to in the PCC, supplemented by any information
available to the Contractor.
15. Contractor to
Construct the
Works
15.1 The Contractor shall construct and install the Works in
accordance with the Specifications and Drawings.
16. The Works to
Be Completed
by the
16.1 The Contractor may commence execution of the Works on the
Start Date and shall carry out the Works in accordance with the
Program submitted by the Contractor, as updated with the
320
Intended
Completion
Date
approval of the Project Manager, and complete them by the
Intended Completion Date.
17. Approval by
the Project
Manager
17.1 The Contractor shall submit Specifications and Drawings
showing the proposed Temporary Works to the Project Manager,
for his approval.
17.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for design of Temporary
Works.
17.3 The Project Manager’s approval shall not alter the Contractor’s
responsibility for design of the Temporary Works.
17.4 The Contractor shall obtain approval of third parties to the design
of the Temporary Works, where required.
17.5 All Drawings prepared by the Contractor for the execution of the
temporary or permanent Works, are subject to prior approval by
the Project Manager before this use.
18. Safety 18.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of all activities
on the Site.
19. Discoveries 19.1 Anything of historical or other interest or of significant value
unexpectedly discovered on the Site shall be the property of the
Employer. The Contractor shall notify the Project Manager of
such discoveries and carry out the Project Manager’s instructions
for dealing with them.
20. Possession of
the Site
20.1 The Employer shall give possession of all parts of the Site to the
Contractor. If possession of a part is not given by the date stated
in the PCC, the Employer shall be deemed to have delayed the
start of the relevant activities, and this shall be a Compensation
Event.
21. Access to the
Site
21.1 The Contractor shall allow the Project Manager and any person
authorized by the Project Manager access to the Site and to any
place where work in connection with the Contract is being
carried out or is intended to be carried out.
321
22. Instructions,
Inspections
and Audits
22.1 The Contractor shall carry out all instructions of the Project
Manager which comply with the applicable laws where the Site
is located.
22.2 The Contractor shall permit the Bank and/or persons appointed
by the Bank to inspect the Site and/or the accounts and records of
the Contractor and its sub-contractors relating to the performance
of the Contract, and to have such accounts and records audited by
auditors appointed by the Bank if required by the Bank. The
Contractor’s attention is drawn to Sub-Clause 57.1 which
provides, inter alia, that acts intended to materially impede the
exercise of the Bank’s inspection and audit rights provided for
under Sub-Clause 22.2constitute a prohibited practice subject to
contract termination (as well as to a determination of ineligibility
under the Procurement Guidelines).
23. Appointment
of the
Adjudicator
23.1 The Adjudicator shall be appointed jointly by the Employer and
the Contractor, at the time of the Employer’s issuance of the
Letter of Acceptance. If, in the Letter of Acceptance, the
Employer does not agree on the appointment of the Adjudicator,
the Employer will request the Appointing Authority designated
in the PCC, to appoint the Adjudicator within 14 days of receipt
of such request.
23.2 Should the Adjudicator resign or die, or should the Employer and
the Contractor agree that the Adjudicator is not functioning in
accordance with the provisions of the Contract, a new
Adjudicator shall be jointly appointed by the Employer and the
Contractor. In case of disagreement between the Employer and
the Contractor, within 30 days, the Adjudicator shall be
designated by the Appointing Authority designated in the PCC
at the request of either party, within 14 days of receipt of such
request.
24. Procedure for
Disputes
24.1 If the Contractor believes that a decision taken by the Project
Manager was either outside the authority given to the Project
Manager by the Contract or that the decision was wrongly taken,
the decision shall be referred to the Adjudicator within 14 days
of the notification of the Project Manager’s decision.
24.2 The Adjudicator shall give a decision in writing within 28 days
of receipt of a notification of a dispute.
24.3 The Adjudicator shall be paid by the hour at the rate specified in
the PCC, together with reimbursable expenses of the types
specified in the PCC, and the cost shall be divided equally
between the Employer and the Contractor, whatever decision is
reached by the Adjudicator. Either party may refer a decision of
the Adjudicator to an Arbitrator within 28 days of the
Adjudicator’s written decision. If neither party refers the dispute
to arbitration within the above 28 days, the Adjudicator’s
322
decision shall be final and binding.
24.4 The arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the
arbitration procedures published by the institution named and in
the place specified in the PCC.
B. Time Control
25. Program
25.1 Within the time stated in the PCC, after the date of the Letter of
Acceptance, the Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager
for approval a Program showing the general methods,
arrangements, order, and timing for all the activities in the
Works. In the case of a lump sum contract, the activities in the
Program shall be consistent with those in the Activity Schedule.
25.2 An update of the Program shall be a program showing the actual
progress achieved on each activity and the effect of the progress
achieved on the timing of the remaining work, including any
changes to the sequence of the activities.
25.3 The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager for approval
an updated Program at intervals no longer than the period stated
in the PCC. If the Contractor does not submit an updated
Program within this period, the Project Manager may withhold
the amount stated in the PCC from the next payment certificate
and continue to withhold this amount until the next payment after
the date on which the overdue Program has been submitted. In
the case of a lump sum contract, the Contractor shall provide an
updated Activity Schedule within 14 days of being instructed to
by the Project Manager.
25.4 The Project Manager’s approval of the Program shall not alter
the Contractor’s obligations. The Contractor may revise the
Program and submit it to the Project Manager again at any time.
A revised Program shall show the effect of Variations and
Compensation Events.
26. Extension of
the Intended
Completion
Date
26.1 The Project Manager shall extend the Intended Completion Date
if a Compensation Event occurs or a Variation is issued which
makes it impossible for Completion to be achieved by the
Intended Completion Date without the Contractor taking steps to
accelerate the remaining work, which would cause the Contractor
to incur additional cost.
26.2 The Project Manager shall decide whether and by how much to
extend the Intended Completion Date within 21 days of the
Contractor asking the Project Manager for a decision upon the
effect of a Compensation Event or Variation and submitting full
supporting information. If the Contractor has failed to give early
warning of a delay or has failed to cooperate in dealing with a
delay, the delay by this failure shall not be considered in
323
assessing the new Intended Completion Date.
27. Acceleration 27.1 When the Employer wants the Contractor to finish before the
Intended Completion Date, the Project Manager shall obtain
priced proposals for achieving the necessary acceleration from
the Contractor. If the Employer accepts these proposals, the
Intended Completion Date shall be adjusted accordingly and
confirmed by both the Employer and the Contractor.
27.2 If the Contractor’s priced proposals for an acceleration are
accepted by the Employer, they are incorporated in the Contract
Price and treated as a Variation.
28. Delays
Ordered by the
Project
Manager
28.1 The Project Manager may instruct the Contractor to delay the
start or progress of any activity within the Works.
29. Management
Meetings
29.1 Either the Project Manager or the Contractor may require the
other to attend a management meeting. The business of a
management meeting shall be to review the plans for remaining
work and to deal with matters raised in accordance with the early
warning procedure.
29.2 The Project Manager shall record the business of management
meetings and provide copies of the record to those attending the
meeting and to the Employer. The responsibility of the parties
for actions to be taken shall be decided by the Project Manager
either at the management meeting or after the management
meeting and stated in writing to all who attended the meeting.
30. Early Warning 30.1 The Contractor shall warn the Project Manager at the earliest
opportunity of specific likely future events or circumstances that
may adversely affect the quality of the work, increase the
Contract Price, or delay the execution of the Works. The Project
Manager may require the Contractor to provide an estimate of
the expected effect of the future event or circumstance on the
Contract Price and Completion Date. The estimate shall be
provided by the Contractor as soon as reasonably possible.
30.2 The Contractor shall cooperate with the Project Manager in
making and considering proposals for how the effect of such an
event or circumstance can be avoided or reduced by anyone
involved in the work and in carrying out any resulting instruction
of the Project Manager.
324
C. Quality Control
31. Identifying
Defects
31.1 The Project Manager shall check the Contractor’s work and
notify the Contractor of any Defects that are found. Such
checking shall not affect the Contractor’s responsibilities. The
Project Manager may instruct the Contractor to search for a
Defect and to uncover and test any work that the Project
Manager considers may have a Defect.
32. Tests 32.1 If the Project Manager instructs the Contractor to carry out a test
not specified in the Specification to check whether any work has
a Defect and the test shows that it does, the Contractor shall pay
for the test and any samples. If there is no Defect, the test shall
be a Compensation Event.
33. Correction of
Defects
33.1 The Project Manager shall give notice to the Contractor of any
Defects before the end of the Defects Liability Period, which
begins at Completion, and is defined in the PCC. The Defects
Liability Period shall be extended for as long as Defects remain
to be corrected.
33.2 Every time notice of a Defect is given, the Contractor shall
correct the notified Defect within the length of time specified by
the Project Manager’s notice.
34. Uncorrected
Defects
34.1 If the Contractor has not corrected a Defect within the time
specified in the Project Manager’s notice, the Project Manager
shall assess the cost of having the Defect corrected, and the
Contractor shall pay this amount.
D. Cost Control
35. Contract Price 35.1 In the case of an admeasurements contract, the Bill of Quantities
shall contain priced items for the Works to be performed by the
Contractor. The Bill of Quantities is used to calculate the
Contract Price. The Contractor will be paid for the quantity of
the work accomplished at the rate in the Bill of Quantities for
each item.
35.2 In the case of a lump sum contract, the Activity Schedule shall
contain the priced activities for the Works to be performed by the
Contractor. The Activity Schedule is used to monitor and control
the performance of activities on which basis the Contractor will
be paid. If payment for Materials on Site shall be made
separately, the Contractor shall show delivery of Materials to the
Site separately on the Activity Schedule.
325
36. Changes in the
Contract Price
36.1 In the case of an admeasurements contract:
(a) If the final quantity of the work done differs from the
quantity in the Bill of Quantities for the particular item by
more than 25 percent, provided the change exceeds 1
percent of the Initial Contract Price, the Project Manager
shall adjust the rate to allow for the change.
(b) The Project Manager shall not adjust rates from changes in
quantities if thereby the Initial Contract Price is exceeded
by more than 15 percent, except with the prior approval of
the Employer.
(c) If requested by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall
provide the Project Manager with a detailed cost
breakdown of any rate in the Bill of Quantities.
36.2 In the case of a lump sum contract, the Activity Schedule shall
be amended by the Contractor to accommodate changes of
Program or method of working made at the Contractor’s own
discretion. Prices in the Activity Schedule shall not be altered
when the Contractor makes such changes to the Activity
Schedule.
37. Variations
37.1 All Variations shall be included in updated Programs, and, in the
case of a lump sum contract, also in the Activity Schedule,
produced by the Contractor.
37.2 The Contractor shall provide the Project Manager with a
quotation for carrying out the Variation when requested to do so
by the Project Manager. The Project Manager shall assess the
quotation, which shall be given within seven (7) days of the
request or within any longer period stated by the Project
Manager and before the Variation is ordered.
37.3 If the Contractor’s quotation is unreasonable, the Project
Manager may order the Variation and make a change to the
Contract Price, which shall be based on the Project Manager’s
own forecast of the effects of the Variation on the Contractor’s
costs.
37.4 If the Project Manager decides that the urgency of varying the
work would prevent a quotation being given and considered
without delaying the work, no quotation shall be given and the
Variation shall be treated as a Compensation Event.
37.5 The Contractor shall not be entitled to additional payment for
costs that could have been avoided by giving early warning.
37.6 In the case of an admeasurement contract, if the work in the
Variation corresponds to an item description in the Bill of
Quantities and if, in the opinion of the Project Manager, the
326
quantity of work above the limit stated in Sub-Clause 38.1 or the
timing of its execution do not cause the cost per unit of quantity
to change, the rate in the Bill of Quantities shall be used to
calculate the value of the Variation. If the cost per unit of
quantity changes, or if the nature or timing of the work in the
Variation does not correspond with items in the Bill of
Quantities, the quotation by the Contractor shall be in the form of
new rates for the relevant items of work.
38. Cash Flow
Forecasts
38.1 When the Program, or, in the case of a lump sum contract, the
Activity Schedule, is updated, the Contractor shall provide the
Project Manager with an updated cash flow forecast. The cash
flow forecast shall include different currencies, as defined in the
Contract, converted as necessary using the Contract exchange
rates.
39. Payment
Certificates
39.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager monthly
statements of the estimated value of the work executed less the
cumulative amount certified previously.
39.2 The Project Manager shall check the Contractor’s monthly
statement and certify the amount to be paid to the Contractor.
39.3 The value of work executed shall be determined by the Project
Manager.
39.4 The value of work executed shall comprise:
(a) In the case of an admeasurement contract, the value of the
quantities of work in the Bill of Quantities that have been
completed; or
(b) In the case of a lump sum contract, the value of work
executed shall comprise the value of completed activities in
the Activity Schedule.
39.5 The value of work executed shall include the valuation of
Variations and Compensation Events.
39.6 The Project Manager may exclude any item certified in a
previous certificate or reduce the proportion of any item
previously certified in any certificate in the light of later
information.
40. Payments 40.1 Payments shall be adjusted for deductions for advance payments
and retention. The Employer shall pay the Contractor the
amounts certified by the Project Manager within 28 days of the
date of each certificate. If the Employer makes a late payment,
the Contractor shall be paid interest on the late payment in the
next payment. Interest shall be calculated from the date by
which the payment should have been made up to the date when
327
the late payment is made at the prevailing rate of interest for
commercial borrowing for each of the currencies in which
payments are made.
40.2 If an amount certified is increased in a later certificate or as a
result of an award by the Adjudicator or an Arbitrator, the
Contractor shall be paid interest upon the delayed payment as set
out in this clause. Interest shall be calculated from the date upon
which the increased amount would have been certified in the
absence of dispute.
40.3 Unless otherwise stated, all payments and deductions shall be
paid or charged in the proportions of currencies comprising the
Contract Price.
40.4 Items of the Works for which no rate or price has been entered in
shall not be paid for by the Employer and shall be deemed
covered by other rates and prices in the Contract.
41. Compensation
Events
41.1 The following shall be Compensation Events:
(a) The Employer does not give access to a part of the Site by
the Site Possession Date pursuant to GCC Sub-Clause 20.1.
(b) The Employer modifies the Schedule of Other Contractors
in a way that affects the work of the Contractor under the
Contract.
(c) The Project Manager orders a delay or does not issue
Drawings, Specifications, or instructions required for
execution of the Works on time.
(d) The Project Manager instructs the Contractor to uncover or
to carry out additional tests upon work, which is then found
to have no Defects.
(e) The Project Manager unreasonably does not approve a
subcontract to be let.
(f) Ground conditions are substantially more adverse than
could reasonably have been assumed before issuance of the
Letter of Acceptance from the information issued to
bidders (including the Site Investigation Reports), from
information available publicly and from a visual inspection
of the Site.
(g) The Project Manager gives an instruction for dealing with
an unforeseen condition, caused by the Employer, or
additional work required for safety or other reasons.
328
(h) Other contractors, public authorities, utilities, or the
Employer does not work within the dates and other
constraints stated in the Contract, and they cause delay or
extra cost to the Contractor.
(i) The advance payment is delayed.
(j) The effects on the Contractor of any of the Employer’s
Risks.
(k) The Project Manager unreasonably delays issuing a
Certificate of Completion.
41.2 If a Compensation Event would cause additional cost or would
prevent the work being completed before the Intended
Completion Date, the Contract Price shall be increased and/or the
Intended Completion Date shall be extended. The Project
Manager shall decide whether and by how much the Contract
Price shall be increased and whether and by how much the
Intended Completion Date shall be extended.
41.3 As soon as information demonstrating the effect of each
Compensation Event upon the Contractor’s forecast cost has
been provided by the Contractor, it shall be assessed by the
Project Manager, and the Contract Price shall be adjusted
accordingly. If the Contractor’s forecast is deemed
unreasonable, the Project Manager shall adjust the Contract Price
based on the Project Manager’s own forecast. The Project
Manager shall assume that the Contractor shall react competently
and promptly to the event.
41.4 The Contractor shall not be entitled to compensation to the extent
that the Employer’s interests are adversely affected by the
Contractor’s not having given early warning or not having
cooperated with the Project Manager.
42. Tax 42.1 The Project Manager shall adjust the Contract Price if taxes,
duties, and other levies are changed between the date 28 days
before the submission of bids for the Contract and the date of the
last Completion certificate. The adjustment shall be the change
in the amount of tax payable by the Contractor, provided such
changes are not already reflected in the Contract Price or are a
result of GCC Clause 44.
43. Currencies 43.1 Where payments are made in currencies other than the currency
of the Employer’s country specified in the PCC, the exchange
rates used for calculating the amounts to be paid shall be the
exchange rates stated in the Contractor’s Bid.
329
44. Price
Adjustment
44.1 Prices shall be adjusted for fluctuations in the cost of inputs only
if provided for in the PCC. If so provided, the amounts
certified in each payment certificate, before deducting for
Advance Payment, shall be adjusted by applying the respective
price adjustment factor to the payment amounts due in each
currency. A separate formula of the type indicated below applies
to each Contract currency:
Pc = Ac + Bc Imc/Ioc
where:
Pc is the adjustment factor for the portion of the Contract
Price payable in a specific currency “c.”
Ac and Bc are coefficients7specified in the PCC,
representing the nonadjustable and adjustable portions,
respectively, of the Contract Price payable in that specific
currency “c;” and
Imc is the index prevailing at the end of the month being
invoiced and Ioc is the index prevailing 28 days before Bid
opening for inputs payable; both in the specific currency “c.”
44.2 If the value of the index is changed after it has been used in a
calculation, the calculation shall be corrected and an adjustment
made in the next payment certificate. The index value shall be
deemed to take account of all changes in cost due to fluctuations
in costs.
45. Retention 45.1 The Employer shall retain from each payment due to the
Contractor the proportion stated in the PCC until Completion of
the whole of the Works.
45.2 Upon the issue of a Certificate of Completion of the Works by
the Project Manager, in accordance with GCC 51.1, half the total
amount retained shall be repaid to the Contractor and half when
the Defects Liability Period has passed and the Project Manager
has certified that all Defects notified by the Project Manager to
the Contractor before the end of this period have been corrected.
The Contractor may substitute retention money with an “on
demand” Bank guarantee.
46. Liquidated
Damages
46.1 The Contractor shall pay liquidated damages to the Employer at
the rate per day stated in the PCC for each day that the
Completion Date is later than the Intended Completion Date.
The total amount of liquidated damages shall not exceed the
amount defined in the PCC. The Employer may deduct
7 The sum of the two coefficients Ac and Bc should be 1 (one) in the formula for each currency. Normally,
both coefficients shall be the same in the formulae for all currencies, since coefficient A, for the
nonadjustable portion of the payments, is a very approximate figure (usually 0.15) to take account of fixed
cost elements or other nonadjustable components. The sum of the adjustments for each currency are added
to the Contract Price. [To be transferred to the User Guide]
330
liquidated damages from payments due to the Contractor.
Payment of liquidated damages shall not affect the Contractor’s
liabilities.
46.2 If the Intended Completion Date is extended after liquidated
damages have been paid, the Project Manager shall correct any
overpayment of liquidated damages by the Contractor by
adjusting the next payment certificate. The Contractor shall be
paid interest on the overpayment, calculated from the date of
payment to the date of repayment, at the rates specified in GCC
Sub-Clause 40.1.
47. Bonus 47.1 The Contractor shall be paid a Bonus calculated at the rate per
calendar day stated in the PCC for each day (less any days for
which the Contractor is paid for acceleration) that the
Completion is earlier than the Intended Completion Date. The
Project Manager shall certify that the Works are complete,
although they may not be due to be complete.
48. Advance
Payment
48.1 The Employer shall make advance payment to the Contractor of
the amounts stated in the PCC by the date stated in the PCC,
against provision by the Contractor of an Unconditional Bank
Guarantee in a form and by a bank acceptable to the Employer in
amounts and currencies equal to the advance payment. The
Guarantee shall remain effective until the advance payment has
been repaid, but the amount of the Guarantee shall be
progressively reduced by the amounts repaid by the Contractor.
Interest shall not be charged on the advance payment.
48.2 The Contractor is to use the advance payment only to pay for
Equipment, Plant, Materials, and mobilization expenses required
specifically for execution of the Contract. The Contractor shall
demonstrate that advance payment has been used in this way by
supplying copies of invoices or other documents to the Project
Manager.
48.3 The advance payment shall be repaid by deducting proportionate
amounts from payments otherwise due to the Contractor,
following the schedule of completed percentages of the Works
on a payment basis. No account shall be taken of the advance
payment or its repayment in assessing valuations of work done,
Variations, price adjustments, Compensation Events, Bonuses, or
Liquidated Damages.
49. Securities 49.1 The Performance Security shall be provided to the Employer no
later than the date specified in the Letter of Acceptance and shall
be issued in an amount specified in the PCC, by a bank or
surety acceptable to the Employer, and denominated in the types
and proportions of the currencies in which the Contract Price is
payable. The Performance Security shall be valid until a date 28
days from the date of issue of the Certificate of Completion in
331
the case of a Bank Guarantee, and until one year from the date of
issue of the Completion Certificate in the case of a Performance
Bond.
50. Day works 50.1 If applicable, the Day works rates in the Contractor’s Bid shall
be used only when the Project Manager has given written
instructions in advance for additional work to be paid for in that
way.
50.2 All work to be paid for as Day works shall be recorded by the
Contractor on forms approved by the Project Manager. Each
completed form shall be verified and signed by the Project
Manager within two days of the work being done.
50.3 The Contractor shall be paid for Day works subject to obtaining
signed Day works forms.
51. Cost of
Repairs
51.1 Loss or damage to the Works or Materials to be incorporated in
the Works between the Start Date and the end of the Defects
Correction periods shall be remedied by the Contractor at the
Contractor’s cost if the loss or damage arises from the
Contractor’s acts or omissions.
E. Finishing the Contract
52. Completion 52.1 The Contractor shall request the Project Manager to issue a
Certificate of Completion of the Works, and the Project Manager
shall do so upon deciding that the whole of the Works is
completed.
53. Taking Over 53.1 The Employer shall take over the Site and the Works within seven
days of the Project Manager’s issuing a certificate of Completion.
54. Final Account 54.1 The Contractor shall supply the Project Manager with a detailed
account of the total amount that the Contractor considers payable
under the Contract before the end of the Defects Liability Period.
The Project Manager shall issue a Defects Liability Certificate and
certify any final payment that is due to the Contractor within 56
days of receiving the Contractor’s account if it is correct and
complete. If it is not, the Project Manager shall issue within 56
days a schedule that states the scope of the corrections or additions
that are necessary. If the Final Account is still unsatisfactory after
it has been resubmitted, the Project Manager shall decide on the
amount payable to the Contractor and issue a payment certificate.
55. Operating and
Maintenance
Manuals
55.1 If “as built” Drawings and/or operating and maintenance manuals
are required, the Contractor shall supply them by the dates stated
in the PCC.
55.2 If the Contractor does not supply the Drawings and/or manuals by
the dates stated in the PCC pursuant to GCC Sub-Clause 55.1, or
332
they do not receive the Project Manager’s approval, the Project
Manager shall withhold the amount stated in the PCC from
payments due to the Contractor.
56. Termination 56.1 The Employer or the Contractor may terminate the Contract if the
other party causes a fundamental breach of the Contract.
56.2 Fundamental breaches of Contract shall include, but shall not be
limited to, the following:
(a) the Contractor stops work for 28 days when no stoppage of
work is shown on the current Program and the stoppage has
not been authorized by the Project Manager;
(b) the Project Manager instructs the Contractor to delay the
progress of the Works, and the instruction is not withdrawn
within 28 days;
(c) the Employer or the Contractor is made bankrupt or goes
into liquidation other than for a reconstruction or
amalgamation;
(d) a payment certified by the Project Manager is not paid by the
Employer to the Contractor within 84 days of the date of the
Project Manager’s certificate;
(e) the Project Manager gives Notice that failure to correct a
particular Defect is a fundamental breach of Contract and the
Contractor fails to correct it within a reasonable period of
time determined by the Project Manager;
(f) the Contractor does not maintain a Security, which is required;
(g) the Contractor has delayed the completion of the Works by
the number of days for which the maximum amount of
liquidated damages can be paid, as defined in the PCC; or
(h) if the Contractor, in the judgment of the Employer, has
engaged in corrupt or fraudulent practices in competing for
or in executing the Contract, pursuant to GCC Clause 57.1.
56.3 When either party to the Contract gives notice of a breach of
Contract to the Project Manager for a cause other than those listed
under GCC Sub-Clause 56.2 above, the Project Manager shall
decide whether the breach is fundamental or not.
56.4 Notwithstanding the above, the Employer may terminate the
Contract for convenience.
56.5 If the Contract is terminated, the Contractor shall stop work
immediately, make the Site safe and secure, and leave the Site as
soon as reasonably possible.
57. Fraud and
Corruption 57.1 If the Employer determines that the Contractor has engaged in
corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, coercive or obstructive practices, in
competing for or in executing the Contract, then the Employer
may, after giving 14 days’ notice to the Contractor, terminate the
333
Contractor's employment under the Contract and expel him from
the Site, and the provisions of Clause 56 shall apply as if such
expulsion had been made under Sub-Clause 56.5 [Termination by
Employer].
57.2 Should any employee of the Contractor be determined to have
engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, coercive, or obstructive
practice during the execution of the Works, then that employee
shall be removed in accordance with Clause 9.
57.3 For the purposes of this Sub-Clause:
(i) “corrupt practice”8 is the offering, giving, receiving or
soliciting, directly or indirectly, of anything of value to
influence improperly the actions of another party;
(ii) “fraudulent practice”9 is any act or omission, including a
misrepresentation, that knowingly or recklessly misleads,
or attempts to mislead, a party to obtain a financial or other
benefit or to avoid an obligation;
(iii) “collusive practice”10 is an arrangement between two or
more parties designed to achieve an improper purpose,
including to influence improperly the actions of another
party;
(iv) “coercive practice”11 is impairing or harming, or
threatening to impair or harm, directly or indirectly, any
party or the property of the party to influence improperly
the actions of a party;
(v) “obstructive practice “is
(aa) deliberately destroying, falsifying, altering or
concealing of evidence material to the investigation
or making false statements to investigators in order to
materially impede a Bank investigation into
allegations of a corrupt, fraudulent, coercive or
collusive practice; and/or threatening, harassing or
intimidating any party to prevent it from disclosing its
knowledge of matters relevant to the investigation or
from pursuing the investigation; or
(bb) acts intended to materially impede the exercise of the
8 “another party” refers to a public official acting in relation to the procurement process or contract
execution]. In this context, “public official” includes World Bank staff and employees of other
organizations taking or reviewing procurement decisions. 9 a “party” refers to a public official; the terms “benefit” and “obligation” relate to the procurement process
or contract execution; and the “act or omission” is intended to influence the procurement process or contract
execution. 10 “parties” refers to participants in the procurement process (including public officials) attempting to
establish bid prices at artificial, non-competitive levels. 11 a “party” refers to a participant in the procurement process or contract execution.
334
Bank’s inspection and audit rights provided for under
Sub-Clause22.2.
58. Payment upon
Termination
58.1 If the Contract is terminated because of a fundamental breach of
Contract by the Contractor, the Project Manager shall issue a
certificate for the value of the work done and Materials ordered
less advance payments received up to the date of the issue of the
certificate and less the percentage to apply to the value of the work
not completed, as indicated in the PCC. Additional Liquidated
Damages shall not apply. If the total amount due to the Employer
exceeds any payment due to the Contractor, the difference shall be
a debt payable to the Employer.
58.2 If the Contract is terminated for the Employer’s convenience or
because of a fundamental breach of Contract by the Employer, the
Project Manager shall issue a certificate for the value of the work
done, Materials ordered, the reasonable cost of removal of
Equipment, repatriation of the Contractor’s personnel employed
solely on the Works, and the Contractor’s costs of protecting and
securing the Works, and less advance payments received up to the
date of the certificate.
59. Property 59.1 All Materials on the Site, Plant, Equipment, Temporary Works,
and Works shall be deemed to be the property of the Employer if
the Contract is terminated because of the Contractor’s default.
60. Release from
Performance
60.1 If the Contract is frustrated by the outbreak of war or by any other
event entirely outside the control of either the Employer or the
Contractor, the Project Manager shall certify that the Contract has
been frustrated. The Contractor shall make the Site safe and stop
work as quickly as possible after receiving this certificate and shall
be paid for all work carried out before receiving it and for any
work carried out afterwards to which a commitment was made.
61. Suspension of
Bank Loan or
Credit
61.1 In the event that the Bank suspends the Loan or Credit to the
Employer, from which part of the payments to the Contractor are
being made:
(a) The Employer is obligated to notify the Contractor of such
suspension within 7 days of having received the Bank’s
suspension notice.
(b) If the Contractor has not received sums due it within the 28 days
for payment provided for in Sub-Clause 40.1, the Contractor
may immediately issue a 14-day termination notice.
335
Section VIII – Particular Conditions of Contract
336
Section VIII Particular Conditions of Contract
Table of Contents
Clause Page
A General ........................................................................................................................337
B Time Control ..............................................................................................................339
C Quality Control ..........................................................................................................329
D Cost Control ...............................................................................................................340
E Finishing the Contract ...............................................................................................341
337
Section VIII - Particular Conditions of Contract
A. General
GCC 1.1 (d) The financing institution is: The World Bank [International Development
Association (IDA)]
GCC 1.1 (s) The Employer is: Director General, Road Development Authority of
Sri Lanka.
GCC 1.1 (w) The Intended Completion Date for the whole of the Works shall be:
……………….………………. (05 months from the Start Date)
GCC 1.1 (z)
Employer’s Representative:
Head of Project Implementation Unit (PIU)
- Climate Resilience Improvement Project (CRIP),
No.122, Main street,
Battaramulla.
Project Manager,
Director General,
National Building Research Organization (NBRO),
No. 99/1, Jawatta Road,
Colombo 05.
GCC 1.1 (bb) The Site is located between Culvert Nos. 75/5 & 76/4 on Peradeniya-
Badulla-Chenkaladi Road (A005).
GCC 1.1 (ee) The Start Date shall be: within 14 days of receipt of Letter of Acceptance
GCC 1.1 (ii)
The Works consist of “ Supply and fixing of High Tensile Wire Mesh and
Accessories in Unstable slope segments between Culvert Nos. 75/5 &
76/4 on Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi Road (A005).”
GCC 2.2 Sectional Completions are: None
GCC 2.3(i)
The following documents also form part of the Contract:
Environmental Assessment (EA) for “Supply and fixing of High Tensile
Wire Mesh and Accessories in Unstable slope segments between Culvert
Nos. 75/5 & 76/4 on Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi Road (A005).”
GCC 3.1
The language of the contract is English
The law that applies to the Contract is the law of the Democratic Socialist
Republic of Sri Lanka
338
GCC 5.1
The Project Manager shall have no authority to amend the Contract.
The Project Manager may exercise the authority attributable to the Project
Manager as specified in or necessary to be implied from the Contract.
All Cost & Time variations, Quantity Variations, all the changes to the
Contract Scope & Contract shall require approval of the Employer.
The Project Manager may delegate any of his duties and responsibilities
except the approval/recommendation of variation orders, time & cost claims,
payment certificates, design drawings or any other submissions such as
proposal for value engineering. Further, he shall not delegate duties which
may negatively affect the contract duration or cost of the project.
GCC 8.1 Schedule of other contractors: None
GCC 13.1 The minimum insurance amounts and deductibles shall be:
Minimum Insurance
Amount
Maximum
Deductibles
(a) for the Works, Plant and
Materials:
110% of the Contract
Price
Rs 50,000/-
(b) For loss or damage to Equipment Replacement value of
the Equipment
Rs 50,000/-
(c) for loss or damage to property
(except the Works, Plant, Materials, and
Equipment) in connection with Contract.
Rs 1.0 million Rs 50,000/-
(d) for personal injury or death:
(i) of the Contractor’s employees
per event
Rs 1,000,000 per
employee
No deductibles
(ii) of other people per event Rs 1,000,000 per
person
No deductibles
GCC 14.1 Site Data: Please refer to “Section VI – Employer’s requirement – General
Information”
GCC 20.1 The Site Possession Date(s) shall be: Same as the Start Date
GCC 23.1 &
GCC 23.2
Insert the following paragraph after GCC 23.1:
The Adjudicator shall be appointed by the Institute of Engineers of Sri
Lanka (IESL) at the request of either the Employer or the Contractor.
GCC 24.3
The hourly fee together with reimbursable expenses for the proposed
Adjudicator shall be discussed and agreed between the Employer and
Contractor at the time of appointment of the Adjudicator.
339
GCC 24.4
Arbitration Proceedings shall be conducted in accordance with the following
rules of procedure:
Rules of the arbitration shall be the Institute for the Development of
Commercial Law and Practice (ICLP), No. 61, Carmel Road Colombo 3, Sri
Lanka.
Arbitration proceedings shall be conducted in Sri Lanka. Arbitration
proceedings shall take place in Colombo at the Sri Lanka National
Arbitration Centre or any other venue within Sri Lanka, as per Arbitration
Act No 11 of 1995 of Sri Lanka and under the Sri Lankan law.
The dispute shall be settled by Arbitration Panel (AP) comprising of three
Arbitrators, in which two of them shall be appointed by the Parties by
mutual consent, failing which, by the Institution of Engineers, Sri Lanka.
The Chairman to the Arbitration panel shall be appointed by the two
members of AP by mutual consent, failing which, by the Institution of
Engineers, Sri Lanka
The arbitration proceedings shall be conducted in the English language.
The decision of the majority of arbitrators shall be final and binding upon
both parties.
The expenses incurred by each party in connection with the preparation,
presentation, etc. of its proceedings as also the fees and expenses paid to the
arbitrator appointed by such party or on its behalf shall be borne by each
party itself. However, the fees and expenses paid to the Presiding Arbitrators
shall be equally borne by both, the Employer and the Contractor.
B. Time Control
GCC 25.1 The Contractor shall submit for approval a Program for the Works within
14 Days from the date of the Letter of Acceptance.
GCC 25.3 The period between Programme updates is 15 Days.
The amount to be withheld for late submission of an updated programme is
2% of the subsequent monthly bill of the contractor
C. Quality Control
GCC 33.1 The Defects Liability Period is: 01 year
GCC 37.7 Insert the following paragraph after GCC 37.6:
The Contractor shall not make any alteration and/or modification of the
Permanent Works, unless and until the Project Manager instructs or
approves a Variation.
340
D. Cost Control
GCC 43.1 The currency of the Employer’s country is: Sri Lankan Rupees (LKR)
GCC44.1
and 44.2
Replace the two Clauses 44.1 and 44.2 by the following:
The Contract is not subject to price adjustment.
GCC 45.1 The proportion of payments retained is: 10% of certified work done. The
limit of the retention shall be 5% of the Initial Contract Price.
GCC 46.1
The liquidated damages for the whole of the Works are 0.05 % of Initial
Contract Price per Day. The maximum amount of liquidated damages for the
whole of the Works is 5 % of the Initial Contract Price.
GCC 47.1 Not applicable
GCC 48.1
The Advance Payments shall be: 20 % of the initial Contract Price excluding
Provisional Sums, Contingencies and Day works and shall be paid to the
Contractor in the following two installments
Installment I:
10% of the Initial Contract Price-
Within 14 days after signing of Contract Agreement and submission of
Advance Payment Guarantee.
Installment II:
10% of the Initial Contract Price-
On acceptance of Work program, methodology, method of statement, cash
flow estimate, resource analysis and after establishment of contractor’s site
in accordance with sub clause 25.
The advanced payment shall be repaid by deducting proportionate amounts
from payments otherwise due to contractor, following the schedule of
completed percentage of the Works on a payment basis. The advance
payment shall be repaid in full when the total certified value of work reaches
90% of the initial contract price. No account shall be taken of the advance
payment or its repayment in assessing valuation of work done, Variations,
price adjustment, Compensation Events, Bonuses, or Liquidated Damages.
GCC 49.1
The Performance Security amount is 05 % of the Initial Contract Price in
LKR against an unconditional on demand Guarantee issued by a Bank
situated in Sri Lanka and registered with the Central Bank of Sri Lanka.
A Bank Guarantee shall be as per format provided in Section IX –
Contract Forms.
341
The Contractor shall ensure that the Performance Security is valid and
enforceable until the Contractor has executed and completed the Works and
remedied any defects. If the terms of the Performance Security specify its
expiry date, and the Contractor has not become entitled to receive the
Performance Certificate by the date 28 days prior to the expiry date, the
Contractor shall extend the validity of the Performance Security until the
Works have been completed and any defects have been remedied.
E. Finishing the Contract
GCC 55.1
The date by which operating and maintenance manuals and “as-built”
drawings are required, is prior to the request to issue a Certificate of
Completion of the Works pursuant to GCC 52.1.
GCC 55.2
The amount to be withheld for failing to produce “as built” drawings and/or
operating and maintenance manuals by the date required in GCC 55.1 is 2 %
of Initial Contract Price.
GCC 56.2 (g) The maximum number of days is: 100.
GCC 58.1 The percentage to apply to the value of the work not completed, representing
the Employer’s additional cost for completing the Works, is 20%
342
The following Particular Conditions shall supplement the General Conditions (GC).
Whenever there is a conflict, the provisions herein shall prevail over those in the GC.
8.2 Utilities
Add the following new Sub-Clause, after Sub-Clause 8.1
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the management,
co-ordination and execution of all activities associated with
the survey, recording, relocation, removal and protection of
public utilities including:
i) Leasing with utility authorities, the Employer, the Project
Manager, landowners and any other party concerned.
ii) The performance of the relocation, removal or protection
work. At the discretion of the public utility concerned part or
parts of this work may be performed by themselves.
iii) After seeking approval of the Employer for any amounts
payable to public utility authorities. Making payment to public
utility authorities of such amounts payable for work performed
or to be performed by them.
It is expressly understood and agreed that the Contractor has made
full allowance in his Tender for all risk and consequences of
delay, inconvenience, cost or damage associated with above.
25.5. Progress
Reports
Add the following new Sub-Clause, after Sub-Clause 25.4 as
sub clause 25.5
Monthly progress reports shall be prepared by the Contractor
and submitted to the Engineer in both electronic copy and hard
copy. The first report shall cover the period up to the end of the
first calendar month following the Commencement Date.
Reports must be submitted monthly thereafter, each within
7days after the last day of the period to which it relates.
Reporting shall continue until the Contractor has completed all
work which is known to be outstanding at the completion date
stated in the Taking-Over Certificate for the Works.
Each report shall include,
(a) Charts and detailed descriptions of Progress,
Contractor’s Documents, procurement, manufacture,
delivery to Site, construction, erection and testing; and
including these stages for work by each nominated
subcontractor
(b) Photographs showing the status of manufacture
and progress on the site,
(c) For the manufacture of each main item of plant and
343
materials, the name of the manufacture, manufacture
location, percentage progress, and the actual expected
dates of, commencement of manufacture, Contractor’s
inspectors, tests, and transport and arrival to site.
(d) The details described in records of Contractor’s
Personnel and Equipment,
(e) Copies of quality assurance documents, test results and
certificates of materials,
(f) List of notices given
(g) Safety statistics and EMAP aspects and public
relations, and
(h) Comparison of actual and planned progress, with
details of any events or circumstances which may
jeopardize the completion in accordance with the
Contract, and the measures being adopted to overcome
delays.
Such progress reports are required to accompany the
contractor's applications for Interim Payment Certificates,
implying that payment may be conditional on the receipt of
such reports.
The amount to be withheld for late submission of a Progress
report is 1% of the subsequent monthly bill of the contractor.
37.7 Provisional Sums
Add the following new Sub-Clause, after Sub-Clause 37.6
Each Provisional Sum shall only be used, in whole or in part, in
accordance with the Project Manager’s instructions, and the
Contract Price shall be adjusted accordingly. The total sum paid to
the Contractor shall include only such amounts, for the work,
supplies or services to which the Provisional Sum relates, as the
Project Manager shall have instructed. For each Provisional Sum,
the Project Manager may instruct:
(a) work to be executed (including Plant, Materials or services
to be supplied) by the Contractor and valued under Sub-
Clause 37.1-6 [Variation Procedure]; and/or
(b) Plant, Materials or services to be purchased by the
Contractor, from a nominated Subcontractor (as defined in
Clause 7 [Subcontracting]) or otherwise; and for which there
shall be included in the Contract Price:
(i) the actual amounts paid (or due to be paid) by the
Contractor, and
344
(ii) a sum for overhead charges and profit, calculated as a
percentage of these actual amounts by applying the
relevant percentage rate (if any) stated in the
appropriate Schedule. If there is no such rate, the
following overhead and profit percentage shall apply:
1. Provisional Sum Items for supply of employer,
engineer facilities and Utility diversion = 5%
2. Provisional Sum Items for work to be carried out
by contractor/subcontractor =15%
The total overhead and profit of both contractor or
subcontractor shall not exceed the above value, if this
work is carried out by a subcontractor)
The Contractor shall, when required by the Project Manager,
produce quotations, invoices, vouchers and accounts or
receipts in substantiation.
37.8 Value
Engineering
Add the following new Sub-Clause, after Sub-Clause
37.7
The Contractor may, at any time, submit to the Engineer a written
proposal which (in the Contractor’s opinion) will, if adopted, (i)
accelerate completion, (ii) reduce the cost to the Employer of
executing, maintaining or operating the Works, (iii) improve the
efficiency or value to the Employer of the completed Works, or
(iv) otherwise be of benefit to the Employer.
The proposal shall be prepared at the cost of the Contractor and
shall include the items listed in Sub-Clause 37.2 [Variation
Procedure].
If a proposal, which is approved by the Project Manager,
includes a change in the design of part of the Permanent Works,
then unless otherwise agreed by both Parties:
(a) the Contractor shall design this
part,
(b) Clause 16.1 [The Works to be completed by the
intended completi0n date] shall apply, and
(c) if this change results in a reduction in the contract
value of this part, the Engineer shall proceed in
accordance with Sub-Clauses 17.1,17.2,17.3,17.4 & 17.5
[Approval by the Project Manager] to agree or determine
a fee, which shall be included in the Contract Price. This
fee shall be half (50%) of the difference between the
following amounts:
345
(i) such reduction in contract value, resulting from the
change, and
(ii) the reduction (if any) in the value to the Employer of
the varied works, taking account of any reductions in
quality, anticipated life or operational efficiencies.
However, if amount (i) is less than amount (ii), there shall not
be a fee.
39. Payment Certificates Replace clause 39.5 with the following
The Contractor’s monthly statement shall include the value
of work executed, valuation of Variations, Compensation
Events, and the 80% of the value of the Material brought to
the site for the permanent works, but not incorporated in such
works.
56. Termination Add the following new Sub-Clause, after Sub-Clause
56.2 (h)
(a) If the Actual Progress of the contractor at any given
time, is behind the original programe by the maximum
number of days for which the maximum amount of l
liquidated damages can be paid, as defined in the PCC.
58. Payment upon
Termination Add the following new Sub-Clause, after Sub-Clause 58.2
as sub clause 58.3
If the Contract is terminated by the Employer under the following
exceptional event or circumstance, the Project Manager shall issue a
certificate for the value of the work done, Materials ordered, the
reasonable cost of removal of Equipment, repatriation of the
Contractor’s personnel employed solely on the Works, and the
Contractor’s costs of protecting and securing the Works, and less
advance payments received up to the date of the certificate.
(a) which is beyond a Party’s control,
(b) which such Party could not reasonably have provided
against before entering into the Contract,
(c) which, having arisen, such Party could not reasonably have
avoided or overcome, and
(d) which is not substantially attributable to the other Party.
346
Section IX - Contract Forms
This Section contains forms which, once completed, will form part of the Contract. The
forms for Performance Security and Advance Payment Security, when required, shall
only be completed by the successful Bidder after contract award.
347
Table of Forms
Page
Letter of Acceptance ......................................................................................................348
Contract Agreement ......................................................................................................350
Performance Security ....................................................................................................353
Advance Payment Security ...........................................................................................355
Form of Retention Money Guarantee ..........................................................................357
348
Letter of Acceptance
349
Letter of Acceptance
…………………… (date)
To:…………………………
Subject:…………………….
This is to notify you that your Bid dated …………………for execution of the
“ Supply and fixing of High Tensile Wire Mesh and Accessories in Unstable slope
segments between Culvert Nos. 75/5 & 76/4 on Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi Road
(A005).” Contract No. CRIP/WORKS/RDA/NCB/328 for the Accepted Contract Amount
of the equivalent of .,………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………as
corrected and modified in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders is hereby accepted
by our Agency.
You are requested to furnish the Performance Security within 28 days in accordance
with the Conditions of Contract, using for that purpose the of the Performance Security
Form included in Section IX (Contract Forms) of the Bidding Document.
We accept that ________________________________be appointed as the Adjudicator.
We do not accept that ________________________________be appointed as the
Adjudicator, and by sending a copy of this Letter of Acceptance to
________________________________________, the Appointing Authority, we are
hereby requesting such Authority to appoint the Adjudicator in accordance with ITB
42.1 and GCC 23.1.
Authorized Signature: ...................................................................................................................
Name and Title of Signatory: ........................................................................................................
Name of Agency: ..........................................................................................................................
Attachment: Contract Agreement
350
Contract Agreement
351
Contract Agreement
THIS AGREEMENT made the . . . . . .day of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., between
(hereinafter “the Employer”), of the one part, and
(hereinafter “the Contractor”), of the other
part:
WHEREAS the Employer desires that the Works known as “Supply and fixing of High
Tensile Wire Mesh and Accessories in Unstable slope segments between Culvert Nos.
75/5 & 76/4 on Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi Road (A005).” should be executed by the
Contractor, and has accepted a Bid by the Contractor for the execution and completion of
these Works and the remedying of any defects therein,
The Employer and the Contractor agree as follows:
1. In this Agreement words and expressions shall have the same meanings as are
respectively assigned to them in the Contract documents referred to.
2. The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as
part of this Agreement. This Agreement shall prevail over all other Contract
documents.
(a) the Letter of Acceptance;
(b) the Bid;
(c) the Addenda Nos . . . . . . . . ..;
(d) the Particular Conditions;
(e) the General Conditions;
(f) the Specification;
(g) the Drawings;
(h) the completed Schedules; and
(i) the Environmental Assessment Report.
3. In consideration of the payments to be made by the Employer to the Contractor as
indicated in this Agreement, the Contractor hereby covenants with the Employer to
352
execute the Works and to remedy defects therein in conformity in all respects with
the provisions of the Contract.
4. The Employer hereby covenants to pay the Contractor in consideration of the
execution and completion of the Works and the remedying of defects therein, the Contract
Price or such other sum as may become payable under the provisions of the Contract at the
times and in the manner prescribed by the Contract.
IN WITNESS, whereof the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be executed in
accordance with the laws of Sri Lanka on the day, month and year indicated above.
Signed
by:
Signed by:
for and on behalf of the Employer for and on behalf the Contractor
in the
presence
of:
in the
presence
of:
Witness, Name, Signature, Address, Date Witness, Name, Signature, Address, Date
353
Performance Security
354
Performance Security
Beneficiary: Director General, Road Development Authority, 1st Floor, “Maganeguma
Mahamedura”, No.216, Denzil Kobbekaduwa Mawatha, Kosswatta, Battaramulla, Sri
Lanka
Date: ......................................................................................................................................
Performance Guarantee No.: ..............................................................................................
We have been informed that ……………………………………………………………..
(hereinafter called “the Contractor”) has entered into Contract
No:CRIP/WORKS/RDA/NCB/328 dated with you, for the execution of
“Supply and fixing of High Tensile Wire Mesh and Accessories in Unstable slope
segments between Culvert Nos. 75/5 & 76/4 on Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi
Road (A005)” (hereinafter called “the Contract”).
Furthermore, we understand that, according to the conditions of the Contract, a
performance guarantee is required.
At the request of the Contractor, we………………………………………………………
hereby irrevocably undertake to pay you any sum or sums not exceeding in total an
amount of…………………………………………………………………………………
such sum being payable in the types and proportions of currencies in which the Contract
Price is payable, upon receipt by us of your first demand in writing accompanied by a
written statement stating that the Contractor is in breach of its obligation(s) under the
Contract, without your needing to prove or to show grounds for your demand or the sum
specified therein.
This guarantee shall expire, no later than the ……………….mday of ……………… , and
any demand for payment under it must be received by us at this office on or before that
date. The Guarantor agrees to extension of this guarantee in response to the Employer’s
written request for such extension, such request to be presented to the Guarantor before
the expiry of the guarantee.
This guarantee is subject to the Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees, ICC Publication
No. 758, except that subparagraph (ii) of Sub-article 20(a) is hereby excluded.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . [Seal of Bank and Signature(s)]. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
355
Advance Payment Security
356
Advance Payment Security
Beneficiary: Director General, Road Development Authority, 1st Floor, “Maganeguma
Mahamedura”, No.216, Denzil Kobbekaduwa Mawatha, Kosswatta, Battaramulla, Sri
Lanka
Date: ....................................................................
Advance Payment Guarantee No.: .....................................................................................
We have been informed that………………………………………………………………
(hereinafter called “the Contractor”) has entered into Contract No:
CRIP/WORKS/RDA/NCB/328 dated ……………………. with you, for the execution of
“Supply and fixing of High Tensile Wire Mesh and Accessories in Unstable slope
segments between Culvert Nos. 75/5 & 76/4 on Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi
Road (A005)” (hereinafter called “the Contract”).
Furthermore, we understand that, according to the Conditions of the Contract, an advance
payment in the sum of ……………………………………………………………………
is to be made against an advance payment guarantee.
At the request of the Contractor,
we………………………………………………………hereby irrevocably undertake to
pay you any sum or sums not exceeding in total an amount
of………………………………………………………………………………….. upon
receipt by us of your first demand in writing accompanied by a written statement stating
that the Contractor is in breach of its obligation under the Contract because the Contractor
used the advance payment for purposes other than the costs of mobilization in respect of
the Works.
The maximum amount of this guarantee shall be progressively reduced by the amount of
the advance payment repaid by the Contractor as indicated in copies of interim statements
or payment certificates which shall be presented to us. This guarantee shall expire, at the
latest, upon our receipt of a copy of the interim payment certificate indicating that ninety
(90) percent of the Contract Price has been certified for payment, or on the
day of………………………………………… , whichever is earlier. Consequently, any
demand for payment under this guarantee must be received by us at this office on or
before that date. The Guarantor agrees to extension of this guarantee in response to the
Employer’s written request for such extension, such request to be presented to the
Guarantor before the expiry of the guarantee.
This guarantee is subject to the Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees, ICC Publication
No. 758
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . [Seal of Bank and Signature(s)]. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
357
Form of Retention Money Guarantee
358
Form of Retention Money Guarantee
Beneficiary: Director General, Road Development Authority, 1st Floor, “Maganeguma
Mahamedura”, No.216, Denzil Kobbekaduwa Mawatha, Kosswatta, Battaramulla, Sri
Lanka
Date ……………………………………………
Retention Money Guarantee No: ………………………………………….
We have been informed that ……………………………………………………………….
(hereinafter called “the Contractor”) has entered into Contract No:
CRIP/WORKS/RDA/NCB/328 date with you, the execution of “Supply and fixing of
High Tensile Wire Mesh and Accessories in Unstable slope segments between
Culvert Nos. 75/5 & 76/4 on Peradeniya-Badulla-Chenkaladi Road (A005)” (hereinafter called “the contract”).
Furthermore, we understand that, according to the conditions of the Contract, when the
works have been taken over and the first half of the Retention Money has been certified,
the payment of the second half of the Retention Money may be made against a Retention
Money guarantee.
At the request of the Contractor, we ……………………………………………………….
hereby irrevocably under taken to pay you any some or sums not exceeding in total an
amount of …………………………………………………………………………………
upon receipt by us of your first demand in writing accompanied by a written statement
stating that the Contractor is in breach of its obligation under the Contract because the
Contractor has not attended to the defects in accordance with the Contract.
This guarantee shall expire, at the latest, ……………….(28 Days after the end of the
Defects Liability Period). Consequently, any demand for payment under this guarantee
must be received by us at this office on or before that date.
………………………………………………………………
[Signature(s)]